2019 124 SPIDER OWNER’S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name features and equipment that are either standard or op- FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer DRIVING AND ALCOHOL available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of disregard any features and equipment described in this accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- portation. factured. WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC DEAR CUSTOMER Dear Customer, We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing a 124 Spider. We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Here, you will find information, advice and important warnings regarding use of your vehicle, and how to achieve the best performance from the technical features of your vehicle. You are advised to take the time to read these publications carefully before taking to the road for the first time, in order to become familiar with the controls, specifically those concerning brakes, steering and ; at the same time, you can understand the vehicle behavior on different road surfaces. This document also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care, and maintenance of your vehicle over time. After reading it, you are advised to keep the Owner’s Manual inside the vehicle, for an easy reference and for making sure it remains in the vehicle should it be sold. In the attached Warranty Booklet, you will also find a description of the Services that FCA offers to its customers, and the detail of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate your new vehicle and the service provided by the people at FCA. Enjoy reading. Happy motoring! Note: This Owner’s Manual describes all models of the vehicle; please consider only the information relevant to your vehicle’s trim level, engine and model. All data contained in this publication are purely indicative. FCA can modify the vehicle model described in this publication at any time, for technical or commercial purposes. For further information, contact your authorized dealer. Read This Carefully REFUELING Only refuel with unleaded gasoline with a recommended rating of 91 octane. A rating less than 87 octane is not acceptable. Do not use gasoline containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and handling issues, as well as damage fundamental components of the fuel supply system.

STARTING THE ENGINE

If equipped with a manual transmission: Be sure that the parking brake is engaged; place the gear selector in NEUTRAL, fully depress the clutch pedal without pressing the accelerator, and then push the ignition button. The engine will start as soon as the ignition is pushed. If equipped with an automatic transmission: Be sure that the parking brake is engaged and that the gear selector is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), depress the brake pedal, and then push the ignition button. The engine will start as soon as the ignition is pushed.

PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material: fire hazard.

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

The vehicle is equipped with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the environment.

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

Contact your authorized dealer if you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery) after buying the vehicle. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance of the vehicle is essential for ensuring that it maintains its performance and its safety features, its environmental friendliness and low running costs are unchanged over time. How To Use This Manual ESSENTIAL INFORMATION Each time directions (left/right or forward/backwards) are listed, they are determined by facing forward from the rear of the vehicle or as from the point of view of being seated inside the car. Special cases not complying with this rule will be properly specified in the text. The figures in the Owner’s Manual are provided by way of example only: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. In addition, the Owner’s Manual has been conceived considering vehicles with steering wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible that on vehicles with steering wheel on the right side, the position of some controls or elements is not exactly mirror-like with respect to the figure. To identify the chapter with the information needed you can consult the index at the end of this Owner’s Manual. Chapters can be rapidly identified by graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A key showing the order of the chapter and the corresponding tab symbols appears on another page. SYMBOLS While reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries. There are also CAUTIONS that must be carefully followed prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle. Therefore, all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed. WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols: Personal Safety

Vehicle Safety Vehicle Modifications / Alterations

Warning!

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road holding, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could be fatally injured.

ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER If after buying the vehicle, you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that burden the electrical supply, contact your authorized dealer, whose personnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required , or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery. Note: Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. INSTALLING ELECTRICAL / ELECTRONIC DEVICES The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND MOBILE PHONES Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a separate aerial is mounted externally. Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of EC-approved mobile phones is concerned (GSM, GPRS, UMTS, LTE), follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone Manufacturer. The use of these devices inside the vehicle (without an external aerial) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise the vehicle safety in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health. If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Advanced Keyless Entry System may occur. CELL PHONE WARNING Note: Please comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of communication equipment in vehicles in your country. Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Dialing a number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver's hands. Use of these devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a serious accident. If a passenger is unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe area before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning, use a hands-free system to at least leave the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell phone or other electrical devices while the vehicle is moving and, instead, concentrate on the full-time job of driving. This page is intentionally left blank GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX This page is intentionally left blank GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

FRONT VIEW

01020304-000-100 Front View 1 — Engine Compartment 3 — Doors 5 — Exterior Lights 2 — Windshield Wiper Blades 4 — Wheels And Tires

9 REAR VIEW

01020304-001-100 Rear View Rear View

1 — Outside Mirrors 3 — Antenna 5 — Exterior Lights 2 — Top (Soft Top) 4 — Trunk Lid 6 — Fuel Door

10 INSTRUMENT PANEL

02010200-129-555 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel

1 — Turn Signal/High Beams Lever 4 — Hazard Warning Lights Button 7 — Driver Air Bag 2 — Instrument Cluster 5 — Passenger Air Bag 8 — Control Buttons 3 — Windshield Wiper And Washers 6 — Ignition Switch

11 INTERIOR OVERVIEW

01020304-002-100 Interior Overview INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1 — Steering Wheel 4 — Climate Control System 7 — Radio Control 2 — Rearview Mirror 5 — Transmission Gear Selector 8 — 3 — Radio Systems 6 — Parking Brake

12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS ...... 14 IGNITION SWITCH ...... 20 ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 21 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 23 DOORS...... 26 SEATS...... 32 NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS ...... 34 STEERING WHEEL ...... 35 MIRRORS ...... 35 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 38 WINDSHIELD WIPERS / WASHER .43 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ....44 POWER WINDOWS ...... 56 CONVERTIBLE TOP (SOFT TOP) . .58 HOOD ...... 62 TRUNKLID...... 63 TRUNK EMERGENCY RELEASE . . .66 HOMELINK — IF EQUIPPED .....66 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...... 69 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING ....74 ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION SYSTEMS...... 74

13 KEYS To use the Emergency Key, push the Do not leave children or animals inside mechanical latch on the back side of Key Fob parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior the key fob and pull out the emergency heat build-up may cause serious injury or A code number is stamped on the plate key. death. and attached to the key fob. Detach Note: this plate and store it in a safe place Key Fob Functions (not in the vehicle) if you need to make Always keep a spare key fob if one replace the Emergency Key. is lost. If a key fob is lost, see an With A Vehicle Security Alarm Also, write down the code number and authorized dealer as soon as possible. System keep it in a separate safe and The driver must carry the key fob to The hazard warning lights will flash convenient place. Do not keep it in the ensure the Keyless Entry System when the vehicle security alarm system vehicle. functions properly. is armed or disarmed. If your key fob is lost, contact an With Advanced Keyless Function authorized dealer. A beep will sound when the doors, Note: Your key fob configuration may Warning! trunk lid, and fuel filler door are locked vary with equipped features. Please see or unlocked using the key fob. The the example shown below: beep volume can be adjusted or turned Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the off. automatic transmission into PARK or the Use the following procedure to change manual transmission into FIRST gear or the beep setting: REVERSE, apply the parking brake, then turn the engine OFF, remove the key fob 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. and close the doors and the trunk lid. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. 2. Open the driver's door. Allowing children to be in a vehicle 3. Within 30 seconds of opening the unattended is dangerous for a number of driver's door, push and hold the lock reasons. A child or others could be button on the key fob for five seconds. 04010177-361-002 seriously or fatally injured. Children should Key Fob be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. 1 — Emergency Key 2 — Key Fob Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to 3 — Key Code Number Plate children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. 14 Note: Key Fob Buttons Not operating the key fob for ten seconds. The doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler Lock Button door will lock, and the beep will To lock the doors, trunk lid, and fuel Pushing any button except the activate at the current volume (if the filler door, push the lock button on the unlock button on the key fob. beep is currently set to not activate, it key fob. The hazard warning lights will Pushing a request switch on the will not activate). flash once and a beep will sound. exterior door handle. Unlock Button The setting changes when the lock Trunk Button button on the key fob is pushed, and To unlock the doors and trunk lid, push To open the trunk lid, push and hold the the beep will activate at the set volume the unlock button on the key fob, and trunk button until the trunk lid opens. (if the beep sound has been set to not the hazard warning lights will flash activate, it will not activate). twice. Panic Button Complete changing the setting by doing The system can be set to unlock both To turn the Panic Alarm on or off, push the following: doors. Use the following procedure to and hold the Panic button on the key change the setting: fob and release. When the Panic Alarm Placing the ignition in ACC or ON is on, the headlights will turn on, the position. 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position park lights will flash, the horn will pulse and close the doors and trunk lid. Closing the driver's door. on and off, and the turn signal lights will flash. 2. Open the driver's door. Opening the trunk lid. Note: The panic button will work if the Not operating the key fob for ten 3. Within 30 seconds of opening the doors or trunk are opened or closed. seconds. driver's door, push and hold the unlock Turning On The Alarm button on the key fob for five seconds. Pushing any button, except the lock Pushing the panic button for one button on the key fob. Note: The sound of the doors second or more will trigger the alarm for locking/unlocking can be heard. After about two minutes and thirty seconds, Pushing a request switch on the this, the system will change the setting and the following will occur: exterior door handle. when the unlock button is pushed (the The horn sounds intermittently. Note: Refer to “Lock/Unlock With sound of the doors locking/unlocking Advanced Keyless Entry Function — If can be heard). The hazard warning lights flash. Equipped” in “Doors” for further The setting change can be completed Turning Off The Alarm information. by doing any one of the following: The alarm will stop by pushing any The operation indicator light flashes Placing the ignition in the ACC or ON button on the key fob. when the buttons are pushed. position. Closing the driver’s door. Opening the trunk lid. 15 Operational Range Note: The engine may not start if the Replacing The Key Fob Battery key fob is placed in or around the The system operates only when the Proceed as follows: following areas: driver is in the vehicle or within 1. Push the mechanical release button operational range, and the key fob is Around The Instrument Panel and remove the emergency key. being carried. In The Storage Compartments Starting The Engine Starting the engine may be possible Key Fob Battery even if the key fob is outside the vehicle Replacement and close to a door or window. Always If key fob does not work, and the start the engine from the driver's . indicator lights do not flash, the battery If the vehicle is started, and the key fob may be low or discharged. is not in the vehicle, the vehicle will not Replace with a new battery restart after it is shut off. The ignition is (CR2025 type) before the key fob placed in the OFF position. becomes unusable. Key Fob Antenna Location The following conditions indicate that 07031301-361-002 the battery power is low: Emergency Key Removed Indicator light (green) flashes in the instrument cluster for about 1 — Key Fob Case With Mechanical 30 seconds after the engine is placed in Release Button the OFF position. 2 — Emergency Key GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The system does not operate, and the operation indicator light on the key fob does not flash when the buttons are pushed.

04010202-12R-001 The system's operational range is Key Fob Antenna Location reduced. 1 — Interior Antenna Note: Replacing the battery at an 2 — Operational Range authorized dealer is recommended to prevent damage to the key fob. If replacing the battery by yourself, follow the instruction below.

16 2. Insert a coin, a flat blade screw Note: Be careful not to allow the driver, or the tip of your emergency key rubber ring shown in call-out (6) to be into the now exposed slot and carefully scratched or damaged. If the rubber pry in the direction of the arrows to ring comes out, reinstall it before open the cover (3) slightly. inserting a new battery. Key Suspend Function If a key fob is left in the vehicle, key fob functions are temporarily suspended to prevent unlawful use of the vehicle. To restore the functions, push the 07031301-364-003 Remove Back Cover For Battery unlock button on the functions- Replacement suspended key fob. Engine Start Function 3 — Key Fob Case When Key Fob Battery Is 5 — Key Fob Battery 07031301-362-002 Discharged 3 — Pry Case Left Side 5. Insert a new battery with the positive If a key fob has discharged or 3. Insert a coin, a flat blade screw driver, pole facing up. Then, cover the battery malfunctioned, start the engine by or the tip of your emergency key into the with the battery cap. holding the Key Fob over the keyless side gap and carefully pry in the direction ignition START/STOP button. Be careful of the arrow to open the cover (4). 6. Close the cover and reinsert the to not to allow the following. The signal Emergency Key. from the key fob will not be received correctly, and the engine may not start: Contact with metal parts of other key fobs or metal objects. Contact from key fobs from other vehicle’s equipped with an immobilizer system.

07031301-363-002 4 — Pry Case Right Side 07031301-367-001 6 — Install New Battery 4. Separate the key fob case, then remove the battery. 17 Contact with devices for electronic 2. Manual Transmission: Continue to The engine cannot be started unless purchases or security passage touch. depress the clutch pedal firmly until the the clutch pedal is fully depressed engine has completely started. (manual transmission) or the brake pedal is fully depressed (automatic 3. Verify that the keyless ignition start transmission). indication light (green) flashes. If there is a malfunction with the keyless 4. Touch the keyless ignition ignition START/STOP button function, START/STOP button using the the keyless ignition start indicator light backside of the key fob while the (amber) flashes. In this case, the engine keyless ignition start indicator light may start. However, contact an (green) flashes. authorized dealer as soon as possible. 5. Verify that the keyless ignition start If the keyless ignition start indicator light indicator light (green) turns on. (green) does not illuminate, perform the 05010201-KY1-001 operation from the beginning. If it does No Keys Touching The Key Fob 6. Push the keyless ignition not illuminate, contact an authorized START/STOP button to start the dealer. engine. To change the ignition position without starting the engine, perform the following operations after the keyless ignition start indicator light (green) turns on:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 1. Release the clutch pedal (manual transmission) or brake pedal (automatic transmission).

05010201-KY2-001 2. Push the keyless ignition No Key Fob Touching The Key Fob START/STOP button to change the ignition position. The ignition cycles in If the engine cannot be started due to a 05010201-L12-001 discharged key fob battery, the engine Discharged Key Fob Battery Start the order of ACC, ON, and OFF each can be started using the following Procedure time the keyless ignition START/STOP procedure: button is pushed. When touching the keyless ignition 1. Continue to depress the brake pedal START/STOP button using the Note: To change the ignition position firmly until the engine has completely backside of the key fob, touch the again, perform the operation from the started. keyless ignition START/STOP button beginning. with the key fob buttons facing up. 18 Emergency Operation For Starting Non-FCA genuine electronic General Information The Engine equipment is installed in the vehicle. The following regulatory statement If the key warning light (red) illuminates, There is equipment which discharges applies to all radio frequency (RF) or the keyless ignition start indicator radio waves near the vehicle. devices equipped in this vehicle: light (amber) flashes, this could indicate This device complies with Part 15 of the that the engine may not start using the The key fob may consume battery FCC Rules and with Industry Canada usual starting method. Contact an power excessively if it receives license-exempt RSS standard(s). authorized dealer as soon as possible. high-intensity radio waves. Do not place the key fob near electronic devices Operation is subject to the following If this occurs, the engine can be two conditions: force-started. push and hold the such as televisions or personal keyless ignition START/STOP button computers. 1. This device may not cause harmful until the engine starts. To avoid damage to the key fob, DO interference, and NOT: Other procedures necessary for starting 2. This device must accept any the engine such as having the key fob Drop the key fob. interference received, including in the vehicle, and depressing the interference that may cause undesired Get the key fob wet. clutch pedal (manual transmission) or operation. the brake pedal (automatic Disassemble the key fob unless transmission) are required. Note: Changes or modifications not replacing the battery. expressly approved by the party Key Fob Cautions Expose the key fob to high responsible for compliance could void Because the key fob uses low-intensity temperatures such as direct sunlight. the user’s authority to operate the equipment. radio waves, it may not function under Expose the key fob to any kind of the following conditions: magnetic field. The key fob is carried with a Place heavy objects on the key fob. communication device such as cellular phones. Put the key fob in an ultrasonic cleaner. The key fob contacts or is covered by a metal object. Put any magnetized objects close to the key fob. The key fob is near electronic devices such as personal computers.

19 IGNITION SWITCH START/STOP button without depressing Some indicator lights/warning lights the clutch or brake pedal. should be inspected before the engine Push Button Start is started. Positions Do not leave the ignition in the ON position while the engine is not When the keyless ignition has been The system operates only when the key running. The battery could discharged. placed in the ON position, the sound of fob is within operational range. If the ignition is left in ACC position (for the fuel pump motor operating near the When the clutch pedal (manual automatic transmission, the gear fuel tank can be heard. This does not transmission) or brake pedal (automatic selector is in the P position, and the indicate a problem. transmission) are not depressed and the ignition is in ACC), the ignition cycles to keyless ignition START/STOP button is the OFF position automatically after pushed, the ignition cycles in the order of about 25 minutes. Warning! OFF, ACC, and ON. Pushing the START/STOP button again from ON OFF position cycles the ignition to the OFF The power supply to electrical devices Never use the PARK position as a position. turns off, and the keyless ignition start substitute for the parking brake. Always indicator light (amber) also turns off. In apply the parking brake fully when exiting the OFF position, the steering wheel is the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. locked. ACC (Accessory) When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, Some electrical accessories will operate remove the key fob from the vehicle, and and the indicator light (amber) lock your vehicle. illuminates. In the ACC position, the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE steering wheel is unlocked. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. The Keyless Entry System does not Allowing children to be in a vehicle function while the keyless ignition has unattended is dangerous for a number of been placed in the ACC position, and reasons. A child or others could be 05010101-L12-001AB seriously or fatally injured. Children should Keyless START/STOP Ignition the doors will not lock/unlock even if they have been locked manually. be warned not to touch the parking brake, Button brake pedal or the transmission gear ON Note: selector. This is the normal running position after The engine starts by pushing the the engine is started. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, (or in a location accessible to keyless ignition START/STOP button Note: The indicator light (amber) turns children), and do not leave the ignition in while depressing the clutch pedal off (the indicator light amber illuminates the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could (manual transmission) or the brake pedal when the ignition has been placed in operate power windows, other controls, or (automatic transmission). To change the the ON position and the engine is not move the vehicle. ignition position, push the keyless ignition running). 20 Be sure the parking brake is fully ADVANCED Key Fob Left-In-Trunk Warning Beep disengaged before driving; failure to do so KEYLESS ENTRY Key Fob Left-In-Vehicle Warning can lead to brake failure and a collision. SYSTEM — IF Beep Always fully apply the parking brake EQUIPPED If you have a problem with the key fob, when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll or the key fob is lost or stolen, contact and cause damage or injury. Also be Advanced Keyless Entry certain to leave the transmission in PARK. System an authorized dealer as soon as possible for a replacement and to make Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to The Advanced Keyless Entry System is the lost or stolen key fob inoperative. roll and cause damage or injury. an enhancement that allows you to Driving the vehicle with the parking brake lock/unlock the doors, trunk lid, and Note: Changes or modifications not engaged, or repeated use of the parking fuel filler door. approved by the party responsible for brake to slow the vehicle may cause The Advanced Keyless Entry System compliance could void the user's serious damage to the brake system. allows the driver to start the ignition authority to operate the equipment. with the push of a button as long as the The Advanced Keyless Entry key fob is in the passenger System operational range may vary compartment. due to local weather conditions. If equipped, the vehicle security alarm system may be armed/disarmed with The Advanced Keyless Entry the push of the lock/unlock button System is fully operational (door/trunk located on the key fob. lid/fuel filler door lock/unlock) when the ignition is placed in the OFF position. System Malfunctions/Warnings The Advanced Keyless Entry System System malfunctions or warnings are does not operate if the ignition is indicated by the following warning lights placed to any position other than the or beeps (refer to “Getting To Know OFF position. Your Instrument Panel” for further information): If the key fob does not operate when pushing a button, the operational Warning Light (Red) range becomes too small, or the Ignition Not Turned OFF Warning warning light does not illuminate or Beep flash, the battery may be weak or discharged. To install a new battery, Key Fob Removed From Vehicle refer to “Keys” in “Getting To Know Warning Beep Your Vehicle” for further information. Request Switch Inoperable Warning Beep 21 Battery life is about one year. deactivated, you will be unable to start Locking/Unlocking The Doors And Replace the battery with a new one if the engine by carrying the key fob. The Trunk Lid the Warning light (green) flashes in Contact an authorized dealer for the instrument cluster. Replacing the details. If the Advanced Keyless Entry battery about once a year is System has been deactivated, you can recommended because the start the engine by following the Warning light may not illuminate or procedure indicated when the key fob flash if the battery is low or discharged. battery becomes discharged. Additional key fobs may be Operational Range obtained at an authorized dealer. Up to The system operates only when the six key fobs may be used with the driver is in or around the vehicle while Advanced Keyless Entry System per the key fob is being carried.

vehicle. Bring all key fobs to an 04020201-12A-003 authorized dealer when additional keys Request Switch Door Functions are required. 1 — Exterior Antenna The Advanced Keyless Entry function 2 — Operational Range allows you to lock/unlock the door, 3 — Distance (31 inches) trunk lid, and fuel filler door, or open the trunk lid while carrying the key fob. Note: The system may not operate if you are too close to the windows or

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Warning! door handles.

04010202-12S-002 Advanced Keyless Entry Sensors Radio waves from the key fob may affect medical devices such as pacemakers: 1 — Interior Antenna before using the key fob near people who 2 — Operational Range use medical devices, ask the medical device manufacturer or your physician if radio waves from the key fob will affect the Note: When the battery power is low, device. or in places where there are high-intensity radio waves or noise, the Note: The Advanced Keyless Entry operational range may reduce, or the System functions can be deactivated to system may not operate. prevent any possible adverse effect on a user wearing a pacemaker or other medical device. If the system is 22 Opening The Trunk Lid General Information VEHICLE SECURITY The following regulatory statement ALARM SYSTEM — IF applies to all radio frequency (RF) EQUIPPED devices equipped in this vehicle: Modifications And This device complies with Part 15 of the Add-On Equipment FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). FCA cannot guarantee the immobilizer Operation is subject to the following and security alarm system operation if two conditions: the system has been modified or if any add-on equipment has been installed. 1. This device may not cause harmful Note: To avoid damage to the vehicle, interference, and 04020202-12A-003 do not modify the system or install any Electronic Trunk Release 2. This device must accept any add-on equipment to the immobilizer, interference received, including the security alarm system, or the 1 — Exterior Antenna vehicle. 2 — Operational Range interference that may cause undesired operation. 3 — Distance (31 inches) Immobilizer System Note: Changes or modifications not The immobilizer system allows the expressly approved by the party engine to start only with a recognized responsible for compliance could void key fob. the user’s authority to operate the If someone attempts to start the engine equipment. with an unrecognized key fob, the engine will not start, preventing unlawful vehicle use. If you have a problem with the immobilizer system or the key fob, contact an authorized dealer.

23 To avoid damage to the key fob, do not: If you lose a key fob, an authorized Disarming dealer will reset the electronic codes of Drop the key fob. The system is disarmed when the your remaining key fobs and ignition is placed in the ON position with Get the key fob wet. immobilizer system. Bring all the the correct programmed key fob. The remaining key fobs to an authorized Expose the key fob to any kind of warning light illuminates for about dealer to reset. Starting the vehicle magnetic field. three seconds and then turns off. If the with a key fob that has not been reset engine does not start with the correct Expose the key fob to high is not possible. key fob, and the warning light temperatures such as direct sunlight. Operation remains illuminated or flashing, try the following: Note: The engine may not start and warning light may illuminate or flash Make sure the key fob is within the Changes or modifications not if the key fob is placed in an area operational range for signal expressly approved by the party difficult for the system to detect the transmission. responsible for compliance could void signal, such as on the instrument panel. the user's authority to operate the Move the key fob to a location within Cycle the ignition off, and then restart equipment. the signal range, place the ignition in the engine. If the engine does not start the OFF position, and restart the after three or more tries, contact an If the engine does not start with the authorized dealer. correct key fob, and the warning engine. light keeps illuminating or flashing, the Note: Signals from a TV, radio station, Note: system may have a malfunction. transceiver, or mobile telephone could Contact an authorized dealer. If the warning light flashes interfere with your immobilizer system. If continuously while you are driving, do GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The key fobs carry a unique you are using the proper key fob and not turn the engine OFF. Contact an electronic code. For this reason, and to the engine fails to start, check the authorized dealer and have it checked. assure your safety, obtaining a warning light. If the engine is shut off while the replacement key fob can only be done Arming warning light is flashing, you will through your authorized dealer, and will The system is armed when the ignition not be able to restart it. require some waiting time. is cycled from the ON to OFF position. Because the electronic codes are Always keep a spare key fob in The warning light in the instrument reset when the immobilizer system is case one is lost. If a key fob is lost, cluster flashes every two seconds until repaired, the keys are needed. Make contact an authorized dealer as soon the system is disarmed. sure to bring all the key fobs to an as possible. authorized dealer so that they can be programmed.

24 Vehicle Security Alarm The trunk lid will not open when the The system will disarm if one of the System — If Equipped vehicle security alarm system is following operations takes place within activated. 20 seconds after pushing the lock If the security alarm system detects an button: To rearm the system, perform inappropriate entry into the vehicle, or If the battery becomes drained while the arming procedure again: the intrusion sensor detects movement the vehicle security alarm system is in the vehicle, which could result in the armed, the siren will activate, and the 1. Unlocking any door. vehicle or its contents being stolen, the hazard warning lights will flash during alarm alerts the surrounding area by the battery charging or replacement 2. Opening any door. process. sounding the siren/horn and flashing 3. Opening the engine compartment. the hazard warning lights. How To Arm The System 4. Placing the ignition in the ON The system will not function unless it is Close the windows and the position. properly armed. Follow the arming convertible top. procedure correctly. When the doors are locked by pushing Place the ignition in the OFF position. Siren/Horn Triggering Conditions the lock button on the key fob, or using The siren/horn sounds intermittently, Make sure the engine compartment, the emergency key, the hazard warning and the hazard warning lights flash for convertible top, doors, and trunk lid are lights will flash once to indicate that the about 30 seconds when the system is closed. vehicle security alarm system is armed. triggered by any one of the following: Push the lock button on the key fob Note: or lock the driver's door from the Unlocking a door with an inside If any door or trunk lid remains outside with the emergency key. The door-lock knob. closed for 30 seconds, the doors, and hazard warning lights will flash once. trunk lid automatically re-lock, and the Forcing open a door, the engine With The Advanced Keyless Entry vehicle security alarm system arms compartment, or the trunk lid. function: push a request switch. The even if a window opens or the warning light in the instrument Opening the hood by operating the convertible top is left down. hood release handle. panel flashes twice per second for 20 seconds. After 20 seconds the To reactivate the intrusion sensor, Placing the ignition in the ON position system is fully armed. turn off the armed vehicle security without starting the engine. The vehicle security alarm system can alarm system and then rearm it. With the intrusion sensor: the also be armed by activating the auto The intrusion sensor is operational intrusion sensor detects a movement in re-lock function with all the doors, the when the vehicle security alarm system the vehicle. trunk lid and the engine compartment is armed. To cancel the intrusion The system will be triggered again (up closed. sensor, push the intrusion sensor to ten times) if one of the above cancel button each time the vehicle conditions remains. security alarm system is armed. 25 To Turn Off An Armed System DOORS An armed system can be turned off Lock/Unlock With using any one of the following methods: Emergency Key Pushing the unlock button on the key The doors, trunk lid, and fuel door lock fob. automatically when the driver's door is Starting the engine with the keyless locked using the emergency key. ignition START/STOP button. Lock With Emergency Key — Insert With The Advanced Keyless Entry key into driver’s door and turn to the left function: pushing a request switch on (toward front of car). the exterior door handles. 04030107-L21-001AB Unlock With Emergency Key — Interior Door Lock Knob Note: When the doors are unlocked by Insert key into driver’s door and turn to pushing the unlock button on the key the right (toward back of car). 1 — Door Lock Knob Position (Red fob, the hazard warning lights will flash Both Doors unlock when the driver's Indicator Not Seen When Locked) twice to indicate that the system is door is unlocked using the emergency 2 — Door Unlock Knob Position (Red turned off. key. Indicator Seen When Unlocked) To Stop The Alarm Turn the emergency key toward the A triggered alarm can be turned off front to lock, toward the back to unlock. Note: The red indication can be seen using any one of the following methods: when the door lock knob is unlocked. Pushing the unlock button on the key Caution! Operation From Outside

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE fob. To lock the passenger door with the door lock knob from the outside, push Starting the engine with the keyless An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for ignition START/STOP button. the door-lock knob to the lock position thieves. Always remove key fob from the and close the door (holding the door With The Advanced Keyless Entry vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. handle in the open position is not function: pushing a request switch on required). the exterior door handles or the electric Note: When locking the door this way, trunk release while the key fob is being Manual Lock/Unlock be careful not to leave the key fob carried. Knob inside the vehicle. The driver's door The hazard warning lights will flash Operation From Inside lock knob cannot be used while the twice. To lock any door from the inside, push driver's door is open. the door lock knob. To unlock, pull it outward. This does not operate the other door locks. 26 Central Lock/Unlock Double Locking System — If Equipped Warning! The doors, trunk lid, and fuel door lock automatically when the lock rocker The double locking system is designed switch is pushed with both doors to prevent someone who has broken For personal security and safety in the closed. into your vehicle from opening the door event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors from the inside. If you have any before you drive as well as when you park Note: and leave the vehicle. problems with the double locking The doors, trunk lid, and the fuel system, contact an authorized dealer. When leaving the vehicle, always remove filler door cannot be locked while any System Activation the key fob from the vehicle and lock your other door is open. vehicle. If equipped with Advanced Keyless Proceed as follows: Entry, always make sure the keyless ignition is Thekeyfobmaynotbeabletobe in “OFF” position, remove the key fob from 1. Close both the windows and the detected by the vehicle keyless-go convertible top. the vehicle and lock the vehicle. system if it is located next to a mobile Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may phone, laptop or other electronic 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position cause severe personal injuries or death. device; these devices may block the and take the key fob with you. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, key fob’s wireless signal and prevent or with access to an unlocked vehicle. the keyless-go system from starting 3. Close both doors and trunk lid. Allowing children to be in a vehicle the vehicle. unattended is dangerous for a number of 4. Insert the emergency key in the reasons. A child or others could be driver's door, turn the emergency key to seriously or fatally injured. Children should the lock position (counter be warned not to touch the parking brake, clockwise/left), and return it to the brake pedal or the gear selector. center position. Then turn it to the lock Do not leave the key fob in or near the position (counter clockwise/left) again vehicle, or in a location accessible to within three seconds. children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Advanced Keyless Entry in the ACC or ON/RUN positions. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. 04030105-12D-002 Central/Power Door Lock Switch Both unlock when the unlock rocker switch is pushed. Note: The doors, trunk lid, and the fuel filler door cannot be locked while any other door is open. 27 5. The indicator light illuminates for Lock/Unlock With To unlock both doors and fuel filler door, about three seconds to indicate that the Advanced Keyless Entry push the button on the exterior door system has been activated. Function — If Equipped handle twice within three seconds. Two more beeps will sound. The doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler door can be locked/unlocked by pushing the Front Passenger Door Request request switch on the exterior door Switch: handle while the key fob is being To unlock both doors and fuel filler door, carried. push the buton on the exterior door handle. A beep swill sound twice; the hazard warning lights will flash twice. Note: Confirm that both doors, and fuel

04030102-12A-001 filler door are securely locked. Emergency Key Lock Procedure For the trunk lid, move it without The system can be activated by pushing the electric trunk lid opener to pushing the lock button on the key fob verify that the trunk lid has not been twice within three seconds. left open. With The Advanced Keyless 04000098-121-555 Both doors and the fuel filler door Function: the system can be activated Request Switch On Exterior Door cannot be locked when any door is by pushing the request switch on the Handle open. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE exterior door handle twice within three To Lock seconds. It may require a few seconds for the To lock the doors, trunk lid, and fuel doors to unlock after the request Note: The system cannot be activated filler door, push the button on the switch on the exterior door handle is when any door is open. exterior door handle; the hazard pushed. System Deactivation warning lights will flash once. The key fob may not be able to be Unlock the driver's door or place the A beep will sound once. detected by the vehicle keyless-go ignition in the ON position. If the power To Unlock system if it is located next to a mobile supply is interrupted (fuse blows or the phone, laptop or other electronic battery is disconnected), the system Driver's door button is located on the device; these devices may block the can only be deactivated by unlocking a exterior door handle. key fob’s wireless signal and prevent door with the emergency key. To unlock the doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler door, push the button on the the keyless-go system from starting exterior door handle; the hazard the vehicle. warning lights will flash twice. 28 A beep sound is heard for confirmation Not operating the key fob for ten If you are out of the operational range when the doors, and fuel filler door are seconds. before the doors and trunk lid are closed locked/unlocked using the request or another key fob is left in the vehicle, the Pushing any button except the lock switch on the exterior door handle. If auto-lock function will not work. button on the key fob. you prefer, the beep sound can be Always make sure that both doors and turned off. Pushing a request switch on the trunk lid are closed and locked before The volume of the beep sound can also exterior door handle. leaving the vehicle. The auto-lock be changed. Use the following With Vehicle Security Alarm System function does not close the power procedure to change the setting: windows. The hazard warning lights flash when 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position the security alarm system is armed or Auto Re-Lock Function and close both of the doors and the disarmed. Refer to “Vehicle Security After unlocking with the button on the trunk lid. Alarm System” in “Getting To Know exterior door handle, the doors and fuel Your Vehicle” for further information. filler door will automatically lock if any of 2. Open the driver's door. The setting can be changed so that the the following operations are not 3. Within 30 seconds of opening the doors and the fuel filler door are locked performed within about 60 seconds. driver's door, push and hold the lock automatically without pushing the If your vehicle has a security alarm button on the key fob for five seconds button on the exterior door handle. system, the hazard warning lights will or longer. The doors, and fuel filler door Refer to “Personalization Features” in flash for confirmation. will lock, an audible beep will activate at “Getting To Know Your Instrument The time required for the doors to lock the currently set volume (if the beep Panel” for further information. automatically can be changed. Refer to sound is currently set to not activate, it Auto-Lock Function “Personalization Features” in “Getting will not activate). The setting changes A beep is heard when both doors are To Know Your Instrument Panel” for each time the lock button on the key closed while the key is carried. Both further information. fob is pushed and the beep will activate doors, the trunk lid, and fuel door are Opening a door or the trunk lid. at the set volume (if the beep sound locked automatically after about three has been set to not activate, it will not seconds when the Advanced Keyless Placing the ignition in any position activate). Entry key fob is out of the operational other than the OFF position. 4. The setting change is completed by range. Locking/Unlocking With A Key Fob doing any one of the following: The hazard warning lights will flash The doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler door once (even if the driver is in the can be locked/unlocked by operating Place the ignition in the ACC or ON operational range, both doors, trunk lid, the keyless entry system key fob. Refer position. and fuel filler door are locked to “Keys” in “Getting To Know Your Closing the driver's door. automatically after about 30 seconds). Vehicle” for further information. Opening the trunk lid. 29 Locking/Unlocking With Door-Lock Auto Lock/Unlock Auto Lock/Unlock Function Setting Switch Function — If Equipped Change Using Door-Lock Switch (With Door-Lock Switch) Both doors and the fuel filler door lock When the vehicle speed exceeds automatically when the lock side is 12 MPH (20 km/h), the doors, and fuel The doors and fuel filler door can be set pushed. They unlock when the unlock filler door lock automatically. to lock or unlock automatically by side is pushed. selecting any one of the functions from When the ignition is placed in the OFF the following table and using the To lock the doors and fuel filler door position, the doors and fuel filler door door-lock switch on the interior door from an open door, push the lock side unlock automatically. of the door lock switch and then close panel. There are only a total of six auto These functions can also be disabled the door. lock/unlock settings available for so that they do not operate. Note: When locking the doors this automatic transmission vehicles, and way, be careful not to leave the key fob three for manual transmission vehicles. inside the vehicle. Be sure to push the unlock side of the driver's door-lock switch the correct number of times according to the selected function number. If the switch is mistakenly pushed seven times on an automatic transmission vehicle or four times on a manual transmission, the procedure will be cancelled. If this occurs, start the procedure from the beginning. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

30 Function Number Function (*) 1 The auto door-lock function is disabled. The doors and the fuel filler door lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 12 MPH 2 (20 km/h) or more. The doors and the fuel filler door lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 12 MPH 3 (20 km/h) or more. The doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler door unlock when the ignition is cycled from the ON to OFF position. Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only: when the ignition is placed in the ON position, and the 4 gear selector is shifted from park (P) to any other gear position, the doors,and fuel filler door lock automatically. Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only: when the ignition is placed in the ON position, and the gear selector is shifted from PARK (P) to any other gear position, the doors and the fuel filler door 5 lock automatically. When the dear selector is shifted to PARK (P) while the ignition is placed in the ON position, the doors and the fuel filler door unlock automatically. Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only: the doors and the fuel filler door lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 12 MPH (20 km/h) or more. When the gear selector is shifted to 6 PARK (P) while the ignition is placed in the ON position, the doors and the fuel filler door unlock automatically.

(*) For other settings for the auto door 3. Push and hold the lock side of the 5. Three seconds after the function lock function contact an authorized driver's door-lock switch within setting has been changed, a beep dealer. 20 seconds of placing the ignition in the sound will beep in the amount of the Note: Function number three is the ON position, and make sure a beep is selected function number (example: factory setting for your vehicle. heard about eight seconds afterwards. Function number 3 = three beep sounds). Settings Changing 4. Refer to the auto lock/unlock Settings can be changed using the function setting table. Determine the following procedure: function number for the desired setting. Push the unlock side of the driver's 1. Safely park the vehicle. Both doors door-lock switch the same number of must remain closed. times as the selected function number 2. Place the ignition in the ON position. (example: if you select function 2, push the unlock side of the switch only two times). 31 Automatic Transmission Vehicles vehicle receives an impact strong SEATS enough to inflate the air bags, both the The doors cannot be locked or Manual Adjustment unlocked while the setting function is doors, the trunk lid, and fuel filler door being performed. are automatically unlocked after about Forward / Rearward The procedure can be cancelled by six seconds have elapsed from the To move the seat forward or rearward, pushing the lock side of the door-lock time of the accident. The doors, trunk pull the adjustment bar. Release the bar switch. lid, and the fuel filler door may not once the desired position is reached. unlock depending on how an impact is Using body pressure, move forward Note: applied, the force of the impact, and and rearward on the seat to be sure other conditions of the accident. If The vehicle lock-out prevention that the seat adjusters have latched. door-related systems or the battery is feature prevents you from locking malfunctioning, the doors, trunk lid, yourself out of the vehicle. Both doors, and the fuel filler door will not unlock. trunk lid, and the fuel filler door will automatically unlock if they are locked When opening a door, the power using the power door locks with any windows open a little automatically. door open. If both the doors are closed When closing the door, the power even though the trunk lid is open, both windows close automatically. This is a the doors and the fuel filler door will function for improving the sealing of lock. the window, and it does not mean there is a problem. If the vehicle battery Door Unlock (Control) System is disconnected for vehicle With Collision Detection — If maintenance or other reasons, the 03010202-12A-003

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Equipped: this system automatically Manual Seat Adjustment power windows will not open or close unlocks the doors, trunk lid, and the automatically. If the power windows do 1 — Adjustment Bar fuel filler door in the event the vehicle is not open or close, the automatic involved in an accident to allow 2 — Height Dial open/close mechanism for the passengers to get out of the vehicle 3 — Recline Lever windows must be reset. immediately and prevent being trapped inside. While the ignition is placed in Height the ON position and in the event the To adjust the height for front edge of the seat bottom, rotate the dial to the desired position.

32 Seat Recline Heated Seats Use the seat warmer when the engine is running. Leaving the seat To recline the seatback, lift up the On some models, the front driver and warmer on for long periods with the recline lever and lean back until the passenger seats may be equipped with engine not running could discharge the desired position has been reached, heaters in both the seat cushions and battery. then release the lever. Make sure the seatbacks. The controls for the front lever returns to its original position and heated seats are located on the center The temperature of the seat warmer the seatback is locked in place by instrument panel below the climate cannot be adjusted beyond High, attempting to push it forward and controls. Medium and Low. rearward. The heated seats have three settings: Once a heat setting is selected, High, Medium, and Low. Push the heat will be felt within two to five Warning! switch once to turn the heated seats on minutes. High, twice for Medium, and three times for Low. Pushing the switch a fourth Adjusting a seat while driving may be time will turn the heated seat off. dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could Note: cause a collision and serious injury or death. If the ignition is cycled OFF while the seat warmer is operating (High, Seats should be adjusted before Mid or Low), and then cycled ON fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death again, the seat warmer will could result from a poorly adjusted seat automatically operate at the belt. temperature set before the ignition was cycled OFF. Do not ride with the seatback reclined 03010203-L12-002 so that the shoulder belt is no longer Heated Seat Switches resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

33 NON-ADJUSTABLE Driver And Passenger Head Restraints Warning! HEAD RESTRAINTS The non-adjustable head restraints are Your vehicle is equipped with form fitted into the upper structure of non-adjustable head restraints on the Persons who are unable to feel pain to driver's and passenger's seatbacks. the skin because of advanced age, chronic the seatback, and are designed to illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, reduce the risk of injury by restricting The non-adjustable head restraints medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or head movement in the event of a rear consist of a trimmed foam covering other physical condition must exercise impact. The seatback should be over the upper structure of the care when using the seat heater. It may properly adjusted to an upright position seatbacks and are intended to help cause burns even at low temperatures, where the head restraint is positioned protect occupants from neck injury. especially if used for long periods of time. as close as possible to the back of the Adjust the seatbacks to their upright, Do not place anything on the seat or occupant’s head. on-road positions so that the head seatback that insulates against heat, such restraint is positioned as close as as a blanket or cushion. This may cause Warning! possible to the back of the occupant’s the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a head. seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into position. Otherwise, the seat Warning! will not provide the proper stability for passengers. An improperly latched Caution! seatback could cause serious injury. All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Do not use organic solvents to clean the placed in their proper positions in order to seat. It may damage the seat surface and minimize the risk of neck injury in the event the heater. of a crash. Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.

34 STEERING WHEEL MIRRORS Steering Wheel Outside Mirrors Adjustment Be sure that all inside and outside To change the angle of the steering mirrors are adjusted to the desired wheel: position prior to driving the vehicle. 1. With the gear selector in the PARK Mirror Types: position, pull the lock release lever, Flat Type (Driver Side): flat surface located under the steering column, mirror. downward. 04050101-12A-001 Convex Type (Passenger Side): this 2. Tilt the steering wheel to the desired Manual Tilt Adjustment mirror has a slight curve. position. 1 — Lock Release Lever Note: The passenger side convex 3. Push the lock release lever upward outside mirror will give a much wider to lock the steering column. view toward the rear of the vehicle, and especially of the adjacent lane. 4. Attempt to push the steering wheel The perceived distance of objects in the upward and downward to ensure it is Warning! outer and inner regions of the wide locked before driving. angle mirror is different.

Do not adjust the steering column while Warning! driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose Vehicles and other objects seen in the control of the vehicle. Be sure the steering passenger side convex mirror will look column is locked before driving your smaller and farther away than they really vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may are. Relying too much on your passenger result in serious injury or death. side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror.

35 Inside Day / Night Mirror

Rear View Mirror Adjustment Before driving, adjust the rear view mirror to center on the view through the rear window.

04060102-MAN-002 04060102-36E-666 Mirror Adjustment Lever Automatic Dimming Mirror Buttons 1 — Mirror Adjustment Lever 1—Off A — Day Driving Position 2—On B — Reduced Glare Position 3 — Light Sensor

04060102-ADJ-001 Automatic Dimming Manual Mirror Adjustment Mirror — If Equipped Caution! Note: Before adjusting the manual The automatic dimming mirror mirror, place the mirror in the “day automatically reduces glare of

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE driving position” (see below). headlights from vehicles at the rear To avoid damage to the mirror during Reducing Glare From Headlights when the ignition is cycled ON. cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution 1. Push the lever forward for day Push the off button ( O ) to cancel the onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror driving (A position). automatic dimming function. The clean. indicator light will turn off. 2. Pull the lever rearward to reduce glare of headlights from vehicles at the rear (B position).

36 Push the off button ( O ) to cancel the Power Mirrors Folding Mirrors automatic dimming function. The The ignition must be in the ACC or ON Manually fold the outside mirror indicator light will turn off. position to adjust the outside power rearward until it is flush with the vehicle. To reactivate the automatic dimming mirrors. function, push the on button ( I ). The Rotate the mirror switch to the left(L) indicator light will illuminate. orright(R)toselect which mirror to adjust. Push the mirror control switch in the direction of the desired position.

04060101-12R-001 Outside Folding Mirror

04060102-121-666 Your vehicle may be equipped with a Light/Rain Sensor driver side automatic-dimming mirror. The automatic-dimming door mirror is 2 — Light Sensor linked with the automatic-dimming 04060101-L12-001 rearview mirror inside the vehicle to Power Mirror Switch Note: automatically reduce headlight glare 0 — Center Position from vehicles at the rear. Refer to Do not use glass cleaner or 1 — Left Position “Automatic Dimming Mirror” in this suspend objects on or around the light 2 — Right Position section for further information. sensor. Otherwise, light sensor Note: The passenger door mirror does sensitivity will be affected and may not not have the automatic-dimming operate normally. After adjusting the mirror, lock the feature. The automatic dimming function is control by rotating the switch to the canceled when the ignition is cycled center position to prevent accidental ON and the gear selector is in movements. REVERSE.

37 Heated Mirrors — If EXTERIOR LIGHTS Equipped Headlights These mirrors are heated to melt frost or Rotate the headlight switch to ice. This feature will be activate/deactivate the headlights, other activated whenever exterior lights and dashboard you push the Rear illumination. Window Defrost button. Refer to When the lights are turned on, the “Climate Control System” for further indicator in the instrument cluster information. illuminates.

05030101-132-001

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Headlight Switch 1 — Headlight Switch 2 — Fog Light Switch

Note: To prevent discharge of the battery, do not leave the lights on while the engine is OFF.

38 Headlight Operation Without Auto-Light Control

Switch Position OFF Daytime Running Lights High Beams

Ignition Position ON ACC Or OFF ON ACC Or OFF ON ACC Or OFF Headlights Off Off Off Off On Off Daytime Running Lights On Off Off Off Off Off Tail Lights / Position Lights / License Plate Lights / Off Off On On On On Instrument Panel (*) Illumination (*) If the driver's door is opened, or 30 seconds have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off.

With Auto-Light Control

Daytime Running Switch Position OFF AUTO High Beams Lights

ACC ACC ACC ACC Ignition Position ON ON ON ON Or OFF Or OFF Or OFF Or OFF Headlights Off Off Auto (*) Off Off Off On Off Daytime Running Lights On Off Auto (*) Off Off Off Off Off Tail Lights / Position Lights / License Plate On (**) / Off Off Auto On On On On (****) Lights / Instrument Panel Illumination Off (***) (*) The headlights and other light settings adjust automatically depending on the surrounding brightness detected by the sensor. (**) While the lights are turned on, they will remain on even if the ignition is cycled to a position other than ON. If the driver’s door is opened, or 30 seconds have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off. (***) When the ignition is cycled to a position other than ON, the lights will not turn on even if the headlight switch is turned to AUTO. (****) If the driver’s door is opened, or 30 seconds have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off.

39 Daytime Running Lights Automatic Lighting damaged when the wipers activate (DRL) automatically. If you are going to clean When the headlight switch is in the the windshield, be sure the wipers are The daytime running lights turn on AUTO position and the ignition is cycled turned off completely when the engine automatically when the vehicle starts ON, the light sensor will detect the is running. moving. surrounding light levels and They turn off when the parking brake is automatically turns the headlights, other Note: engaged or the gear selector is shifted exterior lights and dashboard illumination on or off. The headlights, other exterior lights to the PARK position (if equipped with and dashboard lights may not turn off automatic transmission). Note: Do not shade the light sensor by immediately even if the surrounding Note: In some markets, the daytime placing a sticker or a label on the area becomes well-lit because the light running lights can be deactivated. Refer windshield. Otherwise the light sensor sensor determines that it is night time if to “Settings” in “Multimedia” in your will not operate correctly. the surrounding area is continuously User Guide for more information. dark for several minutes such as inside High Beams long tunnels, traffic jams inside tunnels, or in indoor parking lots. In this case, The headlights can be switched the lights turn off if the light switch is between high and low beams by turned to the OFF position. pushing the headlight switch lever forward for high beams, and pulling the When the headlight switch is in the lever rearward to return to low beams. AUTO position and the ignition is cycled to ACC or OFF, the headlights, When the headlight high beams are on, other exterior lights and dashboard

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE the high beam indicator is illumination will turn off. illuminated in the instrument cluster. 05030101-12A-003 The dashboard lights can be Flash To Pass Light Sensor adjusted by rotating the knob in the You can signal another vehicle with your The light sensor also works as a rain instrument cluster. The day/night mode headlights by partially pulling the sensor for the auto-wiper control. Keep can be changed by rotating the knob headlight lever toward the steering hands and scrapers clear of the until a beep sound is heard. wheel. This will cause the high beam windshield when the wiper lever is in The sensitivity of the automatic headlights to turn on until the lever is the AUTO position and the ignition is lightsmaybechangedbyan released. cycled ON, as fingers could be pinched authorized dealer. The high beam indicator in the or the wipers and wiper blades instrument cluster illuminates while the high beams are active.

40 Follow Me Home With Auto-Light Control The Follow Me Home Light System When the fog light switch is in the turns on the headlights (low beams) for position and the headlight switch is a period of time after the ignition is in AUTO position, the front fog lights will cycled OFF. stay on. System Activation Turn Signals With the ignition cycled to ACC or OFF, The ignition must be in the ON position pull the headlight control lever rearward to use the turn signals and lane change and the low beam headlights will turn assist. on. 05030101-132-001 Move the signal lever down (for a left The headlights turn off after a period of Headlight Switch turn) or up (for a right turn). The signal time after all doors are closed. will self-cancel after the turn is The time until the headlights turn off 1 — Headlight Switch completed. 2 — Fog Light Switch after all of the doors are closed can be If the indicator light continues to flash changed through the Connect system. after a turn, manually return the lever to The headlights turn off if the lever is The fog light indicator in the its original position. pulled again while the headlights are on, instrument cluster illuminates while the The turn signal indicators (green) or after three minutes of no further front fog lights are on. in the instrument cluster flash action after the first pull of the lever. Deactivation according to the operation of the turn Front Fog Lights Perform one of the following operations signal lever to show which signal is active. The front fog light can be activated to turn off the front fog lights: Note: If an indicator light stays on when the ignition is in the ON position Rotate the fog light switch to the OFF without flashing or if it flashes and the headlights or parking lights are position. abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs on. Turn the headlight switch to the OFF may be burned out. Activation position. Turn the headlight switch to the or position. Cycle the ignition to a position other than ON. Rotate the fog light switch to the position. The fog light indicator in the instrument cluster goes off when the front fog light is turned off.

41 Lane Change Assist Leaving Home Light Headlamp Leveling System System — If Equipped Move the lever halfway toward the direction of the lane change (until the The Leaving Home Light System turns On some models, the angle of the indicator flashes) and hold it there. It will the headlights on when the unlock headlights will be automatically adjusted return to the off position when released. button on the key fob is pushed while when turning on the headlights. away from the vehicle. Three-Flash Turn Signal Adjusting The Headlight After releasing the turn signal lever, the Activation When Abroad turn signal indicator flashes three times. With the ignition cycled to OFF, and the Dipped headlights are adjusted for The operation can be cancelled by headlight switch is in the or position, the headlights will driving in the country where the vehicle moving the lever in the direction was originally purchased. opposite to which it was operated. illuminate when the unlock button on When travelling in countries with The three-flash turn signal function can the key fob is pushed, and the vehicle receives the signal. opposite driving direction, to avoid be turned on or off using the flashing the drivers on the other side of personalization function in the radio. The headlights turn off after 30 seconds. the road, you need to cover areas of Adaptive Front Lighting the headlight. For this operation contact The following lights turn on when the System (AFS) — If an authorized dealer. Leaving Home Light System is Equipped operated: low beams/parking lights/tail This system directs the main headlight lights/license plate lights. beams and adapts it to the driving Operation of the Leaving Home Light conditions around bends and turns, System can be turned on or off through GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE continuously and automatically. the Connect system. The system directs the headlight beam to illuminate the road in the best way, When the lock button on the key fob taking into account the speed of the is pushed, and the vehicle receives the vehicle, the bend or corner angle and signal, the headlights turn off. the speed of steering. When the headlight switch is in a The Adaptive Front Lighting System is position other than or ,the automatically activated when the headlights turn off. vehicle is started.

42 WINDSHIELD OFF: stop When the wiper lever is in the AUTO position and the ignition is cycled ON, WIPERS / WASHER AUTO: auto control operation the wipers may move automatically in Windshield Wipers And — or LO: low speed operation the following cases: Washer = or HI: high speed operation If the windshield above the rain The windshield wiper/washer lever is sensor is touched or wiped with a cloth. located on the right side of the steering Adjusting Rain Sensor Sensitivity wheel. The ignition must be cycled ON The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be If the windshield is struck with a hand before using these features. adjusted by rotating the switch on the or other object from either outside or wiper lever. inside the vehicle. Windshield Wipers From the center position (normal), Activate the windshield wipers by rotate the switch downward for higher Warning! pushing the wiper lever up or down. sensitivity (+) (faster response) or rotate With Intermittent Wiper it upward for less sensitivity (-) (slower Set the lever to the intermittent position response). Keep hands and scrapers clear of the and choose the interval timing by windshield when the wiper lever is in the rotating the center switch. AUTO position and the ignition is cycled ON, as fingers could be pinched or the Switch positions: wipers and wiper blades damaged when or MIST: operation while the wipers activate automatically. pushing the lever upward If you are going to clean the windshield, OFF: stop be sure the wipers are turned off. This --- or INT: intermittent operation is important when clearing ice and snow. — or LO: low speed operation Turning the auto-wiper lever from the = or HI: high speed operation 05030101-122-001 OFF to the AUTO position while driving Windshield Wiper Lever With Auto-Wiper Control activates the windshield wipers once, When the wiper lever is in the AUTO 1 — Rain Sensor Adjustment after which they operate according to position, the rain sensor will sense the the rainfall amount. amount of rainfall on the windshield and Note: Do not shade the rain sensor by The auto-wiper control may not operate turns the wipers on or off automatically placing a sticker or a label on the when the rain sensor temperature is (off/intermittent/low speed/high speed). windshield. Otherwise the rain sensor about 14 °F (–10 °C) or lower, or about Switch positions: will not operate correctly. 185 °F (85 °C) or higher. or MIST: operation while pulling up lever 43 If the windshield is coated with water With the wiper lever in the OFF, CLIMATE CONTROL repellent, the rain sensor may not be intermittent, or AUTO position, the SYSTEM able to sense the amount of rainfall wipers will operate continuously until correctly and auto-wiper control may the lever is released. Operating Tips not operate properly. The air conditioning system will only If dirt or debris (such as ice or debris Warning! operate with the engine running. containing salt water) adheres to the To prevent the battery from being windshield above the rain sensor or if discharged while the engine is off, do the windshield is iced, it could cause Sudden loss of visibility through the not leave the Blower Control Knob on the wipers to move automatically. windshield could lead to a collision. You for extended periods of time. However, if the wipers cannot remove might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the To improve system efficiency, clear all this ice, dirt or debris, the auto-wiper windshield during freezing weather, warm obstructions (leaves, snow and ice) control will stop operation. In this case, the windshield with defroster before and from the hood and the air inlet in the set the wiper lever to the low speed during windshield washer use. grille. position or high speed position for Use the air conditioning system to manual operation, or remove the ice, If the fluid level is normal and the defog the windows and dehumidify the dirt or debris by hand to restore the air. auto-wiper operation. washer does not work, contact an authorized dealer. Recirculation mode should be used If the auto-wiper lever is left in the when driving through tunnels, while in a AUTO position, the wipers could traffic jam, or when you would like to operate automatically from the effect of quickly cool the interior. strong light sources, electromagnetic GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE waves, or infrared light because the rain Use the outside air position for sensor uses an optical sensor. ventilation or windshield defrosting. It is recommended that the auto-wiper If the vehicle has been parked in direct lever be turned to the OFF position sunlight during hot weather, open the other than when driving the vehicle windows to let warm air escape, and under rainy conditions. then run the air conditioning system. The auto-wiper control functions can be To keep the internal parts lubricated and the system running smoothly, run turned off. 04110109-115-001 Windshield Washer Nozzles the air conditioner about ten minutes at Windshield Washer least once a month. Pull the wiper/washer lever rearward Have the air conditioner checked before and hold it to spray washer fluid onto the weather gets hot. A lack of the windshield. refrigerant may make the air conditioner less efficient. The refrigerant 44 specifications are indicated on a label (A Vent Operation or B depending on the market) Adjusting The Vents attached to the inside of the engine compartment. Check the label before To adjust the direction of air flow, move refilling the refrigerant. If the wrong type the vent adjustment knob. of refrigerant is used, it could result in a Note: When using the air conditioner in serious malfunction of the air humid conditions, fog may blow from conditioner. For details, contact an the vents. This is a result of humid air authorized dealer. being suddenly cooled and does not indicate a system malfunction.

Center Vents (Driver) and Side 06010201-033-001 Vents Side Air Vents Center and side vents are located on the dashboard. Air vent open/close: the air vents can be fully opened and closed by using knob1(A=open/B=close). Air flow direction adjustment:use 06010100121001 knob 1 to adjust the center vents to the Label Location desired position.

Caution!

06010201-033-666 Operating the Side Air Vents The system uses a coolant that is compatible with the laws in force in the 1 — Air Vent Knob countries where the vehicle is sold, R134a A — Open Position or R1234yf (indicated on a specific plate in B — Closed Position the engine compartment). The use of other coolants affects the efficiency and condition of the system. Also the compressor coolants used must be compatible with the indicated coolant.

45 Center Vents (Front Passenger) Center vents are located on the dashboard. Air vent open/close: use the Center Vent tab 1 to open/close the center vents(A=open/B=close). Air flow direction adjustment: use the Center Vent tab 1 to adjust the center vents to the desired position. 06010201-121-777 Operating The Central Air Vent 1 — Center Vent Tab A — Open Position B — Closed Position

06010201-121-001 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Central Air Vent

46 Airflow Mode

06010202-121-002 Airflow Locations 1 — Fixed Upper Air Diffuser 2 — Adjustable Side Air Vents 3 — Adjustable Center Air Vent 4 — Floor Vents

47 Manual Climate Control System With MAX A/C function GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

06010300-122-002 Manual Climate Controls With MAX A/C 1 — Temperature Control Knob 4 — Rear Window Defrost Button 2 — Blower Control Knob 5 — Air Recirculation Button 3 — Mode Selector Knob 6 — A/C Button

48 Controls flow from the floor vents is less than Note: that of the position. 1 – Temperature Control Knob Before opening the convertible top, This dial controls the interior 4 – Rear Window Defrost Button make sure the Rear Window Defrost temperature of the vehicle. The Rear Window Defrost Button clears Button is turned off. Otherwise, the Turn it clockwise for hotter temperatures fog and frost from the rear window. The heat generated from the defroster and counterclockwise for colder ignition must be on to use the defroster. could damage the convertible top and temperatures. Push the button to turn on the Rear the internal material. MAX A/C – If Equipped: When the Window Defroster. The Rear Window This defroster is not designed for Mode Selector Knob is set to or , Defroster operates for about melting snow. If there is an the Blower Control Knob is in a position 15 minutes and then turns off accumulation of snow on the rear other than 0, and the temperature automatically. The button LED will window, remove it before using the control knob is in the maximum cold illuminate when the defroster is defroster. position, the Recirculation Button will operating. activate and the A/C will turn on To turn off the Rear Window Defroster Mirror Defroster — If Equipped:To automatically. If A/C is not desired, before the end of 15 minutes, push the turn on the mirror defroster, turn the press the A/C Button to turn it off. button again. ignition ON and push the Rear Window Defroster Button. 2 – Blower Control Knob 5 – Air Recirculation Button The blower has seven speeds. Turn the Caution! knob clockwise to increase blower speed Push the Air Recirculation Button to or counterclockwise to decrease blower select between outside air and Failure to follow these cautions can cause speed. recirculated air positions. damage to the heating elements: Recirculated Air Position: (LED on) 3 – Mode Selector Knob Use care when washing the inside of the Outside air is shut off when this position Turn the Mode Selector Knob to select rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the has been activated. Use this position the air flow mode. window. Use a soft cloth and a mild when going through tunnels, driving in The mode selector dial can be set at washing solution, wiping parallel to the congested traffic (high engine exhaust the intermediate positions (●) between heating elements. Labels can be peeled areas), or when quick cooling of the each mode. off after soaking with warm water. vehicle is desired. Set the knob to an intermediate Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, Outside Air Position: (LED off) position if you want to split the air flow or abrasive window cleaners on the interior Outside air is allowed to enter the between the two modes. surface of the window. cabin. Use this mode for ventilation or windshield defrosting. For example, when the Mode Selector Keep all objects a safe distance from Knob is at the intermediate position (●) the window. between the and positions, air 49 Note: Do not use the Outside Air If the windshield fogs up easily, set the Note: Position in cold or rainy weather is Mode Selector Knob to the position. If the air conditioner is used while dangerous as it will cause the windows If cooler air is desired at face level, set driving up large hills or in heavy traffic, to fog up. Your vision will be hampered, the Mode Selector Knob to the monitor the Engine Coolant which could lead to a serious accident. position and adjust the Temperature Temperature Warning Light to see if it 6 – A/C Button Control Knob to maintain comfort. is illuminated or flashing. The air Push the A/C Button to turn on the air The floor vents will blow warmer air conditioner may cause engine conditioner. while the side air vents will blow cooler overheating in these situations. If the The LED on the switch will illuminate air (except when the temperature warning light is illuminated or flashing, when the Blower Control Knob is in any control dial is set at the maximum hot turn the air conditioning off position except the OFF position. or cold position). immediately. Push the button again to turn off the air Cooling (With Air When maximum cooling is desired, conditioner. Conditioner) set the Temperature Control Knob to the extreme cold position, push the Air Note: The air conditioner may not Proceed as follows: function when the outside temperature Recirculation Button to activate the approaches 32 °F (0 °C). 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the recirculated air position, and then turn position. the fan control dial fully clockwise. Heating 2. Set the Temperature Control Knob If warmer air is desired at floor level, Proceed as follows: to the cold position. set the Mode Selector Knob to the 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the position, and adjust the 3. Set the Blower Control Knob to the Temperature Control Knob to maintain

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE position. desired speed. comfort. 2. Set the Air Recirculation Button to 4. Turn on the air conditioner by The floor vents will blow warmer air the outside air position. pushing the A/C Button. while the side air vents will blow cooler air (except when the temperature 3. Set the Temperature Control Dial to 5. After cooling begins, adjust the control dial is set at the maximum hot the hot position. Blower Control Knob and Temperature or cold position). 4. Set the Blower Control Knob to the Control Knob as needed to maintain desired speed. comfort. 5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn on the air conditioner.

50 Ventilation Dehumidifying (With Air Conditioner) Proceed as follows: Warning! Operate the air conditioner in cool or 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the cold weather to help defog the position. Set the temperature control to the hot or windshield and side windows. warm position when defogging (Front 2. Set the Air Recirculation Button to Defrost position). Using the Front Defrost Proceed as follows: the outside air position. position with the temperature control set to 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the the cold position is dangerous as it will 3. Set the Temperature Control Knob cause the outside of the windshield to fog desired position. to the desired position. up. Your vision will be hampered, which 2. Set the Air Recirculation Knob to the 4. Set the Blower Control Knob to the could lead to a serious accident. outside air position. desired speed. Note: 3. Set the Temperature Control Knob Windshield Defrosting to the desired position. And Defogging For maximum defrosting, turn on the air conditioner, set the Temperature 4. Set the Blower Control Knob to the Proceed as follows: Control Knob to the extreme hot desired speed. 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the position, and turn the Blower Control 5. Turn on the air conditioner by Front Defrost position. Knob fully clockwise. pressing the A/C Button. 2. Set the Temperature Control Knob to If warm air is desired from the floor the desired position. Note: One of the functions of the air vents, set the Mode Selector Knob to conditioner is dehumidifying the air. To 3. Set the Blower Control Knob to the the position. use this function, the temperature does desired speed. If equipped with MAX A/C, the not have to be set to cold. Set the 4. If dehumidified heating is desired, Recirculation Button can be set to the Temperature Control Knob to the turn on the air conditioner. Recirculated Air position, when the desired position (hot or cold), and turn Blower Control Knob is ON, and the on the air conditioner to dehumidify the Mode Selector Knob is set to the Front cabin air. Defrost position.

51 Automatic Climate Control System

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 06010900-122-999 Automatic Climate Controls — Type A 1 — Temperature Control Knob 4 — Rear Window Defrost Button 2 — Blower Control Knob 5 — Air Recirculation Button 3 — Mode Selector Knob 6 — A/C Button

52 06010900122 Automatic Climate Controls — Type B 1 — Temperature Control Knob 4 — Rear Window Defrost Button 2 — Blower Control Knob 5 — Air Recirculation Button 3 — Mode Selector Knob 6 — A/C Button

53 Controls Note: 1 – Temperature Control Knob With the air flow mode set to the Caution! This knob controls internal temperature position, and the Temperature of the vehicle. Turn it clockwise for Control Knob is set to a medium temperature, the floor vents will blow Failure to follow these cautions can cause hotter temperatures and damage to the heating elements: counterclockwise for colder warmer air, and the center and side air vents will blow cooler air. Before opening the convertible top, temperatures. make sure the Rear Window Defrost 2 – Blower Control Knob When the Blower Control Knob is Button is turned OFF. Otherwise, the heat generated from the defroster could The fan has seven speeds. Turn the on, and the Mode Selector Knob is in the position, the air conditioner is damage the convertible top and the clockwise to increase blower speed or internal material. counterclockwise to decrease blower automatically turned on, and the Air speed/enter Auto mode. Recirculation Button is automatically Use care when washing the inside of the set to the outside air position for rear window. Do not use abrasive window AUTO Position: The blower speed is windshield defrosting. cleaners on the interior surface of the automatically controlled by the system window. Use a soft cloth and a mild based upon the set temperature. 4 – Rear Window Defrost Button washing solution, wiping parallel to the 0 Position: To turn off the system, set The Rear Window Defroster clears fog heating elements. Labels can be peeled off the dial to 0 position. and frost from the rear window. The after soaking with warm water. 3 – Mode Selector Knob ignition must be switched ON to use Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, the defroster. or abrasive window cleaners on the interior Turn the Mode Selector Knob to select surface of the window. the air flow mode. Push the button to turn on the Rear

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Window Defroster. AUTO Position: The air flow Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. automatically adjusts based upon the The Rear Window Defroster operates selected temperature. for about 15 minutes, and then turns off automatically. Note: This defroster is not designed for The button LED will illuminate when the melting snow. If there is an defroster is operating. accumulation of snow on the rear To turn off the Rear Window Defroster window, remove it before using the before the end of 15 minutes, push the defroster. switch again. Mirror Defroster — If Equipped:To turn on the mirror defroster, switch the ignition on and push the Rear Window Defroster Button.

54 5 – Air Recirculation Button Operation Of Automatic Windshield Defrosting Press the Air Recirculation Button to Air Conditioning And Defogging select between outside air and Proceed as follows: Set the mode selector knob to the recirculated air positions. position and turn the blower control Recirculated Air Position: (LED On) 1. Set the mode selector knob to the knob to the desired speed. AUTO position. Outside air is shut off when this position In this position, the outside air position has been activated. Use this position 2. Set the Air Recirculation Button to is automatically selected, and when the when going through tunnels, driving in the outside air position (indicator light blower control knob is on, the air congested traffic (high engine exhaust turned off). conditioner automatically turns on. The areas), or when quick cooling of the air conditioner will directly dehumidify vehicle is desired. Note: If the recirculated air position is the air to the front windshield and side Outside Air Position: (LED Off) used for long periods in cold weather or windows. Air flow amount will be Outside air is allowed to enter the high humidity, the windshield may fog increased. up more easily. cabin. Use this mode for ventilation or Use the temperature control knob to windshield defrosting. 3. Set the Blower Control Knob to the increase the air flow temperature and Note: Do not use the Recirculated Air AUTO position. defog the windshield more quickly. Position in cold or rainy weather. Using the Recirculated Air Position in cold or 4. Push the A/C button to operate the rainy weather is dangerous as it will air conditioning (indicator light on). Warning! cause the windows to fog up. Your 5. Set the Temperature Control Knob vision will be hampered, which could to the desired position. Set the temperature control to the hot or lead to a serious accident. warm position when defogging (Front 6. To turn off the system, set the 6 – A/C Button Defrost position). Using the Front Defrost blower control knob to the 0 position. position with the temperature control set to Push the A/C Button to turn on the air the cold position is dangerous as it will conditioner. Setting the temperature to maximum hot or cold will not provide the desired cause the outside of the windshield to fog up. Your vision will be hampered, which The LED on the switch will illuminate temperature at a faster rate. when the Blower Control Knob is in any could lead to a serious accident. position except the off position. When selecting heat, the system will restrict air flow until it has warmed to Push the button again to turn off the air prevent cold air from blowing out of the Sunlight/Temperature conditioner. vents. Sensor Note: The air conditioner may not For an optimal cabin temperature, set The air conditioning system measures function when the outside temperature the temperature close to 77º F (25º C). inside and outside temperatures, and approaches 32 °F(0°C). Adjust to the desired temperature if sunlight. necessary. It then sets temperatures inside the cabin accordingly. 55 POWER WINDOWS Power Window Controls The ignition must be placed in the ON position for the power windows to operate. A power window may no longer open/close if you continue to push the switch after opening/closing the power window.

06010904333003 If the power window does not 04070103-LN2-002 Exterior Sensor open/close, wait a moment and then Power Window Switches operate the switch again. 1 — Sunlight Sensor 1 — Driver's Window Note: To prevent burning out the fuse 2 — Passenger's Window and damaging the power window system, do not open or close both windows at once. The passenger window can be operated with each door switch when the power window lock switch on the driver's door is in the unlocked position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Passenger Control Switches The passenger window can also be operated using the master control switches on the driver's door.

06010904-121-002 Interior Sensor 04070103-L12-001 Power Window Switch Function 2 — Interior Temperature Sensor 1 — Closing-Lightly Pull The Switch Up 2 — Opening-Lightly Hold The Switch Note: Do not obstruct either sensor. Otherwise, the air-conditioning system Down will not operate properly.

56 Auto-Opening Power Windows 3. Make sure that the power window Engine-Off Power Window To fully open the window automatically lock switch located on the driver's door Operation push the switch completely down. is not depressed. The power window can be operated for To stop the window partway pull or 4. Push the switch and fully open the about 40 seconds after the ignition has push the switch in the opposite window. been cycled from ON to the OFF direction and then release it. The power position with both doors closed. If any window cannot be fully closed while the 5. Pull up the switch to fully close the door is opened, the power window will door is open. window and continue holding the stop operating. Power Window System Initialization switch for about two seconds after the For engine-off operation of the power Procedure window fully closed. window, the switch must be held up If the battery was disconnected during 6. Repeat steps four and five for the firmly throughout window closure vehicle maintenance, or for other passenger power window while seated because the auto-closing function will reasons (such as a switch continues to in the passenger seat. be inoperable. be operated after the window is 7. Make sure that the power windows open/closed), the window will not fully Warning! open automatically. operate correctly using the door Resetting of the automatic function can switches. be performed using the master control After the system has been re-initialized, Never leave children unattended in a switches or each passenger door passenger window can be fully opened vehicle, and do not let children play with switch. automatically using the master control power windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location The power window auto function reset switches. If the automatic power accessible to children, and do not leave the procedure can be done on both door window operation does not operate ignition of a vehicle equipped with the switches. The power window auto normally while the doors or convertible Keyless Entry System in the ACC or function will only resume on the power top are opened/closed, reset it using ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly window that has been reset: the above procedures. unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating 1. Close the doors and the convertible the power window switches. Such top. entrapment may result in serious injury or death. 2. Place the ignition in the ON position.

57 Power Window Lock CONVERTIBLE TOP Switch (SOFT TOP) This feature prevents the passengers Lowering The power window from operating. Keep Convertible Top this switch in the locked position while children are in the vehicle. 1. Locked Position (Button Warning! Pushed): only the driver's power window can be operated. Do not sit on the folded convertible top, otherwise the convertible top could be 2. Unlocked Position (Button Not 04110102-L36-006 Pushed): both power windows on damaged or you may fall off and be injured. Lock Release Latch each door can be operated. 1 — Release Latch Closed To lower the convertible top, proceed 2 — Release Latch Open as follows:

1. Make sure the parking brake is 4. With the lock release latch pushed applied and the engine is OFF. forward (red indicator visible), pull the 2. Make sure there are no objects top latch handle rearward to unlock it. which have been placed in the area where the convertible top is to be

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE retracted. 3. Push forward on the release latch. 04070104-L12-001 There is a red indicator showing that Power Window Lockout Switch the latch is open. 1 — Locked Position 2 — Unlocked Position

Note: When the power window lock 04110102-L21-001 switch is in the locked position, the light Pulling The Top Latch Handle on the passenger power window switch Rearward turns off. The light may be difficult to 3 — Latch Release Handle see depending on the surrounding brightness. 58 5. Remove the striker from the anchor. 6. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold the convertible top along the front edge and pull it toward the rear of the vehicle. To lower the convertible top from inside the vehicle, use the convertible top handles.

04110102-126-001 Retracted Convertible Top

Warning!

04110102-123-002AB Always keep your hands and fingers Convertible Top Handles away from the fastening mechanisms 6 — Handles when moving the convertible top: it is dangerous to place your hands or fingers near the fastening mechanisms. Your 04110102-L22-002 7. Move the convertible top rearward hands or fingers could be caught and Removing Striker From Anchor while pushing the rear glass lightly with injured by the mechanism. 4 — Striker your hand. Sit in the seat with the seat belt correctly 5 — Anchor fastened when the vehicle is moving: 8. With the back end of the convertible standing in the vehicle, or sitting on the top pushed down, push the front end convertible top storage area or center until a latching sound is heard. Lightly Note: The power windows will go console when the vehicle is moving is a rock the retracted convertible top to down automatically when the dangerous way to ride. During a sudden make sure it is securely locked. maneuver or collision you could be convertible top is opened. If the power seriously injured or even killed. windows do not go down automatically, fully open the windows using the power window switch located on the doors.

59 Raising The Convertible Top To raise the convertible top, proceed as follows: 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied and the engine is OFF. 2. Pull the unlock lever upward to disengage the lock.

04110103-L23-002 Convertible Handle Location 2 — Convertible Top Handles

4. While sitting in a seat, grasp the convertible top handles, and push the convertible top against the windshield. Make sure the striker engages with the anchor, move the top latch slowly, and 04110103-121-004 then push the top latch upward until a 04110103-L24-003 Unlock Lever Location latching sound is heard. Convertible Top Components GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 1 — Unlock Lever 4 — Closing Release Latch 5 — Striker 3. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold 6 — Anchor the convertible top along the front edge and pull it towards the vehicle front. To 5. If the red indicator is visible on the raise the convertible top from inside the lock release button, the convertible top vehicle, use the convertible top is not locked. After locking the handles. convertible top, verify that the red indicator is not visible.

60 The convertible top may be The soft top is made of high quality constricted if it is left retracted for a material and if it is not maintained long period. Therefore, if the top has correctly, the material could harden, become constricted, it may be difficult becomes stained, or have an uneven to hook the top latch striker to the gloss. anchor. Lowering the convertible top while Make sure the convertible top is it's wet can also cause water to drip securely locked by pushing up on it. If into the cabin. it still sounds loose (rattles) after being The power windows go down locked by the top latch, contact an automatically in conjunction with the 04110103-124-001 authorized dealer. convertible top opening/closing. Lock Release Button However, this is a function for improving 6 — Red Indicator Convertible Top the operability, and it does not mean 7 — Release Latch Locked Precautions there is a problem. If the vehicle battery 8 — Release Latch Unlocked is disconnected for vehicle maintenance Remove leaves or other debris that or other reasons, the power windows may accumulate on and around the will not go down automatically. If the convertible top. If leaves or other debris power windows do not go down, the block the drain filter, water may enter Caution! automatic open/close mechanism for the vehicle. Clean the drain filter at least the windows must be reset. once a year. The windblocker reduces the amount Driving with the convertible top not fully Before lowering or raising the locked could damage the convertible top. of wind coming into the cabin from convertible top, stop in a safe place off behind when driving with the of the road and park on a level surface. convertible top opened. Note: When lowering the convertible top, Before starting the vehicle make sure Do not spray water directly near the make sure objects inside the vehicle are the convertible top is correctly locked. seam of the window and convertible not blown away by the wind. top when flushing away dirt on the soft Secure all loose objects inside before top with water. Otherwise, water may driving with the convertible top down. enter the vehicle (refer to “Convertible Top Maintenance” in “Servicing And To help prevent theft or vandalism Maintenance”). and to ensure that the passenger compartment stays dry, close the convertible top securely and lock both doors when leaving the vehicle. 61 HOOD Caution! Opening The Hood To open the hood, proceed as follows: Before opening the convertible top, 1. With the vehicle in PARK, pull the make sure the rear window defroster switch is turned off. Otherwise the heat release handle located to the left of the generated from the window defroster steering wheel, below the instrument could damage the convertible top and the panel. internal material. Make sure nothing is on the convertible 07030201-122-001 top or near the back window when raising Sliding The Latch Lever To The or lowering the convertible top. Even small Right objects may interfere and cause damage. Do not drive through an automatic car 2 — Latch Lever wash; it may damage the convertible top. Do not raise or lower the convertible top 3. Pull up the support rod from the clip, when the temperature is below 41 °F and insert it into the support rod hole (5 °C); this will damage the convertible top indicated by the arrow to hold the hood material. 07030201-L12-001 open. Releasing The Hood Latch Do not lower the convertible top when

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE it's wet. If the convertible top dries while 1 — Hood Release Handle folded, it will deteriorate and mold. Do not raise or lower the convertible top 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle in a strong wind as it could damage the and insert your hand into the hood convertible top or cause an unexpected opening, then slide the latch lever to the accident. right, and lift up the hood.

07030201-130-888 Support Rod Location 3 — Support Rod

62 4. Verify that the support rod is TRUNK LID secured in the clip before closing the hood. Opening 5. Lower the hood slowly to a height of Warning! about 8 inches (20 cm) above its closed position and then let it drop. Before opening the trunk lid, remove any snow and ice accumulation on it. Warning! Otherwise, the trunk lid could close under the weight of the snow and ice resulting in injury. 07030201-123-002 Be sure the hood is fully latched before Inserting Support Rod Into Hole driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully Be careful when opening/closing the 4 — Support Rod Hole latched, it could open when the vehicle is trunk lid during strong winds. If a strong in motion and block your vision. Failure to gust blows against the trunk lid, it could follow this warning could result in serious close suddenly resulting in injury. injury or death. Closing The Hood Fully open the trunk lid and make sure To close the hood, proceed as follows: that it stays open. If the trunk lid is only opened partially, it could slam shut by 1. Check under the hood area to make Caution! vibration or wind gusts resulting in injury. certain all filler caps are in place and all When loading or unloading luggage in loose items (e.g. tools, oil containers, To prevent possible damage, do not slam the trunk, turn off the engine. Otherwise, etc.) have been removed. the hood to close it. Lower hood to you could get burned by the heat of the exhaust gas. 2. Lift the hood with one hand, and approximately 8 inches (20 cm) and drop with the other hand grasp the padded the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle area on the support rod. unless hood is fully closed, with both 3. Secure the support rod into the rod latches engaged. clip.

63 Using The Remote Release Button Using The Electric Trunk Lid With The Advanced Keyless Entry — If Equipped Opener Function With the remote release button, the A locked trunk lid can also be opened trunk lid can also be opened while the while the key fob is being carried. When key fob is being carried. opening the trunk lid with the doors Push the electric trunk lid button and locked, it may require a few seconds for raise the trunk lid when the latch the trunk lid latch to release after the releases. electric trunk lid opener is pushed. The trunk lid can be closed when the doors are locked with the key fob left in the vehicle. However, to prevent locking the key fob in the vehicle, the trunk lid can be opened by pushing the electric 04030201-R12-001 Interior Trunk Lid Release Button trunk lid opener. If the trunk lid cannot be opened despite doing this The remote release button function can procedure, push the electric trunk lid be disabled by locking the doors using opener to fully open the trunk lid after the key fob, emergency key, or a pushing the trunk lid completely closed. request switch on the exterior door If the vehicle battery is discharged or handle to prevent an intruder in the 04030201-12A-001 there is a malfunction in the electrical Electric Trunk Release Button vehicle from opening the trunk lid. system and the trunk lid cannot be To enable the remote release button Without the remote release button, unlocked, the trunk lid can be opened GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE operation, unlock the doors by using unlock the doors and trunk lid, then by performing the emergency the key fob, emergency key, request push the electric trunk lid opener and procedure. switch on the exterior door handle, or raise it when the latch releases. place the ignition in the ON position. Note: The remote release button cannot be disabled by locking the doors using the door-lock switch/door-lock knob.

64 When Trunk Lid Cannot Note: Do not pull the screw when Be Opened pulling the cap. Otherwise, the screw may fall off and become lost. If the battery is discharged, the trunk lid cannot be unlocked and opened. Refer to “Trunk Emergency Release” located in “Getting To Know Your If the trunk lid cannot be unlocked even Vehicle” for further information. if the discharged battery situation has been resolved, the electrical system Closing may have a malfunction. 1. Use both hands to push the trunk lid Proceed as follows: down until the lock snaps shut. Do not

1. Close the convertible top and 08080100-121-004 slam it. remove the windblocker. Remove Fasteners 2. Pull up on the trunk lid to check if it 3. Partially peel back the cover on the is secure. right side of the vehicle.

08080100-125-002 Remove Windblocker

2. Remove the fasteners on the right 08080100-122-001 side of the vehicle. Cover Removal 4. Turn and loosen the cap screws until the screws start to spin free.

65 TRUNK EMERGENCY Trunk Safety Warning HOMELINK — IF RELEASE EQUIPPED As a security measure, a emergency Warning! General Information release lever is built into the rear tail The HomeLink system replaces up to panel of the trunk. In the event of an Do not allow children to have access to the three hand-held transmitters with a adult or child being locked inside the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from single built-in component in the trunk, the trunk can be simply opened outside, or through the inside of the auto-dimming mirror. Pushing the by pulling down the lever and open the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when HomeLink button on the auto-dimming trunk lid. After performing this your vehicle is unattended. Once in the mirror activates garage doors, gates emergency measure, contact an trunk, young children may not be able to and other devices surrounding your authorized dealer as soon as possible. escape, even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children home. can die from suffocation or heat stroke. Note: HomeLink and HomeLink house icon are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation. FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 08080100-123-004 Trunk Emergency Release 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

66 Proceed as follows: Warning! 1. Verify that there is a remote control transmitter available for the device you would like to program. Vehicle exhaust contains carbon 2. Disconnect the power to the device. monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while Programming The programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas System can cause serious injury or death. Note: When programming a garage Your motorized door or gate will open door opener or a gate, disconnect the and close while you are programming the power to these devices before universal transceiver. Do not program the 04060102-121-999 programming. Continuous operation of HomeLink Buttons transceiver if people, pets or other objects the devices could damage the motor. are in the path of the door or gate. Only 1 — First HomeLink Button use this transceiver with a garage door The HomeLink system provides three 2 — Second HomeLink Button opener that has a “stop and reverse” buttons which can be individually feature as required by Federal safety selected and programmed using the 3 — Third HomeLink Button standards. This includes most garage door transmitters for current, on-market opener models manufactured after 1982. devices as follows: Do not use a garage door opener without 4. After the HomeLink indicator light these safety features. Call toll-free 1. Disconnect power to the device changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at being programmed. light, release both the HomeLink and HomeLink.com for safety information or 2. Position the end of your handheld hand-held transmitter buttons. assistance. transmitter one to three inches (2.5 - 5. Connect power to the device being 7.5 cm) away from the HomeLink programmed. Pre-Programming The button you wish to program while 6. Firmly press and hold the programmed System keeping the indicator light in view. HomeLink button for five seconds, and Note: It is recommended that a new 3. Simultaneously press and hold both then release it. Perform this operation two battery be placed in the hand-held the chosen HomeLink and hand-held times to activate the door or gate. If the transmitter of the device being transmitter buttons. Do not release door or gate does not activate, press and programmed to HomeLink for quicker the buttons until step four has been hold the just-trained HomeLink button and training and accurate transmission of completed. observe the indicator light. If the indicator the radio-frequency signal. light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.

67 Note: To program the remaining two For questions or comments, please Operating The System HomeLink buttons, begin with step contact HomeLink at Push the programmed HomeLink one. www.homelink.com or button to operate a programmed 1-800-355-3515. 7. If the indicator light blinks rapidly for device. two seconds and then turns to a Gate Operator/Canadian The code will continue being constant light, continue with Programming transmitted for a maximum of “Programming” steps (see below) to 20 seconds. complete the programming of a rolling Canadian radio-frequency laws require code equipped device (most commonly transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) Reprogramming The a garage door opener). after several seconds of transmission - System which may not be long enough for 8. At the garage door opener receiver To program a device to HomeLink using (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. a HomeLink button previously trained, the “learn” or “smart” button. This can follow these steps: usually be found where the hanging Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. 1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink antenna wire is attached to the gate operators are designed to button. DO NOT release the button; motorhead unit. “time-out” in the same manner. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash 9. Press and release the “learn” or If you live in Canada or you are having after 20 seconds. Without releasing the “smart” button (the name and color of difficulties programming a gate operator HomeLink button, proceed with the button may vary by manufacturer). by using the “Programming” “Programming The System” step one. Note: Complete the programming procedures (regardless of where you within 30 seconds. live), replace “Programming The Erasing Programmed System” step three with the following: HomeLink Buttons

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 10. Return to the vehicle and firmly Note: If programming a garage door press, hold for two seconds and To erase the existing programming from opener or gate operator, it is advised to release the programmed HomeLink all three operating channels, push and unplug the device during the “cycling” button. Repeat the “ press/hold/ hold the two outside buttons 1 and process to prevent possible release” sequence a second time, and, 3 on the auto-dimming mirror until the overheating. depending on the brand of the garage HomeLink indicator light begins to flash door opener (or other rolling code 1. Continue to press and hold the after approximately ten seconds. HomeLink button while you press and equipped device), repeat this sequence Verify that the programming has been release - every two seconds (“cycle”) a third time to complete the erased when you resell the vehicle. programming process. HomeLink your hand-held transmitter until the should now activate your rolling code frequency signal has successfully been equipped device. accepted by HomeLink (the indicator Note: To program the remaining two light will flash slowly and then rapidly). HomeLink buttons, begin with step 2. Proceed with the “Programming” one. steps to complete. 68 INTERNAL Insert the emergency key in the lock EQUIPMENT and turn it clockwise to lock, counter clockwise to unlock. Storage Compartments Note: When using the rear console cup Center Console holders, remove any cups before opening The center console is located between the seat side compartment. If the seat the driver’s and passenger’s seats. side compartment is opened with a cup present, the lid will hit the cups and may cause the contents to spill. Warning! Back Trim Storage Compartment 06040706-12A-001 Small items can be stored in the back Center Console Lid Keep storage compartments closed when trim storage compartment which is driving. Driving with the storage Seat Side Compartment located behind the seats. compartments open is dangerous. To The seat side compartment is located reduce the possibility of injury in an between the seats above the accident or a sudden stop, keep the cupholders. storage compartments closed when driving.

Caution!

Do not leave lighters or eyeglasses in the storage compartments while parked under the sun. A lighter could explode or the plastic material in eyeglasses could deform and crack from high temperature.

06040717-121-001 Seat Side Compartment 1 — Release Handle 2 — Key Hole

To open, push the release handle down to open the seat side compartment. 06040718-12A-002 Back Trim Storage Compartment 69 To use the back trim storage Interior Lights compartment, slide the seat all the way Overhead Light forward and fold the seat back forward, then open the compartment. The interior light is located in the headliner in between the sun visors. When finished, close the compartment The interior light can be set to three and return the seat to its original different positions. position and secure it. After returning the seat to its original position, make sure the seat is secured by attempting to lightly move it forward and rearward.

Caution!

Do not forcefully push objects into the rear storage compartment. Otherwise, the box

could be damaged. 06040200-12A-002 Overhead Light Switch Sun Visors 1—On 06040100-L12-001AB 2 — Door The sun visors are located at the sides Sun Visor GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE of the interior rear view mirror. They can 3—Off be adjusted forward toward the Vanity Mirrors To access the vanity mirror, fold the sun windshield, and sideways toward the Light switch positions: side windows, to block sunlight. visor down and lift the cover toward the seats. On : Light is on at all times. Door : Light is on when any door is open. Light is on or off when the illuminated entry system is on. Off : Light is off at all times.

70 Trunk Light Turns on for about five seconds advanced keyless function) after the The trunk light comes on when the lid is when a door is opened from the outside ignition is cycled OFF. open and turns off when closed. with a key fob being carried and then In addition, if the following operations the door is closed. are performed after turning the interior The overhead light turns on for about lights off, they will turn on again if: 15 seconds when the ignition is cycled The ignition is cycled to a position OFF with the overhead light switch in other than OFF. the door position. The overhead light turns off immediately A door is opened. in the following cases: A door is unlocked. The ignition is cycled ON and both The operation of the illuminated entry doors are closed. system can be changed through the The driver's door is locked. Connect system. 06040200-T12-003 Accessory Socket Trunk Light Location Battery Saver 1 — Trunk Light Switch If any door is left open with the The accessory socket is located deep overhead light switch in the door in the back of the footwell on the position or the trunk lid is left open, the passenger side. Note: To prevent the battery from overhead light or trunk light turns off being discharged, do not leave the after about 30 minutes to prevent trunk open for a long period when the discharge of the battery. engine is not running. To prevent discharge of the battery, if Illuminated Entry System the interior lights remain on (the interior The overhead light turns on when any light switch is in the on position), they of the following operations occurs with will turn off automatically under the the overhead light switch in the door following conditions: position and the ignition is OFF: No operations are done for about Turns on for about 30 seconds when 30 minutes after the ignition is cycled the driver's door is unlocked. OFF. 06040400-L12-002 Accessory Socket Turns on for about 15 seconds when The (lock) button on the key fob is a door is opened while a key fob is left pushed, or the request switch located Only use genuine FCA accessories or in the vehicle and then the door is on the exterior door handle is pushed to the equivalent requiring no greater than closed. lock the doors (vehicles with the 12V (120 W, 10A).

71 The ignition must be placed in ACC or Depending on the device connected Cupholders — If ON. to the accessory socket, the vehicle's Equipped electrical system may be affected, To prevent accessory socket damage Cupholders are available and can be which could cause the warning light to or electrical failure, pay attention to the inserted in the center console on the illuminate. Disconnect the connected following: passenger side and the rear area of the device and make sure that the problem center console. Do not use accessories that require is resolved. If the problem is resolved, more than 12V (120 W, 10A). disconnect the device from the socket Do not use accessories that are not and switch the ignition off. If the genuine FCA accessories or the problem is not resolved, contact an equivalent. authorized dealer. Close the cover when the accessory Note: To prevent discharging of the socket is not in use to prevent foreign battery, do not use the socket for long objects and liquids from getting into the periods with the engine off or idling. accessory socket. Correctly insert the plug into the Warning!

accessory socket. 06040500L21002 Cupholders Do not insert the cigarette lighter into To avoid serious injury or death: the accessory socket. Only devices designed for use in this 1 — Front Cup Holder type of outlet should be inserted into any Noise may occur on the audio 12 Volt outlet. 2 — Rear Cup Holder (If Equipped)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE playback depending on the device Do not touch with wet hands. connected to the accessory socket. Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. Warning! If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. Never use a cup holder to hold hot liquids while the vehicle is moving. Using a cup holder to hold hot liquids while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. If the contents spill, you could be burned.

72 Installing Cupholders Caution! When installing a cupholder, insert it firmly into the installation hole and make sure that it is secured in place. Do not place plastic bottles without caps in the cup holders. Otherwise, the contents may spill while the vehicle is being driven. Do not place excessive weight on the cup holders such as by resting your hands or elbows on them. Otherwise, the cup 06040500-L25-002 holders could be damaged. Correct Cupholder Placement If a passenger is present, install the front The rear cupholder is designed for use cup holder to the rear console. Otherwise, on the rear console and cannot be a knee might hit it and cause the contents to spill. installed to the front side.

Removing Cup Holders Use both hands when removing the cup holder.

06040500-J12AEC2-001 Installing Cupholders 06040500-L26-001 The front cupholder can be removed Incorrect Cupholder Placement and installed to the rear console.

06040500-J12AEC1-001 Removing Cupholders

73 Windblocker ELECTRIC POWER ENVIRONMENT The Windblocker reduces rear wind STEERING PROTECTION coming into the cabin while driving with Power Steering SYSTEMS the convertible top in the lowered Emission Control System position. Electric power steering is only operable when the engine is running. This vehicle is equipped with an If the engine is off or if the power emission control system (the catalytic steering system is inoperable, you can converter is part of this system) that still steer, but it requires more physical enables the vehicle to comply with effort. existing exhaust emissions requirements. If the steering feels stiffer than usual during normal driving or the steering Ignoring the following precautions could vibrates, contact your authorized dealer. cause lead to accumulate on the catalyst inside the converter or cause The warning light notifies the driver the converter to get very hot. Either of system abnormalities and operation condition will damage the converter and conditions. 06041000-12A-003 cause poor performance: Windblocker Note: Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme left or right for more than USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL. five seconds with the engine running. Do not drive your vehicle with any This could damage the power steering sign of engine malfunction. system. Do not coast with the ignition OFF. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Do not descend steep grades in gear with the ignition OFF. Do not operate the engine at high idle for more than two minutes. Do not tamper with the emission control system. All inspections and adjustments must be made by your authorized dealer. Do not push-start or pull-start your vehicle.

74 Under U.S. federal law, any modification to the original-equipment emission control system before the first sale and registration of a vehicle is subject to penalties. In some states, such modification made on a used vehicle is also subject to penalties. While the engine is off, the sound of a valve opening and closing can be heard at the rear of the vehicle, however this does not indicate an abnormality. The vehicle has a self-checking device and it operates while the engine is off.

Warning!

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

75 This page is intentionally left blank

76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTS...... 78 MAINTENANCE MONITOR — IF EQUIPPED ...... 84 FUEL ECONOMY MONITOR — IF EQUIPPED ...... 88 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ...... 89 PERSONALIZATION FEATURES . .108 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBDII...... 112 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . .113

77 CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTS Instrument Cluster

05020100-667-333 Instrument Cluster

1 — Odometer/Trip Computer And Trip Computer Button/Dashboard Illumination 2 — Tachometer 3 — Speedometer GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 4 — Automatic Transmission Info Display 5 — Odometer/Trip Computer Info/Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge/Fuel Gauge/Outside Temperature/Cruise Control/Info Switch Display

78 Odometer/Trip Computer When “Trip A” is selected, pushing the illumination is dimmed. When the selector again within one second will position lights are turned on, the change to “Trip B” mode. When “Trip A” warning light in the instrument The display mode can be changed from is selected, TRIP A will be displayed. cluster illuminates (see “Headlights” in odometer to “Trip computer A” to “Trip When “Trip B” is selected, TRIP B will “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” computer B” and then back to be displayed. chapter). odometer by pushing the selector. The trip computer records the total The selected mode will be displayed. Brightness Adjustment distance the vehicle is driven until the The brightness of the instrument panel meter is again reset. Return it to “0.0” and dashboard illuminations can be by depressing and holding the selector adjusted by rotating the knob: for one second or more. Use this meter to measure trip The brightness decreases by rotating distances and to compute fuel the knob to the left. A beep will be consumption. heard when the knob has been rotated Note: Only the trip records tenths of to the maximum dim position. miles (kilometers). The brightness increases by rotating Trip Computer Reset the knob to the right. The trip computer will be erased when: 05020102-121-001 Odometer/Trip Reset Button The power supply is interrupted 1 — Odometer/Trip Reset Button (blown fuse or the battery is disconnected). The vehicle is driven over Odometer 9999.9 miles. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. Speedometer Trip Computer The speedometer indicates the speed The trip computer can record the total of the vehicle. distance of two trips. One is recorded in 05020102-121-001 Dimmer Knob “Trip A”, and the other is recorded in Instrument Panel “Trip B”. Illumination 1 — Instrument Cluster Illumination For instance, “Trip A” can record the When the position lights are turned on Dimmer Knob distance from the point of origin, and with the ignition switched ON, the “Trip B” can record the distance from brightness of the instrument panel where the fuel tank is filled. 79 Canceling Illumination Dimmer Note: With the ignition ON, rotate the knob to Even though the distance-to-empty the right until a beep sounds while the display may indicate a sufficient instrument cluster is dimmed. If the amount of remaining driving distance instrument cluster's visibility is reduced before refueling is required, refuel as due to glare from surrounding soon as possible if the fuel level is very brightness, cancel the illumination low or the low fuel warning light dimmer. illuminates. When the illumination dimmer is canceled, the instrument cluster cannot The display may not change unless you add more than approximately be dimmed even if the position lights 0620500-122-001 are turned on. When the illumination Instrument Cluster Display Controls 2.3 gallons (9 liters) of fuel. dimmer is canceled, the screen in the Distance-To-Empty Mode The distance-to-empty is the center display switches to constant approximate remaining distance the display of the daytime screen. This mode displays the approximate vehicle can be driven until all the distance you can travel on the graduation marks in the fuel gauge Trip Computer And Info remaining fuel based on the fuel Switch (indicating the remaining fuel supply) economy. disappear. The following information can be The distance-to-empty will be selected by pushing the INFO switch calculated and displayed every second. If there is no past fuel economy with the ignition in the ON position: information such as after first purchasing your vehicle or the Distance-to-empty (approximate information is deleted when the battery distance you can travel on the available cables are disconnected, the actual fuel) distance-to empty/range may differ Average fuel economy from the amount indicated. Current fuel economy Average vehicle speed

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Vehicle speed alarm — If Equipped If you have any problems with your trip 0502011019A019 computer, contact an authorized dealer. Distance To Empty Display Screen

80 Average Fuel Economy Mode This mode displays the average fuel economy by calculating the total fuel consumption and the total traveled distance since purchasing the vehicle, reconnecting the battery after disconnection, or resetting the data. The average fuel economy is calculated and displayed every minute. To clear the data being displayed, push the

INFO switch for more than 1.5 seconds. 05020110199019 0502011020110C After pushing the INFO switch, “- - - mpg” Current Fuel Economy Display Average Vehicle Speed Display (“- - - L/100 km”) will be displayed for Screen Screen about 1 minute before the fuel economy is Average Vehicle Speed Mode After pushing the INFO switch, “---MPH” recalculated and displayed. This mode displays the average vehicle (“---km/h”) will be displayed for about Current Fuel Economy Mode speed by calculating the distance and 1 minute before the vehicle speed is This mode displays the current fuel the time traveled since connecting the recalculated and displayed. economy by calculating the amount of battery or resetting the data. Vehicle Speed Alarm Mode — If fuel consumption and the distance Average vehicle speed will be Equipped traveled. Current fuel economy will be calculated and displayed every In this mode, the current setting for the calculated and displayed every two 10 seconds. To clear the data being Vehicle Speed Alarm is displayed. You seconds. displayed, push the INFO switch for can change the set vehicle speed that When you've slowed to about 3 MPH more than 1.5 seconds. will trigger the warning. (5 km/h) , “- - - mpg” (“---L/100km”) Note: The vehicle speed alarm display will be displayed. is activated at the same time the beep sound is heard. The set vehicle speed will flash several times. The vehicle speed alarm can be set using the INFO switch. The vehicle speed alarm function can be set between 18 and 155 mph (30 and 250 km/h).

81 Note: Always set the vehicle speed Tachometer Engine Coolant according to the laws and regulations of Temperature Gauge And The tachometer shows engine speed in the country/city in which the vehicle is Fuel Gauge thousands of revolutions per minute driven. In addition, always verify the (rpm). Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge speed of the vehicle using the speedometer. The range varies depending on the type of gauge. The vehicle speed alarm can be set using the following procedure: 1. Press the INFO switch to display the Vehicle Speed Alarm mode. 2. Press the INFO switch continuously until a beep sound is heard. The set vehicle speed display flashes the first digit. 3. Press the INFO switch and set the first digit to the desired vehicle speed.

The numerical value changes each time 05020103-12A-002 the INFO switch is pressed. Tachometer 4. Press the INFO switch continuously 1 — Tachometer Display until a beep sound is heard. The set vehicle speed display flashes the lower two digits.

5. Press the INFO switch and set the 0502010417A007 two lower digits to the desired vehicle Fuel/Temperature Gauge speed. The numerical value changes each time the INFO switch is pressed. 1 — Engine Coolant Temperature 2 — Fuel Gauge

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT6. PANEL Press the INFO switch continuously until a beep sound is heard. The set vehicle speed is displayed on the Note: If the high engine coolant vehicle speed alarm screen. temperature warning light (red) turns on, there is a possibility of overheating. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and take appropriate 82 measures. If the vehicle continues to be Outside Temperature Changing The Temperature Unit Of driven, it could cause damage to the Display The Outside Temperature Display engine. When the ignition is in the ON position, The outside temperature unit can be Fuel Gauge the outside temperature is displayed. switched between Fahrenheit and The fuel gauge shows approximately Celsius using the following procedure. how much fuel is remaining in the tank Vehicles With Fiat Connect 7.0 when the ignition is in the ON position. Settings can be changed through the We recommend keeping the tank over Connect 7.0 radio screen. Refer to 1/4 full. “Personalization Features” in this E = Empty chapter. Vehicles With Fiat Radio 3.0 F = Full Proceed as follows: If the low fuel warning light illuminates or the fuel level is very low, refuel as 1. Push the INFO switch with the soon as possible. ignition in the OFF position and 05020107345034 continue pushing the INFO switch for Note: Outside Temperature Screen 5 seconds or longer while placing the Display After refueling, it may require some ignition in the ON position. The outside time for the indicator to stabilize. In Under the following conditions, the temperature display flashes. outside temperature display may differ addition, the indicator may deviate 2. Push the INFO switch to change the from the actual outside temperature while driving on a slope or curve since outside temperature unit. the fuel moves in the tank. depending on the surroundings and vehicle conditions: 3. Push and hold the INFO switch for The display indicating a quarter or 3 seconds or longer while the outside less remaining fuel has more segments Significantly cold or hot temperatures. temperature display is flashing. The to show the remaining fuel level in outside temperature display illuminates. greater detail. Sudden changes in outside Note: When the temperature unit temperature. The direction of the arrow on the indicated in the outside temperature fuel gauge indicates that the fuel door The vehicle is parked. display is changed, the temperature lid is on the left side of the vehicle. unit indicated in the engine coolant The vehicle is driven at low speeds. gauge display changes in conjunction with it.

83 Cruise Control Set Vehicles with Manual Transmission MAINTENANCE Vehicle Speed Display The gear shift indicator turns off when MONITOR — IF The vehicle speed preset using the the following operations are performed: EQUIPPED cruise control is displayed. The vehicle is stopped Oil Life Reset The vehicle is put in neutral Vehicles With Fiat Radio 3.0 The vehicle is driven in reverse “Oil Change” with flexible settings are available. Consult an authorized dealer The clutch is not fully engaged when for details. accelerating Note: The engine oil flexible The clutch pedal remains depressed maintenance setting is available (if for 2 seconds or longer while driving equipped). Based on the engine operating conditions, the on-board Vehicles with Automatic computer in your vehicle calculates the Transmission remaining oil life. When the engine oil 0502010819A019 The gear shift indicator turns off when flexible maintenance setting is selected, Cruise Control Display Screen the following operations are performed: the system must be reset whenever Gear Shift Indicator — If The vehicle is stopped replacing the engine oil. Equipped When the engine oil flexible Manual shift mode is canceled The gear shift indicator helps the driver maintenance setting is selected, the obtain optimum fuel economy and Manually Shifting Up (Versions with Indicator light will illuminate in the smooth driving. It displays the selected Automatic Transmission) instrument cluster when remaining oil life becomes less than 300 miles Gear Position 1 in the instrument Using the selector lever: to shift up to a cluster and also notifies the driver to (500 km) or remaining days are less higher gear, tap the selector lever back than 15 (whichever comes first). change to the most suitable Gear + once. Position 2 corresponding to the actual driving condition. Note: Do not rely solely on the shift-up/shift-down recommendations GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENTby PANEL indications. The actual driving situation might require shift operations different from indication. To avoid the risk of accidents, the road and traffic conditions have to be judged correctly by the driver before shifting. 84 Reset Method Oil Life Reset Your vehicle is equipped with an engine Vehicles With FIAT Connect oil change indicator system. The “Oil 7.0 Radio Change Required” message will flash in Proceed as follows: the instrument cluster display for approximately ten seconds after a 1. Select the icon on the home single chime has sounded to indicate screen to display the “Applications” the next scheduled oil change interval. screen. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the 2. Select “Maintenance” to display the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, maintenance list screen. dependent upon your personal driving 3. Switch the tab and select the setting style. item you want to change: “Scheduled,” Unless reset, this message will continue “Tire Rotation,” or “Oil Change.” to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure 1. Place the ignition in the ON position. (Do not start the engine.) 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly to the floor, three times within ten seconds. 3. Place the ignition in the OFF/LOCK position. Note: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

85 Oil Life Monitor You can customize settings in the setup display as follows:

Tab Item Explanation Setting Notification can be turned on/off. Displays the time or distance until Time (months) maintenance is due. Select this item to set the maintenance period. “Scheduled Due!” is displayed in red, and the indicator light will illuminate in the instrument cluster when the Scheduled remaining distance is less than 300 mi Distance (mile or km) (500 km) or the remaining number of days is less than 15 (whichever comes first). Resets the time and distance to the initial values. Once the system turns on, it needs Reset to be reset whenever carrying out maintenance. Setting Notification can be switched on/off. Displays the distance until tire rotation is due. Select this item to set the tire rotation distance. “Tire Rotation Due!” is displayed in Distance (mile or km) red and the wrench indicator light will Tire Rotation illuminate in the instrument cluster when the remaining distance is less than 300 mi (500 km). Resets the remaining distance to the initial Reset value. Once the system turns on, it needs to be reset whenever rotating the tires. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

86 Tab Item Explanation Setting Notification can be switched on/off. Displays the distance until an oil change is due. Select this item to set the oil change distance. “Oil Change Due!” is displayed in Distance (mile or km) red, and the indicator light will illuminate in the instrument cluster when the remaining distance is less than 300 mi (500 km). Resets the remaining distance to the initial Reset value. Once the system turns on, it needs to be reset whenever replacing the engine oil. Oil Change Displays the engine oil life until an oil change is due. “Oil Change Due!” is displayed in red and the indicator light will illuminate in the Oil life (%) instrument cluster when remaining oil life distance is less than 300 mi (500 km), or remaining days are less than 15 (whichever comes first). Resets the remaining oil life to 100%. The Reset system must be reset whenever replacing the engine oil. (*) The engine oil flexible maintenance setting is available (only some models). Consult an authorized dealer for details. When the engine oil flexible maintenance setting is selected, you will see the following items in the display. The vehicle calculates the remaining oil life based on the engine operating conditions and lets you know when an oil change is due by illuminating the indicator light in the instrument cluster.

87 FUEL ECONOMY 4. Displays the following setting 3. Calculates the average fuel MONITOR — IF screen: ending display on/off switching economy every minute after vehicle EQUIPPED - On/off switching for function which travel begins, and displays it. synchronizes reset fuel economy data Description to trip meter (Trip A). The “Fuel Consumption” information is displayed by operating each icon in the display. In addition, after completing a trip, the total energy efficiency to date is displayed in the ending display when the ending display is turned on. Proceed as follows: 05240101-36A-004 1. Select the icon on the home Average Fuel Economy Display screen to display the applications 05240100-36A-003 Screen screen. Fuel Economy Display Screen Note: The fuel economy data is 2. Select the “Fuel Economy Monitor”. Fuel Consumption synchronized (linked) with the average 3. Select the icon on the home Display fuel economy displayed in the trip computer. screen to display the applications Information regarding fuel economy is screen. displayed: To reset the fuel economy data, Note: When the menu is displayed by press the icon in the menu. (The 1. Displays the fuel economy for the average fuel economy displayed in the touching the screen, the display is past 60 minutes: hidden automatically after 6 seconds. trip computer resets at the same time). Select the icon in the menu and Displays the fuel economy every When the function, which perform the operation. Each icon minute for the past 1 to 10 minutes. synchronizes the fuel economy monitor operates as follows: Displays the fuel economy every and the trip meter, is on, reset Trip A of 10 minutes for the past 10 to the trip meter.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT1. PANEL Hides the menu display. 60 minutes. Delete the average fuel economy 2. Displays the application screen. 2. Displays the average fuel economy information displayed in the trip 3. Resets the fuel economy data. over the past five resets and after the computer. current reset. After resetting the fuel economy data, “-- -” is displayed while the average fuel economy is calculated. 88 Ending Screen Display WARNING LIGHTS Vehicles With Fiat Connect 7.0 If the ending display on the fuel AND MESSAGES The warning contents can be verified on the audio system. economy monitor is on when the Warning Lights And ignition is cycled from ON position to Messages Proceed as follows: the OFF position, the information 1. If the warning light is turned on, regarding the fuel economy is Note: select icon on the home screen to displayed. The warning light in the instrument display the application screen. panel appears together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic 2. Select “ Vehicle Status Monitor” signal when applicable. These 3. Select “ Warning Guidance”to indications are indicative and display the current warnings. precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or 4. Select the applicable warning to alternative to the information contained view the warning details. in the Owner’s Manual, which you are For the following warning/indicator advised to read carefully in all cases. lights: Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure Master Warning Light indication. Brake System Warning Light Failure indications displayed are ABS Warning Light divided into two categories: serious and less serious failures. Serious Charging System Warning Light failures are indicated by a repeated and prolonged warning "cycle". Less serious failures are indicated by a warning "cycle" with a shorter duration. The display cycle of both categories can be interrupted. The instrument panel warning light will stay on until the cause of the failure is eliminated.

89 Engine Oil Warning Light KEY Warning Light Electric Throttle Warning Light LED Headlight KEY Warning Light Cold Start Warning Light BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring) OFF Indicator Light Check Engine Warning Light TCS/DSC Indicator Light Coolant Temperature Warning Light DSC OFF Indicator Light Automatic Transmission Warning Light Security Indicator Light Power Steering Malfunction Indicator Indicator Light Light Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner Warning Light System Warning Light The light turns on when the ignition is Check Fuel Cap Warning Light switched on for an operation check, and turns off a few seconds later or Low Fuel Warning Light when the engine is started. If the light Seat Belt Warning Light does not turn on or remains turned on, have the vehicle inspected at an Door Ajar Warning Light authorized dealer. Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Note: Only for “Brake System Warning Light Light:” the light turns on continuously Tire Pressure Monitoring System when the parking brake is applied. Warning Light GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

90 Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means Parking Brake Warning - Warning Light Inspection/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Parking Brake Warning / Warning Light Inspection The light illuminates when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switched to START or ON. It turns off when the parking brake is fully released. Low Brake Fluid Level Warning If the brake warning light remains illuminated even though the parking brake is released, the brake fluid may be low or there could be a problem with the brake system. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer. Note: Do not drive with the brake system warning light illuminated. Contact an authorized dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible. Driving with the brake system warning light illuminated is dangerous. It indicates that your brakes may not work at all or that they could completely fail at any time. If this light remains illuminated, after checking that the parking brake is fully released, have the brakes inspected immediately. The effectiveness of the braking may diminish so you may need to push the brake pedal more strongly than normal to stop the vehicle. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer. EBD (Electronic Brake-Force Distribution) System Warning If the EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution) control unit determines that some components are operating incorrectly, the control unit may illuminate the brake system warning light and the ABS warning light simultaneously. The problem is likely to be the electronic brake force distribution system. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer. Note: Do not drive with both the ABS warning light and brake warning light illuminated. Contact an authorized dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible. Driving when the brake system warning light and ABS warning light are illuminated simultaneously is dangerous. When both lights are illuminated, the rear wheels could lock more quickly in an emergency stop than under normal circumstances.

91 Warning Light What It Means Alternator Failure If the warning light illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction of the alternator or of the charging system. Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer. Note: Do not continue driving when the charging system warning light is illuminated because the engine could stop unexpectedly. Low Engine Oil Pressure This warning light indicates low engine oil pressure. Note: Do not run the engine if the oil pressure is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive engine damage. If the light illuminates or the warning indication is displayed while driving: Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way on level ground. Turn off the engine and wait five minutes for the oil to drain back into the sump. Inspect the engine oil level. If it's low, add the appropriate amount of engine oil while being careful not to overfill. Start the engine and check the warning light. Note: Do not run the engine if the oil level is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive engine damage. If the light remains illuminated even though the oil level is normal or after adding oil, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

Door-Open Warning Light The light turns on if any door is not closed securely. Close the door securely. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. 92 Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light The light flashes when the engine coolant temperature is extremely high, and illuminates when the engine coolant temperature increases further. Handling Procedure Flashing Light: drive slowly to reduce engine load until you can find a safe place to stop the vehicle and wait for the engine to cool down. Illuminated Light: this indicates the possibility of overheating. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and stop the engine. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information. Note: Do not drive the vehicle with the high engine coolant temperature warning light illuminated. Otherwise, it could result in damage to the engine. Contact an authorized dealer.

Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning A system malfunction is indicated if the warning light constantly flashes, constantly illuminates or does not illuminate at all when the ignition is placed in the ON position. If any of these occur, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The system may not operate in an accident.

93 Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means Key Warning Light — Illuminated If any malfunction occurs in the keyless entry system, it illuminates continuously. Note: If the key warning indicator light illuminates or the push button start indicator light (amber) flashes, the engine may not start. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Key Warning Light — Flashing Advanced Key Fob Malfunction Take the appropriate action and verify that the warning light turns off. The advanced key fob battery is discharged: replace the key fob battery. The advanced key fob is not within the operation range/is placed in areas inside the cabin where it is difficult for the key to be detected: bring the advanced key fob into the operation range. A key fob from another manufacturer similar to the advanced key fob is in the operation range: take the key fob from another manufacturer similar to the advanced key out of the operation range. Without the ignition switched OFF, the advanced key is taken out of the vehicle, and then all the doors are closed: bring the advanced key fob back into the vehicle. If the engine cannot be started, try starting it using the emergency operation for starting the engine, and contact an authorized dealer.

Vehicle Security Alarm System The warning light switches on to report a failure of the vehicle security alarm system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

94 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means ABS Warning Light If the ABS warning light stays on while you're driving, when the ABS control unit has detected a system malfunction. If this occurs, your brakes will function normally as if the vehicle had no ABS. Should this happen contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Note: When the engine is jump-started to charge the battery, uneven RPM occurs and the ABS warning light may illuminate. If this occurs, it is the result of the weak battery and does not indicate an ABS malfunction. Recharge the battery. The brake assist system does not operate while the ABS warning light is illuminated. Malfunction Indicator Light If this light illuminates while driving, the vehicle may have a problem. It is important to note the driving conditions when the light illuminated and contact an authorized dealer. The malfunction indicator light may illuminate in the following cases: The engine's electrical system has a problem. The emission control system has a problem. The fuel tank level is very low or approaching empty. The fuel-filler cap is missing or not tightened securely. If the malfunction indicator light remains on, or it flashes continuously, do not drive at high speeds and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

95 Warning!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

Caution!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

96 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Warning Light — If Equipped The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence. Note: Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

97 Caution!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means Power Steering Malfunction Indicator Light The light illuminates if the electric power steering has a malfunction. If the light illuminates, stop the vehicle in a safe place and do not operate the steering wheel. There is no problem if the light turns off after a while. Contact an authorized dealer if the light illuminates continuously. Note: If the indicator light illuminates, the power steering will not operate normally. If this happens, the steering wheel can still be operated, however, the operation may feel heavy compared to normal, or the steering wheel could vibrate when turning. Repeatedly jerking the steering wheel left and right while the vehicle is stopped or moving extremely slowly will cause the power steering system to go into protective mode which will make the steering feel heavy, but this does not indicate a problem. If this occurs, park the vehicle safely and wait several minutes for the system to return to normal. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

98 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means Automatic Transmission Warning Light — If Equipped The light illuminates when the transmission has a problem. Note: If the automatic transmission warning light illuminates, the transmission has an electrical problem. Continuing to drive your vehicle in this condition could cause damage to your transmission. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Master Warning Light Vehicles Equipped With Fiat Connect 3.0 System The warning light turns on continuously if there is a malfunction in the battery management system or there is a malfunction in the brake switch. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Vehicles Equipped With Fiat Connect 7.0 System The warning light turns on when the system has a malfunction. Operate the center display and verify the content. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Cold Start Disable Indicator Light When the ambient temperature is extremely low, the engine may not crank even when the engine starting procedure is performed. At this time, the Cold Start Disable Indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes. However, this does not indicate a problem. Note: Place your vehicle in a warm garage until the temperature has risen to a sufficient level to enable engine starting.

99 Warning Light What It Means Electric Throttle Control Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Lights What It Means

LED Headlight Warning Light This light illuminates if there is a malfunction in the LED headlight. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring) Off Indicator Light — If Equipped A problem in the system may be indicated under the following conditions: The light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON position. The light remains turned on even if the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch is operated. It turns on while driving the vehicle.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If the vehicle is driven on a road with less traffic and few vehicles that the radar sensors can detect, the system may pause (the warning light illuminates). However, it does not indicate a malfunction.

100 Warning Lights What It Means

Low Fuel Warning Light The light turns on when the remaining fuel is about 2.3 gallons (9.0 liters). The light illumination timing may vary because fuel inside the fuel tank moves around according to the driving conditions and the vehicle posture. Add fuel.

Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light — If Equipped This warning light indicates that little washer fluid remains. Add washer fluid.

Cruise Control Activation — If Equipped The warning light illuminates when the cruise control system is activated.

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

TCS / DSC System Indicator Light The warning light turns on when the in case of intervention of TCS/DSC systems. This means that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

DSC Off Indicator Light This indicator light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON. It also illuminates when the DSC OFF switch is pressed and TCS/DSC is switched off. For further information regarding the DSC OFF Switch, refer to “Safety Systems” in “Safety”.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light If the check fuel filler cap warning light illuminates while driving, the fuel filler cap may not be installed properly. Stop the engine and reinstall the fuel filler cap.

101 Green Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

Left Direction Indicator The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved downwards or, together with the right direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

Right Direction Indicator The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved upwards or, together with the left direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

Parking Lights And Normal Beam Headlights The warning light turns on when parking lights or normal beam headlights are turned on.

Cruise Control — If Equipped The warning light turns on when a cruising speed has been set.

Key Indicator Light The warning light turns on when the engine is ready to start. Warning Light Flashing When the keyless START/STOP button is pushed from ON to ACC or OFF position, the warning light may flash for approximately 30 seconds indicating that the remaining battery power of the key is low. Replace with a new battery before the key becomes unusable. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

102 Blue Warning Light

Warning Light What It Means

High Beam Headlights The warning light switches on when the high beam headlights are turned on.

Low Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light The light illuminates continuously when the engine coolant temperature is low and turns off after the engine is warm. If the low engine coolant temperature indicator light remains illuminated after the engine has been sufficiently warmed up, the temperature sensor could have a malfunction. Contact an authorized dealer.

103 Warning Light (Red Color) On Dashboard Trim

Warning Light What It Means Seat Belt Warning Light The seat belt warning light turns on if the driver or passengers seat is occupied and the seat belt is not fastened with the ignition placed in the ON position. If the driver or passengers seat belt is unfastened (only when the passenger seat is occupied) and the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than about 12 MPH (20 km/h), the warning light flashes. After a short time, the LED stops flashing, but remains illuminated. If a seat belt remains unfastened, the LED flashes again for a given period of time. If the driver or passengers seat belt is unfastened after the LED turns on, and the vehicle speed exceeds 12 MPH (20 km/h), the LED flashes again. With Passenger Occupant Classification System: to allow the passenger occupant classification sensor to function properly, do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the passengers seat. The sensor may not function properly because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference. Without Passenger Occupant Classification System: placing heavy items on the passengers seat may cause the passengers seat belt warning function to operate depending on the weight of the item. To allow the passengers seat weight sensor to function properly, do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the passengers seat. The sensor may not function properly because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference. If a small child is seated on the passengers seat, the warning light may not operate. Fasten the seat belts.

Warning Light (Amber Color) On Instrument Cluster Trim

Warning Light What It Means

Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off a few seconds later or when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on,

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL contact an authorized dealer.

104 Message Indicated On Warning Sound Is Display — If Equipped Activated Caution! With Fiat Connect Lights-On Reminder 7.0 System If lights are on and the ignition is placed Do not drive the vehicle with the air If a message is displayed in the center in the ACC position, or the ignition is display, take appropriate action (in a bag/seat belt pretensioner system warning placed in the OFF position, a beep sounding. Driving the vehicle with the calm manner) according to the continuous beep sound will be heard air bag/seat belt pretensioner system displayed message. when the driver's door is opened. warning beep sounding is dangerous. In a If the following messages are displayed collision, the air bags and the seat belt in the center display, a vehicle system Note: pretensioner system will not deploy and may be malfunctioning: When the ignition is placed in the this could result in death or serious injury. ACC position, the “Ignition Not Cycled Contact an authorized dealer as soon as Engine Coolant Temperature possible. High: displays if the engine coolant Off Warning Beep” overrides the temperature has increased excessively. lights-on reminder. Seat Belt Warning Beep A personalized function is available Charging System Malfunction: Except Mexico displays if the charging system has a to change the sound volume for the lights-on reminder. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened malfunction. when the ignition is in the ON position, Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner Temperature Warning:the a beep sound will be heard for about System Warning Beep following message is displayed when six seconds. the temperature around the center If there is a problem with the air If the driver or the passengers seat belt display is high. Lowering the bag/seat belt pretensioner systems and is not fastened and the vehicle is driven temperature of the inside of the vehicle the warning light illumination, a warning at a speed faster than about 12 MPH or the temperature around the center beep sound will be heard for about (20 km/h), a beep sound will be heard display by avoiding direct sunlight is 5 seconds every minute. again for a specified period of time. recommended. The air bag and seat belt pretensioner Until a seat belt is fastened or a given system warning beep sound will Stop the vehicle in a safe place and period of time has elapsed, the beep continue to be heard for approximately contact an authorized dealer. sound will not stop even if the vehicle 35 minutes. Contact an authorized speed falls below 12 MPH (20 km/h). dealer as soon as possible.

105 Note: To allow the front passenger seat weight Vehicles Without Advanced Keyless Function To allow the passenger occupant sensor to function properly, do not place classification sensor to function and sit on an additional seat cushion on If the key is taken out of the vehicle properly, do not place and sit on an the front passenger seat. The sensor may while the ignition is not switched OFF not function properly because the additional seat cushion on the and all the doors are closed, a beep will additional seat cushion could cause be heard inside the vehicle 6 times and passengers seat. The sensor may not sensor interference. function properly because the the KEY warning light (red) will turn additional seat cushion could cause When a small child sits on the front on continuously in the instrument sensor interference. passenger seat, it is possible that the cluster to notify the driver that the warning beep will not operate. ignition has not been switched OFF. If a small child is seated on the Note: Because the key fob uses passengers seat, the warning beep Ignition Not Switched OFF may not operate. low-intensity radio waves, the If the driver's door is opened while the warning may activate if the key fob Mexico ignition is placed in the ACC position, a is carried together with a metal object If the vehicle speed exceeds about continuous beep sound will be heard to or it is placed in a poor signal reception 12 MPH (20 km/h) with the driver or notify the driver that the ignition has not area. passengers seat belt unfastened, a been placed in the OFF position. Request Switch Inoperable Warning warning beep sounds continuously. If Left in this condition, the keyless entry Beep — If Equipped With Advanced the seat belt remains unfastened, the system will not operate, the car cannot Keyless Function beep sound stops once and then be locked, and the battery power will continues for about 90 seconds. The If the request switch on the exterior be depleted. door handle is pushed with a door beep stops after the driver or Key Removed From Vehicle passengers seat belt is fastened. open, or the ignition has not been Warning Beep placed in the OFF position, a beep will Until a seat belt is fastened or a given Vehicles With Advanced Keyless be heard for about two seconds to period of time has elapsed, the beep Function indicate that the doors, and trunk lid sound will not stop even if the vehicle cannot be locked. speed falls below 12 MPH (20 km/h). If the key is taken out of the vehicle while the ignition is not switched OFF Key Left-In-Trunk Compartment and all the doors are closed, the beep Warning Beep — If Equipped With which sounds outside of the vehicle will Advanced Keyless Function GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Warning! be heard 6 times, and the beep which If the key fob is left in the trunk with all sounds inside the vehicle will be heard doors locked and the trunk lid closed, a 6 times, and the KEY warning light (red) beep sound is heard for about ten Placing heavy items on the front passenger will flash continuously in the seconds to remind the driver the key seat may cause the front passenger seat belt instrument cluster to notify the driver warning function to operate depending on the fob has been left in the trunk. weight of the item. that the ignition has not been switched OFF. 106 If this happens, open the trunk lid by Vehicle Speed Alarm — If Equipped Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) pushing the electric trunk lid opener The vehicle speed alarm function is System Warning Beep — If and remove the key fob. designed to alarm the driver via a single Equipped A key fob removed from the trunk may beep sound and a warning indication in Driving Forward: the warning beep not function because its functions may the instrument cluster that the operates when the direction indicator have been temporarily suspended. To previously set vehicle speed has been lever is operated to the side where the restore the key fob function, perform exceeded. Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning the applicable procedure (see You can change the vehicle speed light is illuminated. paragraph “Keys” in “Getting to know setting at which the warning is triggered Note: A personalized function is your vehicle” chapter). (see paragraph “Trip Computer” in available to change the Blind Spot Key Left-In-Vehicle Warning Beep “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” Monitoring (BSM) warning beep sound (with the advanced keyless function) chapter). volume. If a key fob is left in the vehicle and all Tire Inflation Pressure Warning Reversing: if a moving object such as the doors and the trunk are locked Beep — If Equipped a vehicle or two-wheeled vehicle using a separate key fob, a beep sound Vehicle With Conventional Tires: the approaches on the left or right from is heard for about ten seconds to warning beep sound will be heard for behind your vehicle, the Blind Spot remind the driver that the key fob has about three seconds when there is any Monitoring (BSM) warning sound is been left in the vehicle. abnormality in tire inflation pressures activated. If this happens, open the door and (see “TPMS” in “Safety” chapter). Electronic Steering Lock Warning remove the key fob. A key fob removed Vehicle With Run-Flat Tires (If Beep from the vehicle this way may not Equipped): the warning beep sound will The warning beep operates if the function because its functions may be heard for about three seconds if the steering wheel is not unlocked after the have been temporarily suspended. tire pressures decrease. If the tire keyless ignition START/STOP button is Perform the applicable procedure to pressure decreases extremely, a beep pushed. restore the functions of the key fob (see sound will be heard for approximately Speed Limiter Warning Beep — If paragraph “Keys” in “Getting To Know 30 seconds (see “TPMS” in “Safety” Equipped Your Vehicle” chapter). chapter). If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed by about 2 MPH (3 km/h) or more, a warning beep operates continuously. The warning beep operates until the vehicle speed decreases to the set speed or less.

107 PERSONALIZATION Settings change method D: Refer to “Key Fob” in “Getting To FEATURES Know Your Vehicle” for further 1. Settings can be changed by information. Overview operating the center display screen E: Refer to “Lock/Unlock With The following Personalization Features A: Refer to the “Settings” paragraph Request Switch (With The Advanced can be set or changed by the customer in Fiat Connect 7.0 Supplement for Keyless Function)” (Doors) in “Getting or by an authorized dealer. further information. To Know Your Vehicle” for further Personalization Features differ B: Refer to “Fuel Economy Monitor” information. depending on the market and paragraph in this chapter. specification. 3. Settings can be changed by an 2. Settings can be changed by authorized dealer (refer to the operating the vehicle switches following table) C: Refer to “Auto Lock/Unlock X: Refer to your authorized dealer for Function” paragraph in “Getting To setting change. Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

Settings Change Method Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings 123 Safety Blind Spot Monitoring Warning Beep Volume (*) High High/Low/Off A — X System (if equipped) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

108 Settings Change Method Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings 123 Vehicle Lock: When Driving/Unlock: In Park/Lock: Out of Lock: When Park Unlock: In Operation condition of Door Locks Driving/Unlock: IGN Park/Lock: Shifting ACX auto lock/unlock function Off Out of Park/ Lock: When Driving Unlock: IGN Off/ Lock: When Driving/Off Keyless 90 seconds/ Time for locking door Entry 30 seconds 60 seconds/30 A—X automatically System seconds 90 seconds/ Time for locking door 30 seconds 60 seconds/30 A—X automatically Advanced seconds Keyless Auto-lock function Entry Off On/Off A — X operation/non operational System Beep volume when Off or Medium High/Medium/Low/Off A D/E X locking/unlocking 60 seconds/ Time until interior lights 15 seconds 30 seconds/15 A—X turn off after closing door Illuminated seconds/7.5 seconds Entry Time until interior lights 60 minutes/ System turn off automatically 30 minutes 30 minutes/10 A—X when any door is not minutes closed completely Auto-Wiper Operational/non- On On/Off (**) A — X Control operational

109 Settings Change Method Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings 123 Daytime Operational/non- Running On On/Off — — X operational Lights (DRL) 120 seconds/ Auto Time until headlights turn 90 seconds/ headlight off 30 second A—X off 60 seconds/ (***) 30 seconds/Off (****) High/Med. Auto-Light Timing by which lights Medium High/Medium/Med. A—X Control turn on Low/Low Adaptive Front Operational/non- Lighting On On/Off A — X operational (***) System (AFS) Lights-On Reminder Warning beep volume High High/Low/Off A — X

120 seconds/ Coming Time until headlights turn 90 seconds/60 Home 30 seconds A—X off seconds/30 seconds/ System Off Leaving Operational/Non- Home Light On or Off On/Off A — X operational System GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Turn Signals Beep volume Low High/Low A — X Three-Flash Operational/Non- On or Off On/Off A — X Turn Signal operational

110 Settings Change Method Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings 123 System Language indicated in Depends on market Language English A—X display (****) Temperature unit Temperature °C °F/°C A — X indicated in display Distance unit indicated in Distance mi or km mi/km A — X display Fuel Economy Monitor Ending On/Off Off On/Off B — X Display Fuel Linkage/non-linkage with Economy fuel economy reset and Off On/Off B — X Resetting trip meter reset Procedure (—) Feature setting change not available. (*) Only the volume of the warning beep during Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) operation can be changed. The volume of the warning beep during Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) operation cannot be changed. (**) If the auto-wiper control is set to Off, the wiper lever AUTO position is set to intermittent operation. (***) Though these systems can be turned Off, doing so will defeat the purpose of the system and FCA recommends that these systems remain On. (****) Available only in display from the center display.

111 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC Caution! Warning! SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a Prolonged driving with the MIL on could ONLY an authorized service technician sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic cause further damage to the emission should connect equipment to the OBD II system called OBD II. This system control system. It could also affect fuel connection port in order to read the VIN, monitors the performance of the economy and driveability. The vehicle must diagnose, or service your vehicle. emissions, engine, and automatic be serviced before any emissions tests If unauthorized equipment is connected can be performed. transmission control systems. When to the OBD II connection port, such as a these systems are operating properly, If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is driver-behavior tracking device, it may: your vehicle will provide excellent running, severe catalytic converter damage Be possible that vehicle systems, performance and fuel economy, as well and power loss will soon occur. Immediate as engine emissions well within current including safety related systems, could be service is required. impaired or a loss of vehicle control could government regulations. occur that may result in an accident If any of these systems require service, Onboard Diagnostic involving serious injury or death. the OBD II system will turn on the System (OBD II) Access, or allow others to access, Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will Cybersecurity information stored in your vehicle systems, also store diagnostic codes and other including personal information. information to assist your service Your vehicle is required to have an technician in making repairs. Although Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) your vehicle will usually be drivable and and a connection port to allow access For further information, refer to not need towing, see your authorized to information related to the “CyberSecurity” in “Tips, Controls, and dealer for service as soon as possible. performance of your emissions General Information” in your Owner’s controls. Authorized service technicians Manual Radio Supplement. may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

112 EMISSIONS Your vehicle has a simple ignition The MIL will not flash at all and will INSPECTION AND actuated test, which you can use prior remain fully illuminated until you place MAINTENANCE to going to the test station. To check if the ignition in the off position or start PROGRAMS your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, the engine. This means that your you must do the following: vehicle's OBD II system is ready and In some localities, it may be a legal you can proceed to the I/M station. requirement to pass an inspection of 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON If your OBD II system is not ready, you your vehicle's emissions control position, but do not crank or start the should see an authorized dealer or system. Failure to pass could prevent engine. repair facility. If your vehicle was vehicle registration. Note: If you crank or start the engine, recently serviced or had a battery failure For states that require you will have to start this test over. or replacement, you may need to do an Inspection and nothing more than drive your vehicle as Maintenance (I/M), this 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see you normally would in order for your check verifies the OBD II system to update. A recheck “Malfunction Indicator the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal with the above test routine may then Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on indicate that the system is now ready. when the engine is running, and that bulb check. Regardless of whether your vehicle's the OBD II system is ready for testing. 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL Normally, the OBD II system will be of two things will happen: is illuminated during normal vehicle ready. The OBD II system may not be operation you should have your vehicle ready if your vehicle was recently The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return to being fully serviced before going to the I/M station. serviced, recently had a dead battery or The I/M station can fail your vehicle a battery replacement. If the OBD II illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means because the MIL is on with the engine system should be determined not ready running. for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the that your vehicle's OBD II system is not test. ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.

113 This page is intentionally left blank

114 SAFETY

SAFETY SYSTEMS ...... 116 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . .118 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS...... 125 SEAT BELT SYSTEMS ...... 126 CHILD RESTRAINT PRECAUTIONS ...... 131 SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT SYSTEMSRS—AIRBAG...... 135 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . .150 CONSTANT MONITORING ...... 151

115 SAFETY SYSTEMS conditions because the tires will build The capabilities of an ABS equipped up a wedge of surface layer when the vehicle must never be exploited in a The vehicle has the following safety wheels skid. systems: reckless or dangerous manner that could The sound of the ABS operating jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) others. SAFETY may be heard when starting the engine Traction Contol System (TCS) or immediately after starting the vehicle; however, it does not indicate a TCS System (Traction Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) malfunction. Control System) For the operation of the systems, see the following pages. Warning! ABS System (Anti-lock Warning! Braking System) The ABS control unit continuously The ABS contains sophisticated The capability of the TCS must never be monitors the speed of each wheel. If one electronic equipment that may be tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in susceptible to interference caused by such a way as to compromise personal wheel is about to lock up, the ABS safety and the safety of others. responds by automatically releasing and improperly installed or high output radio reapplying that wheel's brake. The driver transmitting equipment. This interference will feel a slight vibration in the brake can cause possible loss of anti-lock The Traction Control System (TCS) pedal and may hear a chattering noise braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by enhances traction and safety by from the brake system. This is normal qualified professionals. controlling engine torque and braking. ABS system operation. Continue to When the TCS detects driving wheel depress the brake pedal without pumping Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead slippage, it can lower engine torque and the brakes. The warning light turns on operate the brakes to prevent loss of when the system has a malfunction. Refer to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly traction. This means that on a slick to “Warning Lights And Messages” in surface, the engine adjusts “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. automatically to provide optimum for further information. The ABS cannot prevent the natural power to the drive wheels, limiting Note: laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, wheel spin and loss of traction. Braking distances may be longer on nor can it increase braking or steering The indicator light turns on when the efficiency beyond that afforded by the loose surfaces (snow or gravel, for system has a malfunction. Refer to condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or “Warning Lights And Messages” in example) which usually have a hard the traction afforded. foundation. A vehicle with a normal “Getting To Know Your Instrument braking system may require less The ABS cannot prevent collisions, Panel” for further information. distance to stop under these including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. 116 TCS / DSC Indicator Light DSC operation is possible at speeds DSC OFF Indicator Light The indicator light stays on for a few greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition is placed in The indicator light turns on when the seconds when the ignition is placed in the ON mode. system has a malfunction. Refer to the ON mode. It also illuminates when If the TCS or DSC is operating, the “Warning Lights And Messages” in the DSC OFF switch is pressed and indicator light flashes. “Getting To Know Your Instrument TCS/DSC is switched off. If the indicator light stays on, the Panel” for further information. If the light remains illuminated and the TCS, DSC or the brake assist system Note: The DSC may not operate TCS/DSC is not switched off, contact may have a malfunction and they may correctly unless the following are your authorized dealer. The DSC may not operate correctly. Contact your observed: have a malfunction. authorized dealer. Use tires of the correct size DSC OFF Switch Note: specified for your vehicle on all four Push the switch to turn off the wheels. TCS/DSC. The indicator light in the In addition to the indicator light instrument cluster will illuminate. Push flashing, a slight sound will come from Use tires of the same manufacturer, brand and tread pattern on all four the switch again to turn the TCS/DSC the engine. This indicates that the back on. The indicator light will turn off. TCS/DSC is operating properly. wheels. On slippery surfaces, such as fresh Do not mix worn tires. snow, it will be impossible to achieve Note: The DSC may not operate high rpm when the TCS is on. correctly when tire chains are used. DSC System (Dynamic TCS / DSC Indicator Light Stability Control) The indicator light stays on for a few The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) seconds when the ignition is placed in automatically controls braking and the ON mode. It also illuminates when engine torque in conjunction with the DSC OFF switch is pressed and systems such as ABS and TCS to help TCS/DSC is switched off. If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC or 05060301-12A-001 control side slip when driving on DSC OFF Switch slippery surfaces, or during sudden or the brake assist system may have a evasive maneuvering, enhancing vehicle malfunction and they may not operate safety. Refer to “ABS System (Antilock correctly. Take your vehicle to an Brake System)” and “TCS System authorized dealer. (Traction Control System)” in this chapter for further information.

117 Note: Vehicle modifications, or failure to AUXILIARY DRIVING When DSC is on and you attempt properly maintain your vehicle, may SYSTEMS change the handling characteristics of your to free the vehicle when it is stuck, or Blind Spot Monitoring drive it out of freshly fallen snow, the vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the DSC system. Changes (BSM) System SAFETY TCS (part of the DSC system) will to the steering system, suspension, The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) activate. Depressing the accelerator braking system, tire type and size or wheel will not increase engine power and size may adversely affect DSC system is designed to assist the driver freeing the vehicle may be difficult. performance. Improperly inflated and during lane changes by alerting the When this happens, turn off the unevenly worn tires may also degrade driver to the presence of vehicles TCS/DSC. DSC performance. Any vehicle approaching from the rear in an modification or poor vehicle maintenance adjacent lane. If the TCS/DSC is off when the that reduces the effectiveness of the DSC The system detects vehicles engine is turned off, it automatically system can increase the risk of loss of approaching from the rear while activates when the ignition is placed in vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. traveling forward at a speed of 19 mph the ON mode. (30 km/h) or faster, and will activate the BSM warning lights equipped within the door mirrors. Warning! If the turn signal lever is operated to signal a lane change in the direction in Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) cannot which the warning light is illuminated, prevent the natural laws of physics from the system warns the driver of a vehicle acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase in the detection area by flashing the the traction afforded by prevailing road warning light and activating an audible conditions. DSC cannot prevent accidents, alert. including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. DSC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an DSC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

118 The detection area on this system The BSM switch is pushed and the The battery voltage has decreased. covers the driving lanes on both sides warning light in the instrument cluster is If the warning light in the instrument of the vehicle and from the rear part of turned off. cluster remains illuminated, have the the doors to about 164 ft (50 m) behind The vehicle speed is 19 mph vehicle inspected at an authorized the vehicle. (30 km/h ) or faster. dealer as soon as possible. The BSM system will not operate under Note: Under the following conditions, the following conditions: the rear radar sensors cannot detect objects, or it may be difficult to detect The vehicle speed falls below about them: 15 mph (25 km/h) even though the warning light is turned off. A vehicle is in the detection area at the rear in an adjacent driving lane but The gear selector is shifted to it does not approach. The BSM system REVERSE. determines the condition based on In the following cases, the warning light radar detection data. in the instrument cluster illuminates and A vehicle is traveling alongside your operation of the BSM system is vehicle at nearly the same speed for an deactivated. extended period of time. A problem with the system (including Vehicles approaching in the the BSM warning lights) is detected. opposite direction. A large change in position of a rear A vehicle in an adjacent driving lane 1 radar sensor on the vehicle has is attempting to pass your vehicle. occurred. A vehicle is in an adjacent lane on a There is a large accumulation of road with extremely wide driving lanes. 0528070012A002 snow or ice on the rear bumper near a The detection area of the rear radar BSM Detection Areas rear radar sensor. Remove any snow, sensors is set at the road width of 1 — Detection Area ice or mud on the rear bumper. expressways. Driving on snow covered roads for In the following cases, the activation of long periods. Activation / Deactivation the BSM warning lights and the audible alert may not occur, or they may be The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) The temperature near the rear radar delayed: system will operate when all of the sensors becomes extremely hot due to following conditions are met: driving for long periods on inclines A vehicle makes a lane change from during warm weather. a driving lane two lanes over to an The ignition is ON. adjacent lane. 119 Driving on steep inclines. In the following cases, it may be difficult Forward Driving (BSM System to view the illumination/flashing of the Operation) Crossing the summit of a hill or BSM warning lights equipped on the mountain pass. The BSM system detects vehicles door mirrors: approaching from the rear and turns on The turning radius is small (making a the warning lights equipped on the door SAFETY Snow or ice is adhering to the door sharp turn or turning at intersections). mirrors. mirrors according to the conditions. Whenthereisadifferenceinthe Additionally, while a warning light is The door glass is fogged or covered height between your driving lane and illuminated, if the turn signal lever is in snow, frost or dirt. the adjacent lane. operated to signal a turn in the direction The system switches to the Rear Cross in which the warning light is illuminated, Immediately after pushing the BSM Traffic Alert function when the gear selector the warning light flashes. switch and the system becomes is shifted to the REVERSE position. operable. Reverse Driving (RCTA System BSM Warning Lights Operation) If the road width is extremely narrow, vehicles two lanes over may be The BSM warning lights are equipped The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) detected. The detection area of the rear on the left and right door mirrors. system detects vehicles approaching radar sensors is set according to the from the left and right of your vehicle road width of expressways. and flashes the BSM warning lights. The BSM warning lights may turn on in Function For Canceling Illumination reaction to stationary objects on the Dimmer road or the roadside such as guardrails, When the headlight switch is in the tunnels, sidewalls, and parked vehicles. or position, the brightness of A BSM warning light may flash or the the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) audible alert may be activated several warning lights is dimmed. If the Blind times when making a turn at a city Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights intersection. are difficult to see due to glare from

Turn off the BSM system while pulling a 05280701-12A-001 surrounding brightness when traveling trailer or while an accessory such as a BSM Warning Light on snow-covered roads or under foggy bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of conditions, push the dimmer The warning lights turn on when a the vehicle. Otherwise, the radar’s cancellation button to cancel the vehicle approaching from the rear in an sound system waves will be blocked dimmer and increase the brightness of adjacent lane is detected. causing the system to not operate Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning normally. When the ignition is cycled ON, the lights when they turn on. malfunction warning light in the Refer to “Getting To Know Your instrument cluster illuminates Instrument Panel” for further momentarily and then turns off after a information. few seconds. 120 BSM Warning Beep The BSM and RCTA systems are The BSM audible alert is activated turned off when the battery is simultaneously with the flashing of a disconnected such as when the BSM warning light. battery terminals or fuses have been removed and reinstalled. To turn the BSM Switch BSM and RCTA systems back on, When the BSM switch is pushed, the push the BSM switch. BSM and RCTA systems are turned off and the BSM off indicator light in the RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) instrument cluster turns on. Function If the switch is pushed again, the BSM The RCTA system is designed to assist the driver in checking the area to the rear 05281200-03A-001 and RCTA systems become operable Rear Cross Traffic Alert and the BSM off indicator light turns off. of the vehicle on both sides while the vehicle is in REVERSE by alerting the 1 — Your Vehicle driver to the presence of vehicles 2—Approaching Vehicles Left And Right approaching the rear of the vehicle. The RCTA system detects vehicles approaching from the left and right RCTA Operation sides of the vehicle while the vehicle is The RCTA system operates when the reversing out of a parking space, and gear selector is shifted to the REVERSE notifies the driver of possible danger position. using the BSM warning lights and an If there is the possibility of a collision audible alert. with an approaching vehicle, the BSM warning light flashes and the audible 05280703-12A-001 alert is activated simultaneously. BSM Switch Location Note: When the ignition is cycled OFF, the condition before the system was turned off is maintained. For example, if the ignition is cycled OFF while the BSM and RCTA systems are operational, the BSM and RCTA systems remain operational the next time the ignition is cycled ON.

121 With Rear View Camera In the following cases, the BSM off Note: Under the following conditions, The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator light turns on and operation of the rear radar sensors cannot detect warning indication in the rearview the system is deactivated. If the BSM objects or it may be difficult to detect monitor also synchronizes with the off indicator light in the instrument them: cluster remains illuminated: SAFETY Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning The vehicle speed while in indicator light on the door mirrors. A problem with the system including REVERSE is about 6 mph (10 km/h ) the BSM warning lights has occurred. or faster. A large change in the position of a The rear radar sensor detection rear radar sensor on the vehicle has area is obstructed by a nearby wall or occurred. parked vehicle (reverse the vehicle to a position where the radar sensor There is a large accumulation of detection area is no longer obstructed). snow or ice on the rear bumper near a rear radar sensor. A vehicle is approaching directly to the rear of your vehicle. Driving on snow-covered roads for long periods. The vehicle is parked on an incline. The temperature near the radar Immediately after pushing the BSM sensors becomes extremely hot due to switch and the system becomes driving for long periods on inclines operable. during warm weather. The battery voltage has decreased. Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

0528140012A002 RCTA Detection

05281200-03A-003 Sensors Obstructed By Nearby Vehicles

122 General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

05281200-03A-005 1. This device may not cause harmful Your Vehicle Parked On An Incline interference. In the following cases, it may be difficult 2. This device must accept any to view the illumination/flashing of the interference received, including BSM warning lights equipped on the interference that may cause undesired door mirrors: operation. Snow or ice adheres to the door Note: Changes or modifications not mirrors. expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void The door glass is fogged or covered the user’s authority to operate the 05281200-03A-004 in snow, frost or dirt. Another Vehicle Approaching equipment. Directly To The Rear Of Your Turn off the RCTA system while pulling Vehicle a trailer or while an accessory such as a bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, the sound system waves emitted by the radar will be blocked causing the system to not operate normally.

123 TPMS (Tire Pressure level of tire wear is excessively different Tire Pressure Monitoring System Monitoring System) between them. Initialization Tire Pressure Monitoring System — A run-flat tire, snow tire, or tire chains In the following cases, system Lo/Hi Grade are used. initialization must be performed so that

SAFETY the system operates normally: The TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring An emergency tire is used (the System) monitors the air pressure of all warning light may flash and then A tire pressure is adjusted. four tires. continue illuminating). A tire rotation is performed. A tire or If the air pressure of one or more tires is wheel is replaced. too low, the system warns the driver by A tire is repaired using the indicating the warning light in the emergency flat tire repair kit. The battery is replaced or completely instrument cluster and operating a The tire pressure is excessively discharged. beep. higher than the specified pressure, or The warning light is illuminated. The system monitors the tire pressures the tire pressure is suddenly lowered for indirectly using the data sent from the some reason such as a tire burst during Initialization Method ABS wheel speed sensors. driving. Proceed as follows: To allow the system to operate The vehicle speed is lower than 1. Park the car in a safe place and correctly, the system needs to be about 9 mph (15 km/h) (including when firmly apply the parking brake. initialized with the specified tire pressure the vehicle is stopped), or the drive (value on the tire placard label). Follow period is shorter than five minutes. 2. Be sure the tires are cool, then the procedure and perform the adjust the tire pressure of all four (4) initialization (refer to “Tire Pressure The vehicle is driven on an extremely tires to the specified pressure indicated Monitoring System Initialization” rough road or a slippery, icy road. on the tire placard label located on the paragraph). Hard steering and rapid driver's door frame (door open). The warning light flashes when the acceleration/deceleration are repeated 3. Place the ignition in the ON mode. system has a malfunction. such as during aggressive driving on a Because this system detects slight winding road. 4. While the vehicle is parked, press and hold the TPMS system set switch changes in tire conditions, the timing of Load on the vehicle is applied to a and verify that the warning light in the warning may be faster or slower in tire such as by loading heavy luggage the instrument cluster flashes twice and the following cases: to one side of the vehicle. a beep sound is heard once. The size, manufacturer, or the type of System initialization has not been tires is different from the specification. implemented with the specified tire The size, manufacturer, or the type of pressure. a tire is different from the others, or the

124 General Information OCCUPANT The following regulatory statement RESTRAINT applies to all radio frequency (RF) SYSTEMS devices equipped in this vehicle: The most important safety equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the of the vehicle comprise the following FCC Rules and with Industry Canada protection systems: license-exempt RSS standard(s). Seat Belts Operation is subject to the following two conditions: SBA (Seat Belt Alert) System (1) This device may not cause harmful Head Restraints 05120101-12A-001 interference, and TPMS Set Switch Child Restraint Systems (2) This device must accept any Note: interference received, including Front Air Bags And Side Air Bags If the system initialization is interference that may cause undesired Read the information given in the performed without adjusting the tire operation. following pages with the utmost care. pressure, the system cannot detect the Note: Changes or modifications not It is of fundamental importance that the normal tire pressure and it may not expressly approved by the party protection systems are used in the illuminate the warning light even if a responsible for compliance could void correct way to guarantee the maximum tire pressure is low, or it may illuminate the user’s authority to operate the possible safety level for the driver and the light even if the pressures are equipment. the passengers. normal. Adjust the tire pressure on all four tires and initialize the system when the warning light is turned on. If the warning light turns on for a reason other than a flat tire, the tire pressure of all four tires may have decreased naturally. The system initialization will not be performed if the switch is pressed while the vehicle is being driven.

125 SEAT BELT Except Mexico SYSTEMS All of the seat belt retractors are designed to keep the lap/shoulder belts Buckle up even though you are an out of the way when not in use. excellent driver, even on short trips. SAFETY Someone on the road may be a poor The driver's seat belt has no provisions driver and could cause a collision that for child-restraint systems and has only includes you. This can happen far away an emergency locking mode. from home or on your own street. The driver may wear it comfortably, and Research has shown that seat belts it will lock during a collision. save lives, and they can reduce the However, the passenger's seat seriousness of injuries in a collision. lap/shoulder belt retractor operates in 03020100-12A-001 Some of the worst injuries happen two modes: emergency locking mode, Seat Belt Routing Guide when people are thrown from the and for child-restraint systems, vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility automatic locking mode. If you must of ejection and the risk of injury caused use the passenger seat for a child, slide Warning! by striking the inside of the vehicle. the passenger seat as far back as Everyone in a motor vehicle should be possible and make sure any child Relying on the air bags alone could lead to belted at all times. restraint system is secured properly. more severe injuries in a collision. The air Seat Belt Precautions Belt retraction may become difficult if bags work with your seat belt to restrain you the belts and seat belt guides are properly. In some collisions, the air bags Seat belts help to decrease the soiled, so try to keep them clean. Refer won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat possibility of severe injury during to “Lap/Shoulder Belt” in ”Interiors”, belt even though you have air bags. accidents and sudden stops. FCA US found in “Servicing And Maintenance” In a collision, you and your passengers LLC recommends that the driver and for further information. can suffer much greater injuries if you are passengers always wear seat belts. not properly buckled up. You can strike the Mexico interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of All the seats have lap/shoulder belts. the vehicle. Always be sure you and others These belts have retractors with inertia in your vehicle are buckled up properly. locks that keep them out of the way It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, when not in use. inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, The locks allow the belts to remain people riding in these areas are more likely comfortable on users, but they will lock to be seriously injured or killed. in position during a collision. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. 126 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a A seat belt that is buckled into the Important Safety seat and using a seat belt properly. wrong buckle will not protect you properly. Precautions Occupants, including the driver, should The lap portion could ride too high on your Please pay close attention to the always wear their seat belts whether or not body, possibly causing internal injuries. an air bag is also provided at their seating Always buckle your seat belt into the information in this section. It tells you position to minimize the risk of severe buckle nearest you. how to use your restraint system injury or death in the event of a crash. properly, to keep you and your A seat belt that is too loose will not passengers as safe as possible. Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could protect you properly. In a sudden stop, make your injuries in a collision much worse. you could move too far forward, increasing Here are some simple steps you can You might suffer internal injuries, or you could the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt take to minimize the risk of harm from a even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these snugly. deploying air bag: instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. A seat belt that is worn under your arm 1. Children 12 years old and under is dangerous. Your body could strike the should always ride buckled up in the Two people should never be belted into inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. a single seat belt. People belted together increasing head and neck injury. A seat can crash into one another in a collision, belt worn under the arm can cause internal 2. A child who is not big enough to hurting one another badly. Never use a injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder wear the vehicle seat belt properly lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more bones. Wear the seat belt over your (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this than one person, no matter what their size. shoulder so that your strongest bones will section for further information) must be take the force in a collision. secured in the appropriate child A shoulder belt placed behind you will restraint or belt-positioning booster seat Warning! not protect you from injury during a in a rear seating position. collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt A lap belt worn too high can increase in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride are meant to be used together. the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt in the front passenger seat, move the forces won’t be at the strong hip and A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart seat as far back as possible and use pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. in a collision and leave you with no the proper child restraint (Refer to Always wear the lap part of your seat belt protection. Inspect the seat belt system “Child Restraints” in this section for as low as possible and keep it snug. periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or further information). loose parts. Damaged parts must be A twisted seat belt may not protect you replaced immediately. Do not disassemble 4. Never allow children to slide the properly. In a collision, it could even cut or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt shoulder belt behind them or under into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat assemblies must be replaced after a against your body, without twists. If you their arm. collision. can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, 5. You should read the instructions take it to an authorized dealer immediately provided with your child restraint to and have it fixed. make sure that you are using it properly. 127 6. All occupants should always wear Seat Belts And Pregnant Emergency Locking their lap and shoulder belts properly. Women Mode 7. The driver and front passenger seats Pregnant Women And Persons With When the seat belt is fastened, it will should be moved back as far as Serious Medical Conditions always be in the emergency locking

SAFETY practical to allow the front air bags Pregnant women should always wear mode. room to inflate. seat belts. Ask your doctor for specific In the emergency locking mode, the recommendations. belt remains comfortable on the 8. Do not lean against the door or occupant and the retractor will lock in window. If your vehicle has side air The lap belt should be worn SNUGLY position during a collision. bags, and deployment occurs, the side AND AS LOW AS POSSIBLE OVER air bags will inflate forcefully into the THE HIPS. The shoulder belt should be If the belt is locked and cannot be space between occupants and the worn across your shoulder properly, but pulled out, retract the belt once, and door and occupants could be injured. never across the stomach area. then try pulling it out slowly. If this fails, pull the belt strongly one time and 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle loosen, then pull it out again slowly. needs to be modified to accommodate Seat Belt With Automatic Locking a disabled person, refer to the Mode “Customer Assistance” section for When the seat belt is fastened, it will customer service contact information. always be in the emergency locking mode until it is switched to automatic Warning! locking mode by pulling it all the way out to its full length. If the belt feels tight and hinders Never place a rear-facing child restraint comfortable movement while the in front of an air bag. A deploying vehicle is stopped or in motion, it may passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or be in the automatic locking mode younger, including a child in a rear-facing because the belt has been pulled too child restraint. far out. 0305123592US To return the belt to the more Never install a rear-facing child restraint Seat Belts And Pregnant Women in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a comfortable emergency locking mode, rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If Persons with serious medical wait until the vehicle has stopped in a the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do conditions also should wear seat belts. safe, level area, retract the belt fully to not transport a rear-facing child restraint in Check with your doctor for any special convert it back to emergency locking that vehicle. instructions regarding specific medical mode and then extend it around you conditions. again.

128 Automatic Locking Mode Failure to replace the seat belt assembly Position the lap belt as low as possible, Always use the automatic locking mode could increase the risk of injury in not on the abdominal area 2, then to keep the child-restraint system from collisions. adjust the shoulder belt 3 so that it fits snugly against your body. shifting to an unsafe position in the Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode event of an accident. to restrain occupants who are wearing the 3 To enable seat belt automatic locking seat belt or children who are using booster mode, pull it all the way out and seats. The locked mode is only used to connect it as instructed on the child install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint system. It will retract down to restraints that have a harness for restraining the child. the child restraint system and stay 1 locked on it. 2 Lap/Shoulder Belts Fastening The Seat Belt Warning!

03020201122002 Adjusting The Seat Belt Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger 1 — Position Lap Belt Across Lap Area front air bag can cause death or serious injury 1 2 — Lap Belt Routing to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. 3 — Shoulder Belt Routing Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a 2 rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in 03020201121001 that vehicle. Fastening The Seat Belt 1 — Seat Belt 2 — Seat Belt Tongue Buckle Warning!

The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. 129 Unfastening The Seat Belt If the driver or passenger's seat belt is Depress the button on the seat belt 1 unfastened (only when the passenger buckle. If the belt does not fully retract, seat is occupied) and the vehicle is pull it out and check for kinks or twists. driven at a speed faster than about 12 mph (20 km/h), the LED flashes.

SAFETY Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts. After a short time, the LED stops flashing, but remains illuminated. If a seat belt remains unfastened, the LED flashes again for a given period of time. In this case, fasten the seat belt.

0302020012A001 Seat Belt Pretensioner Seat Belt Routing Guides For optimum protection, the driver and 1 — Shoulder Belt Routing Guides passenger seat belts are equipped with 1 pretensioner and load limiting systems. Seat Belt Warning For both these systems to work Systems properly you must wear the seat belt 03020202UNF001 properly. Latching/Unlatching The Seat Belt If it detects that the occupant seat belt The seat belt pretensioners are 1 — Seat Belt Release Button is unfastened, the warning light or beep designed to deploy in moderate or alerts the occupant. severe frontal, near frontal collisions. Referto“WarningLightsAnd In addition, during a side collision, the Note: Messages” in “Getting To Knowing pretensioner operates on the side in If a belt does not fully retract, Your Instrument Panel” for further which the collision occurs. The inspect it for kinks and twists. If it is still information. pretensioners operate differently not retracting properly, have it Refer to “Seat Belt Warning Light” in depending on what types of air bags inspected: contact an authorized “Getting To Knowing Your Instrument are equipped. For details on the seat dealer. Panel” for further information. belt pretensioner operation, refer to the “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria” Always wear the seat belt with it Driver And Passenger paragraph in this chapter. correctly routed in its guide. Wearing a BeltAlert (If Equipped) seat belt without the seat belt routed in When a collision is detected, the Seat Belt Warning Systems its guide is dangerous because the pretensioners deploy simultaneously seat belt would not be able to provide The LED on dashboard trim turns on if with the air bags. For deployment adequate protection in an accident, the driver or passenger's seat is details, refer to the “SRS Air Bag which could result in serious injury. occupied and the seat belt is not Deployment Criteria” paragraph in this fastened with the ignition cycled to ON. chapter. 130 The seat belt retractors remove slack Load Limiter CHILD RESTRAINT quickly as the air bags are expanding. The load limiting system releases belt PRECAUTIONS Any time the air bags and seat belt webbing in a controlled manner to pretensioners have fired they must be Child Restraints reduce belt force on the occupant's replaced. chest. FCA US LLC strongly urges the use of With Passenger Occupant child-restraint systems for children small While the most severe load on a seat Classification System enough to use them. belt occurs in frontal collisions, the load In addition, the pretensioner system for limiter has an automatic mechanical Before buying any restraint system, the passenger, like the front and side function and can activate in any make sure that it has a label certifying passenger Air Bag, is designed to only accident mode with sufficient occupant that it meets all applicable Safety deploy when the passenger occupant movement. Standards. You should also make sure classification sensor detects a that you can install it in the vehicle Even if the pretensioners have not fired, passenger sitting on the passenger's where you will use it. the load limiting function must be seat. checked by an authorized dealer. Everyone in your vehicle needs to be Note: buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United These devices are not a substitute States, and every Canadian province, for proper seat belt placement by the requires that small children ride in occupant. The seat belt still must be proper restraint systems. This is the worn snugly and positioned properly. law, and you can be prosecuted for The pretensioners are triggered by ignoring it. the Occupant Restraint Controller Check your local and state or provincial (ORC). Like the air bags, the laws for specific requirements regarding pretensioners are single use items. A the safety of children riding in your deployed pretensioner or a deployed vehicle. air bag must be replaced immediately. Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.

131 Whatever child-restraint system you With Passenger Occupant consider, please pick the appropriate Classification System Warning! one for the age and size of the child, To reduce the chance of injuries caused obey the law and follow the instructions by deployment of the passenger Air that come with the individual Improper installation can lead to failure

SAFETY Bag, the Passenger Occupant child-restraint system. Classification Sensor work as a part of of an infant or child restraint. It could come A child who has outgrown the Supplementary Restraint System. loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child child-restraint systems should use seat This system deactivates the passenger belts, both lap and shoulder. If the restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly front and side Air Bags and also the when installing an infant or child restraint. shoulder belt crosses the neck or face, passenger seat belt pretensioner move the child closer to the center of system when the OFF passenger Air After a child restraint is installed in the the vehicle. Bag deactivation indicator light vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen A rear-facing child-restraint system illuminates. the child restraint attachments. Remove should NEVER be used on the When an infant or small child sits on the the child restraint before adjusting the passenger seat with the Air Bag system passenger seat, the system shuts off vehicle seat position. When the vehicle activated. In the event of an impact the the passenger front and side Air Bags seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child Air Bag activation may cause fatal and seat belt pretensioner system, so restraint. injuries to the transported child. make sure the OFF passenger Air When your child restraint is not in use, Bag deactivation indicator light secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or Warning! illuminates. For more details, refer to LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the "Passenger Occupant Classification vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. Sensor" in “Supplementary Restraint In a sudden stop or accident, it could In a collision, an unrestrained child can System SRS — Air Bag” for additional strike the occupants or seatbacks and become a projectile inside the vehicle. The information. cause serious personal injury. force required to hold even an infant on Note: A seat belt or child-restraint your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how system can become very hot in a strong you are. The child and others could closed vehicle during warm weather. To be badly injured or killed. Any child riding in avoid burning yourself or a child, check your vehicle should be in a proper restraint them before you or your child touches for the child’s size. them.

132 Child Restraint System Note: Types For additional information, refer to Warning! In this Owner’s Manual, explanation of www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers child restraint systems secured with seat or call: 1–888–327–4236 belts is provided for the following three Canadian residents should refer to Never place a rear-facing child restraint types of popular child-restraint systems: Transport Canada’s website for in front of an air bag. A deploying infant seat, child seat, booster seat. passenger Front Air Bag can cause death additional information: http:// or serious injury to a child 12 years or Note: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/ younger, including a child in a rear-facing safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm Installation position is determined child restraint. by the type of child restraint system. Infant Seat Never install a rear-facing child restraint Always read the manufacturer's An infant seat provides restraint by in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a instructions and this Owner’s Manual bracing the infant's head, neck and rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If carefully. back against the seating surface. the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in Due to variations in the design of that vehicle. child restraint systems, vehicle seats and seat belts, not all child restraint Child Seat may fit all seating positions. A child seat restrains a child's body Before purchasing a child-restraint using the harness. system, it should be tested in the specific vehicle seating position (or positions) where it is intended to be used. If a previously purchased child-restraint system does not fit, you may need to purchase a different one 06070809INF001 that will. Infant Seat

03030202CHD001 Child Seat

133 Booster Seat Child Seat Installation Place the child-restraint system on A booster seat is a child restraint Position the seat without putting your weight on the seat and secure the child-restraint accessory designed to improve the fit of The passenger lap/shoulder belt can system with the lap portion of the the seat belt system around the child's easily be converted into the automatic lap/shoulder belt. See the SAFETY body. locking mode, which must be done to manufacturer's instructions on the hold the child-restraint system. child-restraint system for belt routing Note: To check if your seats have side instructions. air bags: FCA vehicles equipped with side air bag will have an embossed To get the retractor into the "SRS AIRBAG" marking on the automatic locking mode, pull the outboard shoulder of the seats. shoulder belt portion of the seat belt Follow the child restraint system until the entire length of the belt is out of manufacturer's instructions carefully. the retractor. Depending on the type of child restraint Push the child-restraint system firmly system, it may not employ seat belts into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt 03030202BOO001 which are in automatic locking mode, retracts as snugly as possible. A clicking Booster Seat however if it uses an upper tether, it noise from the retractor will be heard may not be mounted properly in this during retraction if the system is in vehicle as there is no safe way to automatic locking mode. If the belt does Warning! anchor the tether. Confirm whether the not lock the seat down tight, repeat the child restraint system can be used with previous step and also this one. seat belts by reading the child restraint Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt system manufacturer's instructions. Seat your child safely in the under an arm or behind their back. In a child-restraint system and secure the crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a Passengers Seat Child Restraint child according to the instructions from child properly, which may result in serious System Installation (With Passenger the child-restraint system manufacturer. injury or death. A child must always wear Occupant Classification System) both the lap and shoulder portions of the Note: Child restraint systems are Note: Inspect this function before seat belt correctly. designed to be secured in vehicle seats each use of the child restraint system. by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a You should not be able to pull the lap/shoulder belt. shoulder belt out of the retractor while Proceed as follows: the system is in the automatic locking mode. When you remove the Make sure the ignition is cycled off. child-restraint system, be sure the belt Slide the seat as far back as fully retracts to return the system to possible. emergency locking mode before occupants use the seat belts. 134 Place the ignition in ON mode and SUPPLEMENTARY make sure the passenger air bag Warning! RESTRAINT SYSTEM deactivation indicator light illuminates SRS — AIR BAG after installing a child restraint system on the passenger seat. If the passenger Description Never place a rear-facing child restraint air bag deactivation indicator light does The front and side Supplementary not illuminate, remove the child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can Restraint Systems (SRS) include system, cycle the ignition to OFF mode, cause death or serious injury to a child different types of Air Bags. and then reinstall the child restraint 12 years or younger, including a child in a Note: Please verify which kinds of Air system. rear-facing child restraint. Bags are equipped on your vehicle by Never install a rear-facing child restraint locating the “SRS AIR BAG” location in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a indicators. rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If These indicators are visible in the area the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do where the Air Bags are installed. not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. The Air Bags are installed in the following locations: The steering wheel hub (Driver Air Bag) The passenger dashboard

06070400567567 (Passenger Air Bag) Passenger Air Bag Deactivation The outer sides of the seat backs Light (Side Air Bags) This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The Air Bag supplementary restraint systems are designed to provide supplementary protection in certain situations so seat belts are always important in the following ways.

135 Without seat belt usage, the Air Bags cannot provide adequate protection Warning! during an accident. Seat belt usage is necessary to: If the Indicator Light remains illuminated SAFETY Keep the occupant from being thrown into an inflating Air Bag. for an adult passenger, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system Reduce the possibility of injuries immediately. Failure to do so may cause during an accident that is not designed serious injury or death. If the Indicator for Air Bag inflation, such as roll-over or Light is illuminated with the words “PASS rear impact. AIRBAG OFF,” the Passenger Advanced 06070400567567 Front Air Bag will not deploy in the event of Reduce the possibility of injuries in Passenger Air Bag Deactivated a collision. frontal, near frontal or side collisions Light Never place a rear-facing child restraint that are not severe enough to activate Small children must be protected by a in front of an air bag. A deploying the Air Bags. passenger front air bag can cause death child-restraint system as stipulated by or serious injury to a child 12 years or Reduce the possibility of being law in every state and province. In younger, including a child in a rear-facing thrown from your vehicle. certain states and provinces, larger child restraint. children must use a child-restraint Reduce the possibility of injuries to system. Carefully consider which Never install a rear-facing child restraint lower body and legs during an accident child-restraint system is necessary for in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a because the Air Bags provide no rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If your child and follow the installation protection to these parts of the body. the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do directions in this Owner's Manual as not transport a rear-facing child restraint in Hold the driver in a position which well as the child-restraint system that vehicle. allows better control of the vehicle. manufacturer's instructions. Children 12 years or younger should If your vehicle is also equipped with Do not use a child-restraint system always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a a passenger occupant classification which employs an upper tether rear seat. system, refer to the “Passenger because there is no appropriate means Occupant Classification System” to anchor the tether. paragraph for further information. If your vehicle is equipped with a passenger occupant classification system, the passenger Air Bag deactivation indicator light illuminates for a specified time after the ignition has been cycled ON. 136 Warning!

Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the passenger seat assembly, its related components, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could result in death or serious injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS). If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.

137 Supplementary Restraint System Components With Passenger Occupant Classification System SAFETY

03040300-121-002 With Passenger Occupant Classification System 1 — Driver/Passenger Inflators And Air 5 — Side Crash Sensors 9 — Passenger Occupant Bags Classification Sensor 2 — Crash Sensors And Diagnostic 6 — Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner 10 — Passenger Occupant Module (Sas Unit) System Warning Light Classification Module 3 — Seat Belt Pretensioners 7 — Side Inflators And Air Bags 4 — Front Air Bag Sensors 8 — Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light

138 Without Passenger Occupant Classification System

03040300-122-003 Without Passenger Occupant Classification System 1 — Driver/Passenger Inflators And Air 4 — Front Air Bag Sensors 7 — Side Inflators And Air Bags Bags 2 — Crash Sensors And Diagnostic 5 — Side Crash Sensors Module (Sas Unit) 3 — Seat Belt Pretensioners 6 — Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light

139 How The SRS Air Bags Never place a rear-facing child restraint refer to "SRS Air Bag Deployment Work in front of an air bag. A deploying Criteria" in this chapter for further information. This vehicle has front air bags and passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or lap/shoulder belts for both the driver (With Passenger Occupant younger, including a child in a rear-facing Classification System) SAFETY and front passenger. The front air bags child restraint. are a supplement to the seat belt The driver's dual-stage air bag controls restraint systems. The SRS Air Bags are Never install a rear-facing child restraint air bag inflation in two energy stages. designed to provide further protection in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a During an impact of moderate severity, for passengers in addition to the seat rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the driver's air bag deploys with lesser the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do energy, whereas during more severe belt functions. Be sure to wear seat not transport a rear-facing child restraint in belts properly. that vehicle. impacts, it deploys with more energy. Seat Belt Pretensioners Passenger Air Bag The seat belt pretensioners are Driver Air Bag (Dual Stage) designed to deploy in moderate or The driver's air bag is mounted in the The passenger Air Bag is mounted in severe frontal, near frontal collisions. steering wheel. the passenger dashboard. In addition, during a side collision, the pretensioner operates on the side in which the collision occurs. The pretensioners operate differently depending on what types of air bags are equipped. For details on the seat belt pretensioner operation, refer to the “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria”.

Warning! 06010204-126-123 06010203-126-123 Driver Side Air Bags Passenger Side Air Bag Being too close to the steering wheel or When Air Bag crash sensors detect a The inflation mechanism for the instrument panel during front air bag passenger Air Bag is the same as the deployment could cause serious injury, frontal impact of greater than moderate including death. Air bags need room to force, the driver's Air Bag inflates driver's Air Bag, as mentioned above. inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending quickly helping to reduce injury mainly For more details about Air Bag your arms to reach the steering wheel or to the driver's head or chest caused by deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag instrument panel. directly hitting the steering wheel. For Deployment Criteria" in this chapter. more details about Air Bag deployment, 140 For further details about air bag door or window. For more details about deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag air bag deployment, refer to "SRS Air Warning! Deployment Criteria" in this chapter. Bag Deployment Criteria" in this Side Air Bags chapter for further information. The side air bags are mounted in the Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do outer sides of the seat backs. When the not lean against the door or window. Sit air bag crash sensors detect a side Warning! upright in the center of the seat. impact of greater than moderate force, Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be the system inflates the side air bag only Do not use accessory seat covers or place severely injured or killed. on the side in which the vehicle was hit. objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could affected and/or objects could be pushed lead to more severe injuries in a collision. into you, causing serious injury. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Warning! Side Air Bags.

Occupants, including children, who are With Passenger Occupant up against or very close to Side Air Bags Classification System can be seriously injured or killed. In addition, the passenger side bag is Occupants, including children, should designed to only deploy when the never lean on or sleep against the door, passenger occupant classification side windows, or area where the side air sensor detects a passenger sitting on bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. the passenger's seat. Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your Warning! protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection If a child restraint system, child, small from the Side Air Bags, occupants must 06010205-126-123 teenager or adult in the front passenger seat wear their seat belts properly and sit Side Air Bags is seated improperly, the occupant may upright with their backs against the seats. provide an output signal to the OCS that is Children must be properly restrained in a The side air bag inflates quickly to different from the occupant’s properly seated child restraint or booster seat that is reduce injury to the driver or weight input. This may result in serious injury appropriate for the size of the child. passenger's head and chest caused by or death in a collision. directly hitting interior parts such as a 141 Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the seatback in an upright Warning! position, your back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your SAFETY or near the floor. instrument panel could mean you won’t Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., have the air bags to protect you in a backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the collision. If the light does not come on as a front passenger seat. Holding an object bulb check when the ignition is first turned may provide an output signal to the OCS on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if that is different than the occupant’s it comes on as you drive, have an properly seated weight input, which may authorized dealer service the air bag result in serious injury or death in a system immediately. collision. Placing an object on the floor under the Passenger Side Front Air Bag And front passenger seat may prevent the OCS Child Restraint Systems from working properly, which may result in Rearward-facing child restraint systems serious injury or death in a collision. Do not must NEVER be fitted on the front seat place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat. with an active passenger side air bag since in the event of an impact the air bag activation may cause fatal injuries Warning Light/Beep to the transported child. 03030101-121-001 Sun Visor Air Bag Labels A system malfunction or operation ALWAYS comply with the instructions conditions are indicated by a warning. on the label stuck on the passenger Refer to the beginning paragraph of side sun visor : A = Mexico market/ B = Warning! “Warning Lights And Messages” in U.S.A. and Canada market. “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.

142 SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria This chart indicates the applicable SRS equipment that will deploy depending on the type of collision (the illustrations are the representative cases of collisions). Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

Types Of Collision

SRS Equipment A Severe Frontal/Near A Severe Side Collision (*) A Rear Collision Frontal Collision

SRS Equipment

Seat Belt Pretensioner X (**) (Both Sides) X (**) (Impact Side Only) Driver Air Bag X No air bag and seat belt pretensioner will be activated in Passenger Air Bag X (**) a rear collision Side Air Bag X (**) (Impact Side Only) X: the SRS air bag equipment is designed to deploy in a collision. (*) In a side collision, the seat belt pretensioners and the side air bags deploy (only on the side in which the collision occurs). 143 (**) Passenger Occupant Classification System: the passenger front and side air bags and the seat belt pretensioner are designed to deploy when the passenger occupant classification sensor detects a passenger sitting on the passenger's seat. Note: In a frontal offset collision, the equipped air bags and pretensioners may all deploy depending on the direction, angle, and rate of impact. SAFETY Warning!

Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the passenger seat assembly, its related components, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could result in death or serious injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS). If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.

Warning!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

Warning!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the occupant classification sensor from working properly, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat. If there is a fault present in the occupant classification sensor, both the Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deactivated until the fault is cleared. This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately.

144 Limitations To SRS Air Limitations To Side Collision Bag A Detection In severe collisions such as those Side collisions may not be detected as described in "SRS Air Bag Deployment severe enough to deploy the SRS air Criteria" paragraph, the applicable SRS bag equipment: air bag equipment will deploy. Side impacts involving trees or However, in some accidents, the poles (A). equipment may not deploy depending Side impacts with two-wheeled on the type of collision and its severity. vehicles (B). Limitations To Front / Near Front Roll-over. Collision Detection B Front/near front collisions may not be detected as severe enough to deploy A the SRS air bag equipment: Impacts involving trees or poles (A). Frontal offset impact to the vehicle (B). Rear-ending or running under a truck's tail gate. 03040600-121-001 Front/Near Front Collision B

03040600-123-001 Side Collision

03040600-122-001 Rear End Collision 145 This system shuts off the passenger front and side Air Bags and seat belt Warning! pretensioner system, so make sure the passenger Air Bag deactivation indicator light turns on. Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in SAFETY The air bag/seat belt pretensioner your instrument panel could mean you system warning light flashes and the won’t have the air bags to protect you in a passenger Air Bag deactivation collision. If the light does not come on as a indicator light illuminates if the sensors bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if have a possible malfunction. If this it comes on as you drive, have an 03040600-124-002 happens, the passenger front and side authorized dealer service the air bag Roll-Over Collision Air Bags and seat belt pretensioner system immediately. system will not deploy. Passenger Occupant Placing an object on the floor under the Note: If a passenger is seated as Classification Sensor front passenger seat may prevent the shown in the following figure the occupant classification sensor from Your vehicle is equipped with a passenger occupant classification working properly, which may result in passenger occupant classification sensor cannot detect a passenger serious injury or death in a collision. Do not sensor as a part of the supplementary sitting on the passenger's seat correctly place any objects on the floor under the restraint system. This sensor is and the deployment/non-deployment of front passenger seat. equipped in the passenger's seat the Air Bags cannot be controlled as If there is a fault present in the occupant cushion. This sensor measures the indicated in the passenger Air Bag classification sensor, both the Indicator electrostatic capacity of the deactivation indicator light on/off Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will passenger's seat. condition chart. illuminate to show that the Passenger The SRS unit is designed to prevent the Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the Passenger passenger front and side Air Bags and Advanced Front Air Bag will remain seat belt pretensioner system from Warning! deactivated until the fault is cleared. This deploying if the passenger Air Bag indicates that you should take the vehicle deactivation indicator light turns on. to an authorized dealer for service If a child restraint system, child, small immediately. To reduce the chance of injuries caused teenager or adult in the front passenger by deployment of the passenger Air seat is seated improperly, the occupant Bag, the system deactivates the may provide an output signal to the passenger front and side Air Bags and occupant classification sensor that is also the seat belt pretensioner system different from the occupant’s properly when the passenger Air Bag seated weight input. This may result in deactivation indicator light turns on. serious injury or death in a collision.

146 Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Children 12 years or younger should Indicator Lights always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a These indicator lights turn on to remind rear seat. you that the passenger front and side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioner will Note: or will not deploy during a collision. The system requires about 10 seconds to alternate between turning the passenger front and side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioner system on or off. The passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may turn on repeatedly if luggage or other items are put on the passenger seat, or if the temperature of the vehicle's interior changes suddenly. 06070400567567 Passenger Air Bag Deactivated The passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may turn on for 10 seconds if the electrostatic capacity 03040702-12A-001 Improper Seating Positions Warning! on the passenger seat changes. The air bag/seat belt pretensioner system warning light might turn on if Warning! Never place a rear-facing child restraint the passenger seat receives a severe in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death impact. Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., or serious injury to a child 12 years or backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the younger, including a child in a rear-facing front passenger seat. Holding an object child restraint. may provide an output signal to the Never install a rear-facing child restraint occupant classification sensor that is in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a different than the occupant’s properly rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If seated weight input, which may result in the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do serious injury or death in a collision. not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.

147 If the passenger Air Bag If the passenger Air Bag Passenger Air Bag Deactivation deactivation indicator light does not deactivation indicator light turns on Indicator Light On/Off Condition turn on after installing a child restraint when an occupant is seated directly in Chart system on the passenger seat, first, the passenger seat, have the If the passenger occupant classification reinstall your child restraint system passenger readjust their posture by sensor is normal, the indicator light SAFETY according to the procedure in this sitting with their feet on the floor, and turns on when the ignition is cycled ON. Owner’s Manual. Then, if the then refastening the seat belt. If the The light turns off after a few seconds. passenger Air Bag deactivation OFF passenger Air Bag deactivation Then, the indicator light turns on or is indicator light still does not turn on, indicator light remains turned on, slide off under the following conditions: contact an authorized dealer as soon the passenger seat as far back as as possible. possible. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Condition Detected By The Passenger Air Bag Passenger Front And Side Air Passenger Seat Belt Passenger Occupant Deactivation Indicator Light Bags Pretensioner System Classification System Empty (Not occupied) On Deactivated Deactivated A child is seated in a child On Deactivated Deactivated restraint system (*) Adult (**) Off Ready Ready (*) The occupant classification sensor may not detect a child seated on the seat, in a child restraint system, or a junior seat depending on the child's physical size and seated posture. (**) If a smaller adult sits on the passenger seat, the sensors might detect the person as being a child depending on the person's physique. If the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not turn on when the ignition is cycled ON and does not turn on as indicated in the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light on/off condition chart, do not allow an occupant to sit in the passenger seat and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The system may not work properly in an accident.

148 Warning!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

Warning!

No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate. Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.

149 Maintaining Your Air Bag EVENT DATA Note: System RECORDER (EDR) EDR data are recorded by your This vehicle is equipped with an event vehicle only if a non-trivial crash or near Warning! data recorder (EDR). crash-like situation occurs; no data are SAFETY The main purpose of an EDR is to recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal Modifications to any part of the air bag record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag data (e.g., name, gender, age, and system could cause it to fail when you crash location) are recorded. However, need it. You could be injured if the air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, system is not there to protect you. Do not data that will assist in understanding other parties, such as law modify the components or wiring, how a vehicle’s systems performed. enforcement, could combine the EDR including adding any kind of badges or The EDR is designed to record data data with the type of personally stickers to the steering wheel hub trim related to vehicle dynamics and safety identifying data routinely acquired cover or the upper passenger side of the systems for a short period of time, during a crash investigation. instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add typically 30 seconds or less. To read data recorded by an EDR, aftermarket side steps or running boards. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to special equipment is required, and record such data as: access to the vehicle or the EDR is It is dangerous to try to repair any part needed. In addition to the vehicle of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to How various systems in your vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as tell anyone who works on your vehicle that were operating. it has an air bag system. law enforcement, that have the special Whether or not the driver and equipment, can read the information if Do not attempt to modify any part of passenger safety belts were they have access to the vehicle or the your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function buckled/fastened. EDR.FCA will not disclose any of the properly if modifications are made. Take How far (if at all) the driver was data recorded in an EDR to a third party your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any pushing the accelerator and/or brake unless: air bag system service. If your seat, pedal. including your trim cover and cushion, A written agreement from the needs to be serviced in any way (including How fast the vehicle was traveling. vehicle owner or the lessee is removal or loosening/tightening of seat obtained. attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an This data can help provide a better authorized dealer. Only manufacturer understanding of the circumstances in Officially requested by the police or approved seat accessories may be used. which crashes and injuries occur. other law enforcement authorities. If it is necessary to modify the air bag Used as a defense for FCA in a law system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer. suit, claim, or arbitration. Ordered by a judge or court.

150 However, if necessary, FCA will: Information related to controls of CONSTANT other on-vehicle computers. Use the data for research on FCA MONITORING vehicle performance, including safety. The recorded data may vary depending The following components of the Air on the vehicle grade and optional Disclose the data or the Bag systems are monitored by a equipment. Voice and images are not diagnostic system: summarized data to a third party for recorded. research purposes without disclosing Data Handling Crash Sensors, And Diagnostic vehicle or owner identification Module (Sas Unit) information. FCA and its subcontracting parties may obtain and use the recorded data for Front Air Bag Sensors Recording Of Vehicle Data vehicle malfunction diagnosis, research Air Bag Modules This vehicle is equipped with a and development, and quality computer which records the following improvement. Side Crash Sensors main vehicle data related to vehicle FCA will not disclose or provide any of controls, operation, and other driving Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner the obtained data to a third party System Warning Light conditions. unless: Recorded Data Seat Belt Buckle Switch An agreement from the vehicle Vehicle conditions such as engine owner (agreements from lessor and Seat Belt Pretensioners speed and vehicle speed. lessee for leased vehicle) is obtained. Related Wiring Driving operation conditions such Officially requested by the police or With Passenger Occupant as accelerator and brake pedals, and other law enforcement authorities. Classification System information related to the environmental circumstances while the For statistical processing by a Passenger Air Bag Deactivation vehicle is driven. research institution, after processing Indicator Light the data so that identification of the Malfunction diagnosis information owner or the vehicle is impossible. Passenger Occupant Classification from each on-vehicle computer. Sensor Passenger Occupant Classification Module — If Equipped The diagnostic module continuously monitors the system's readiness. This begins when the ignition is cycled ON and continues while the vehicle is being driven.

151 Enhanced Accident Cut off battery power to the: Enhanced Accident Response System Response System Reset – Engine Procedure In the event of an impact, if the – Electric Motor (if equipped) communication network remains intact, In order to reset the Enhanced Accident

SAFETY and the power remains intact, – Electric power steering Response System functions after an depending on the nature of the event, event, the ignition switch must be – Brake booster the ORC will determine whether to have changed from ignition START or the Enhanced Accident Response – Electric park brake ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully System perform the following functions: check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the – Automatic transmission gear engine compartment and on the ground Cut off fuel to the engine selector near the engine compartment and fuel (If Equipped) – Horn tank before resetting the system and Cut off battery power to the electric starting the engine. – Front wiper motor (If Equipped) – Headlamp washer pump Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power Note: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the STOP Turn on the interior lights, which (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the remain on as long as the battery has key from the ignition switch to avoid power or for 15 minutes from the draining the battery. Carefully check the intervention of the Enhanced Accident vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine Response System. compartment and on the ground near Unlock the power door locks. the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting Your vehicle may also be designed to the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or perform any of these other functions in damage to the vehicle electrical devices response to the Enhanced Accident (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset Response System: the system by following the procedure Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off described below. If you have any doubt, the HVAC Blower Motor, Close the contact an authorized dealer. HVAC Circulation Door

152 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTINGTHEENGINE...... 154 BRAKE SYSTEM ...... 155 MANUAL TRANSMISSION ...... 157 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED ...... 158 SPEED CONTROL ...... 164 RADAR SENSORS — IF EQUIPPED ...... 167 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED ...... 168 PARKVIEW REAR BACKUP CAMERA...... 172 REFUELING THE VEHICLE .....178 VEHICLELOADING...... 182 TOWING TRAILERS ...... 183 DRIVING TIPS ...... 183

153 STARTING THE Never press the accelerator pedal for 4. Place the start button in the ON ENGINE starting the engine. mode, push and release it as soon as the engine starts. If the engine does not Models Equipped With A Starting The Engine start within 10 seconds, push the start Manual Transmission Before starting the engine, adjust the button to OFF mode and wait for seat, the interior rear view mirrors, the Proceed as follows: 10-15 seconds before repeating the starting procedure. door mirrors, and fasten the seat belt 1. Engage the parking brake and place correctly. the gear selector in NEUTRAL. Cold Weather Operation 2. Place the start button in the ACC Regarding Cold Start Disable Warning! mode. When the ambient temperature is 3. Fully depress the clutch pedal extremely low, the engine may not without touching the accelerator. crank even when the engine starting When leaving the vehicle, always remove procedure is performed. At this time, the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. 4. Place the start button in the ON the Cold Start Disable Indicator light in mode, push and release it as soon as the instrument cluster flashes. However, Never leave children alone in a vehicle, the engine starts. If the engine does not this does not indicate a problem.

STARTING AND OPERATING or with access to an unlocked vehicle. start within 10 seconds, push the start Perform the necessary procedures (see Allowing children to be in a vehicle button to OFF mode and wait for “Warning lights And Messages” unattended is dangerous for a number of 10-15 seconds before repeating the paragraph in “Getting To Know Your reasons. A child or others could be starting procedure. Instrument Panel” chapter). seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, Models Equipped With Regarding Ice Breaker brake pedal or the transmission gear An Automatic When the ambient temperature is low, selector. Transmission the start of cranking may be delayed after engine starting procedure is Do not leave the key fob in or near the Proceed as follows: vehicle, or in a location accessible to performed. At this time, the Cold Start children, and do not leave the ignition of a 1. Engage the parking brake and place Disable Indicator light in the instrument vehicle equipped with Advanced Keyless the gear selector to P (PARK) or N cluster illumintes. However, this does Entry in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A (NEUTRAL). not indicate a problem. child could operate power windows, other Refer to your authorized dealer controls, or move the vehicle. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal regarding other related parts which are Do not leave children or animals inside without touching the accelerator. to be input such as function name, parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior 3. Place the start button in the ACC operating scenario (condition) of each heat build-up may cause serious injury or mode. function, indicator operation, and user death. operation/procedure information. 154 Extended Park Starting After Starting — BRAKE SYSTEM Warming Up The Engine Note: Extended Park condition occurs This vehicle has power-assisted brakes when the vehicle has not been started Proceed as follows: that adjust automatically through or driven for at least 30 days. normal use. Should power-assist fail, 1. Travel slowly, letting the engine run you can stop by applying greater force 1. Install a battery charger or jumper at a reduced RPM, without accelerating than normal to the brake pedal. But the cables to the battery to ensure a full suddenly. battery charge during the crank cycle. distance required to stop will be greater 2. It is recommended to wait until the than usual. 2. Place the ignition in the START digital engine coolant temperature Note: Always depress the brake pedal mode and release it when the engine indicator starts moving before with the right foot. Applying the brakes starts. demanding full performance. with the unaccustomed left foot could slow your reaction time to an 3. If the engine fails to start within Stopping The Engine 10 seconds, place the ignition in the emergency situation resulting in STOP (OFF/LOCK) mode, wait five Proceed as follows: insufficient braking operation. seconds to allow the starter to cool, Do not drive with your foot held on the 1. Park the car in a position that is not then repeat the Extended Park Starting clutch pedal or brake pedal, or hold the dangerous for oncoming traffic, if procedure. clutch pedal depressed halfway equipped with manual transmission unnecessarily. Doing so could result in place gear selector in FIRST (1st) or 4. If the engine fails to start after eight the following: attempts, allow the starter to cool for at REVERSE (R) gear, if equipped with least 10 minutes, then repeat the automatic transmission place the gear The clutch and brake parts will wear procedure. selector to PARK (P). out more quickly. 2. Push and release the ignition button The brakes can overheat and Caution! to STOP the engine. adversely affect brake performance.

To prevent damage to the starter, do not Warning! crank continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency. 155 Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Do not leave the key fob in or near the Warning Light” on is dangerous. vehicle or in a location accessible to A significant decrease in braking children. A child could operate power performance or vehicle stability during windows, other controls, or move the braking may occur. It will take you longer vehicle. to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control. You could have a Be sure the park brake is fully collision. Have the vehicle checked disengaged before driving; failure to do so immediately. can lead to brake failure and a collision. Always fully apply the park brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to Caution! 05050102-12A-001 leave a manual transmission in REVERSE Parking Brake (R) or FIRST (1st) gear. Failure to do so Wear shoes appropriate for driving in order may allow the vehicle to roll and cause 1 — Parking Brake Lever to avoid your shoe contacting the brake damage or injury. 2 — Parking Brake Release Button pedal when depressing the accelerator pedal. Setting the Parking Brake Warning Light STARTING AND OPERATING Depress the brake pedal and then firmly The warning light turns on when the Parking Brake pull the parking brake lever fully system has a malfunction. Refer to Note: Driving with the parking brake on upwards with sufficient force to hold the “Warning Lights And Messages” in will cause excessive wear of the brake vehicle in a stationary position. “Getting To Know Your Instrument parts. Releasing the Parking Brake Panel” for further information. Depress the brake pedal and pull the Brake Pad Wear Indicator Warning! parking brake lever upwards, then When the disc brake pads become press the release button. While holding worn, the built-in wear indicators the button, lower the parking brake contact the rotors. This causes a Never leave children alone in a vehicle, lever all the way down to the released screeching noise to warn that the pads or with access to an unlocked vehicle. position. should be replaced. When you hear this Allowing children to be in a vehicle noise contact your authorized dealer as unattended is dangerous for a number of soon as possible. reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

156 Brake Assist MANUAL During emergency braking situations TRANSMISSION when it is necessary to depress the Manual Transmission brake pedal with greater force, the brake assist system provides braking assistance, thus enhancing braking performance. When the brake pedal is Warning! depressed hard or depressed more quickly, the brakes apply more firmly. You or others could be injured if you leave Note: the vehicle unattended without having the park brake fully applied. The park brake 05210101-12A-001 When the brake pedal is depressed should always be applied when the driver Gear Selector hard or depressed more quickly, the is not in the vehicle, especially on an pedal will feel softer but the brakes will incline. Depress the clutch pedal all the way down apply more firmly. This is a normal while shifting, then release it slowly. effect of the brake assist operation and Your vehicle is equipped with a device does not indicate a malfunction. Caution! to prevent shifting to REVERSE (R) by mistake. Push the gear selector When the brake pedal is depressed downward and shift to REVERSE (R). hard or depressed more quickly, a Never drive with your foot resting on the motor/pump operation noise may be clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle A natural driving posture can be heard. This is a normal effect of the on a hill with the clutch pedal partially achieved by lightly gripping the gear brake assist and does not indicate a engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear selector from the side without having to on the clutch. malfunction. rest your elbow on the center console. If shifting to REVERSE (R) is difficult, The brake assist equipment does To engage the gears, press the clutch shift back into neutral, release the not supersede the functionality of the pedal fully and put the gear selector clutch pedal, and try again. vehicle's main braking system. into the required position. The diagram Note: A certain amount of noise from the for gear engagement is shown on the transmission is normal. This noise can be knob. most noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when driving. The noise may also be more noticeable when the transmission is warm. This noise is normal and is not an indication of a problem with your clutch or transmission. 157 With Parking Sensor System AUTOMATIC When leaving the vehicle, always make When the gear selector is shifted to the TRANSMISSION — IF sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, REVERSE (R) position with the ignition EQUIPPED remove the key fob from the vehicle, and placed in the ON mode, the parking lock the vehicle. Shift Interlock sensor system is activated an audible Never leave children alone in a vehicle, sound is heard. This vehicle is equipped with an or with access to an unlocked vehicle. interlock system that holds the Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of Caution! transmission gear selector in PARK (P) unless the brakes are applied. To shift reasons. A child or others could be the transmission out of PARK (P), the seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, Keep your foot off the clutch pedal ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN brake pedal or the transmission gear except when shifting gears. Also, do not mode (engine running or not) and the selector. use the clutch to hold the vehicle on an hill brake pedal must be pressed. or grade. Riding the clutch will cause Do not leave the key fob in or near the needless clutch wear and damage. vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in Do not apply any excessive lateral force Warning! the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could to the gear selector when changing from operate power windows, other controls, or STARTING AND OPERATING fifth to fourth gear. This could lead to the move the vehicle. accidental selection of second gear, which It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or could result in damage to the NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher transmission. than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could Caution! Make sure the vehicle comes to a accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. complete stop before shifting to REVERSE You could lose control of the vehicle and (R). Shifting to REVERSE (R) while the hit someone or something. Only shift into Damage to the transmission may occur if vehicle is still moving may damage the gear when the engine is idling normally the following precautions are not observed: transmission. and your foot is firmly pressing the brake Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE pedal. only after the vehicle has come to a Reverse can only be engaged when the complete stop. vehicle is completely stationary. With the Unintended movement of a vehicle engine running, wait at least two seconds could injure those in or near the vehicle. As Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, with the clutch pedal fully pressed before with all vehicles, you should never exit a NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is engaging reverse to prevent damage to vehicle while the engine is running. Before above idle speed. the gears. exiting a vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift the transmission into PARK, Before shifting into any gear, make sure and turn the ignition OFF. When the your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. 158 The gear selector must be in PARK (P) Note: Even if you intend to use the Gear Selector Positions or NEUTRAL (N) to operate the starter. automatic transmission functions as a PARK (P) The transmission gear selector has traditional automatic, you should also PARK (P) locks the transmission and PARK (P), REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N), be aware that you can inadvertently prevents the driveshaft from rotating. DRIVE (D), and MANUAL (M)(+/–) shift shift into manual shift mode and an positions. inappropriate gear may be retained as the vehicle speed increases. If you The transmission may be shifted freely Warning! from REVERSE (R), to NEUTRAL (N), to notice the engine speed going higher or DRIVE (D), to MANUAL (M)(+/–). hear the engine racing, confirm you have not accidentally slipped into Never use the PARK position as a manual shift mode (refer to “Manual substitute for the park brake. Always apply Shift Mode” paragraph in this section). the park brake fully when parked to guard Shift Position Indication against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. The gear selector position (PRNDM) is Your vehicle could move and injure you illuminated when the ignition is placed and others if it is not in PARK. Check by in the ON mode. trying to move the gear selector out of Note: If one of the following actions is PARK with the brake pedal released. Make performed, the gear selector position is sure the transmission is in PARK before displayed for five minutes even if the exiting the vehicle. ignition is placed in a mode other than It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or ON. NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly The ignition is placed in the OFF pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could mode. accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. The driver's door is opened. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into Gear Position Indication gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake In MANUAL (M) shift mode, the “M” of pedal. the shift position indication illuminates

05210200LHD12AT001 and the number of the selected gear is Gear Selector And Pattern displayed.

159 Unintended movement of a vehicle NEUTRAL (N) could injure those in or near the vehicle. As Caution! In NEUTRAL (N), the wheels and with all vehicles, you should never exit a transmission are not locked. The vehicle vehicle while the engine is running. Before will roll freely even on the slightest exiting a vehicle, always come to a Before moving the transmission gear incline unless the parking brake or complete stop, then apply the park brake, selector out of PARK, you must turn the brakes are applied. shift the transmission into PARK, turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, and also ignition OFF, and remove the key fob. press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key to the gear selector could result. removal) position (or, with pushbutton Warning! start, when the ignition is in the OFF DO NOT race the engine when shifting mode), the transmission is locked in PARK, from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear securing the vehicle against unwanted range, as this can damage the drivetrain. Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn movement. off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your When leaving the vehicle, always make Note: response to changing traffic or road sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, conditions. You might lose control of the remove the key fob from the vehicle, and Shifting into PARK (P), NEUTRAL vehicle and have a collision. lock the vehicle. (N) or REVERSE (R) while the vehicle is

STARTING AND OPERATING moving can damage your Never leave children alone in a vehicle, Note: Do not shift into NEUTRAL (N) or with access to an unlocked vehicle. transmission. Allowing children to be in a vehicle when driving the vehicle. Doing so will Shifting into DRIVE (D) or REVERSE damage the transmission. Press the unattended is dangerous for a number of (R) when the engine is running faster reasons. A child or others could be parking brake or depress the brake seriously or fatally injured. Children should than idle can damage the pedal before moving the gear selector be warned not to touch the park brake, transmission. from NEUTRAL (N) to prevent the brake pedal or the transmission gear vehicle from moving unexpectedly. selector. REVERSE (R) DRIVE (D) Do not leave the key fob in or near the This range is for moving the vehicle vehicle (or in a location accessible to DRIVE (D) is the normal driving position. children), and do not leave the ignition (in a backward. Shift into REVERSE only From a stop, the transmission will vehicle equipped with pushbutton start) in after the vehicle has come to a automatically shift through all available the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate complete stop. gears. power windows, other controls, or move With Parking Sensor system: when MANUAL (M) the vehicle. the gear selector is shifted to the REVERSE (R) position with the ignition MANUAL (M) is the manual shift mode placed in the ON mode, the parking position. Gears can be shifted up or sensor system is activated and an down by operating the gear selector. audible sound is heard. (Refer to “Manual Shift Mode” paragraph in this section). 160 Shift-Lock System Shift Lock Override Warning! The shift-lock system prevents shifting If the gear selector will not move from out of PARK (P) unless the brake pedal PARK (P) using the proper shift is depressed. procedure, continue to press the brake Do not downshift for additional engine pedal and proceed as follows: braking on a slippery surface. The drive To shift from PARK (P): wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 1. Remove the shift lock override cover could skid, causing a collision or personal using a cloth wrapped flat head injury. 2. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN screwdriver. mode. 2. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool Active Adaptive Shift 3. Press and hold the lock-release into the Override Access Hole, and (AAS) button on the gear selector. push the override button down. Active Adaptive Shift (AAS) 4. Move the gear selector. automatically controls the transmission shift points to best suit the road When the ignition is in the ACC or OFF conditions and driver input. This mode, the gear selector cannot be improves driving feel. shifted from PARK (P). The transmission may switch to AAS The ignition cannot be placed in the mode when driving up and down OFF mode if the gear selector is not in slopes, cornering, driving at high PARK (P). elevations, or depressing the accelerator pedal quickly while the gear selector is in the DRIVE (D) position. 05210206-12A-002 Depending on the road and driving Shift Lock Override Access Hole conditions/vehicle operations, gear shifting could be delayed or not occur, 3. Push and hold the lock release however, this does not indicate a button on the gear selector and move problem because the AAS mode will the gear selector. maintain the optimum gear position. 4. Take the vehicle to your authorized dealer.

161 For Some Models To change to MANUAL (M) shift mode, Proceed as follows: shift the gear selector from DRIVE (D) to MANUAL (M). To return to automatic 1. Push the lock release button on the shift mode, shift the gear selector from gear selector while also pushing down MANUAL (M) to DRIVE (D). on the Shift Lock Override button. You can shift between DRIVE (D) and 2. Move the gear selector. MANUAL (M) mode at any time, without taking your foot off the accelerator. 3. Take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Note:

If you change to manual shift mode 05210207-12A-002 when the vehicle is stopped, the gear Instrument Panel will shift to M1. 1 — Manual Shift Mode Indication If you change to manual shift mode 2 — Gear Position Indication while the vehicle is moving it will remain in the current gear until a manual shift request is made. Manually Shifting Up/Down STARTING AND OPERATING To shift up to a higher gear, tap the Indicators gear selector rearward once (or tap the Manual Shift Mode Indication [+] shift paddle on the steering wheel, if 005210206-122-001 In manual shift mode, the “M” of the equipped). Shift Lock Override shift position indication in the To shift down to a lower gear, tap the Manual Shift Mode instrument panel illuminates. gear selector forward once (or tap the [-] shift paddle on the steering wheel, if The manual shift mode gives you the Gear Position Indication equipped). feel of driving a manual transmission The numeral for the selected gear vehicle by allowing you to operate the illuminates. Note: gear selector manually. If a requested downshift would This allows you to control engine rpm cause the engine to over-speed, that and torque to the drive wheels much shift will not occur. like a manual transmission when more control is desired. The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.

162 Do not drive the vehicle with the Driving Tips Climbing steep grades from a stop tachometer needle in the red zone Overtaking To climb a steep grade from a stopped while in manual shift mode. position: For extra power when passing another During deceleration, the vehicle or climbing steep grades, press 1. Press the brake pedal. transmission may automatically shift the accelerator fully. The transmission down depending on vehicle speed. will shift to a lower gear, depending on 2. Shift to DRIVE (D) or M1, depending vehicle speed. on the load weight and grade You can start out, from a stop, in steepness. first or second gear. Tapping the gear Note: selector rearward (+) (at a stop) will 3. Release the brake pedal while allow starting in second gear. Starting The accelerator pedal may initially gradually accelerating. out in second gear can be helpful in feel heavy as it is being pressed, then snowy or icy conditions. feel lighter as it is pressed further. This Descending steep grades change in pedal force controls whether When descending a steep grade, shift Paddle Mode — If or not kickdown should be performed. to lower gears, depending on load Equipped While the gear selector is in the weight and grade steepness. Tapping one of the steering MANUAL (M) position and the Dynamic Descend slowly, using the brakes only wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-), if Stability Control (DSC) is turned off, occasionally to prevent them from equipped, while the gear selector is in manual shift mode does not switch to overheating. DRIVE (D), will activate Paddle Mode (a automatic shift mode even if the temporary manual mode). The current accelerator pedal is completely gear will be displayed in the instrument pressed. Tap the gear selector forward cluster, with the "M" also illuminated. or rearward to select the appropriate The transmission will revert back to gear. normal operation (if the gear selector remains in DRIVE) after a period of time, depending on accelerator pedal activity. Note: Because Paddle mode is only temporary, use of the MANUAL (M) position is recommended if you need to drive the vehicle in a particular gear for long periods.

163 SPEED CONTROL Activation / Deactivation Speed Control Note: When the ignition is cycled OFF, This is an electronically controlled the system status before it was turned driving assistance feature that allows off is stored. For example, if the ignition the desired vehicle speed to be is cycled OFF while the Speed Control maintained, without having to press the is operating, the system will be accelerator pedal. operable when the ignition is cycled ON This feature can be used at a speed the next time. above 25 mph (40 km/h) on long Activating Speed Control stretches of dry, straight roads with few variations, such as highways. Push the ON button located on the right side of the steering wheel with the It is therefore not recommended to use other Speed Control buttons. The this feature on city roads with traffic, or warning light (amber) in the instrument in areas where the vehicle with stop cluster will illuminate. frequently. STARTING AND OPERATING Warning!

05100101-877-877AB Do not use Speed Control under the Speed Control Buttons following conditions: hilly terrain Warning! steep inclines heavy or unsteady traffic Leaving the Speed Control system on slippery or winding roads when not in use is dangerous. You could similar restrictions that require accidentally set the system or cause it to inconsistent speed go faster than you want. You could lose Using the Speed Control under the control and have an accident. Always leave following conditions is dangerous and the system off when you are not using it. could result in loss of vehicle control.

164 Deactivating Speed Control Note: The Speed Control setting The Speed Control will cancel if the Push the OFF/CAN button. The cannot be performed under the vehicle speed decreases below warning light (amber) in the following conditions: 16 mph (25 km/h) when climbing a steep incline. instrument cluster turns off. Automatic Transmission: the When A Speed Has Been Set:the gear selector is in the PARK or The Speed Control may cancel at warning light (green) in the NEUTRAL position. about 9 mph (15 km/h) below the instrument cluster is illuminated, push preset speed such as when climbing a Manual Transmission: the gear and hold the OFF/CAN button or push long, steep incline. the OFF/CAN button twice to selector is in the NEUTRAL position or The vehicle’s set speed is displayed in deactivate. when the clutch is disengaged (clutch is depressed). the instrument cluster. When A Speed Has Not Been Set: the warning light (amber) in the The parking brake is applied. Increasing Speed instrument cluster is illuminated, push Release the SET (-) button at the To increase speed using the Speed the OFF/CAN button to deactivate. desired speed, otherwise the speed will Control buttons: continue decreasing while the SET (-) Setting A Desired Speed Push the RES (+) button and hold it, button is pushed and held (except Proceed as follows: when the accelerator pedal is your vehicle will accelerate. Release the button at the desired speed. 1. Activate the Speed Control device depressed). by pushing the ON button. The cruise Note: Push the RES (+) button and release warning light (amber) illuminates. it immediately, to adjust the set speed. Release the SET (-) button at the Multiple pushes of the button will 2. Accelerate to the desired speed, desired speed, otherwise the speed increase the set speed according to the which must be more than 25 mph will continue decreasing while the SET (40 km/h). (-) button is pushed and held (except number of times it is pushed. 3. Set the Speed Control by pushing when the accelerator pedal is Increasing speed with a single RES the SET (-) button at the desired speed. depressed). (+) button operation: The Speed Control is set at the On a steep grade, the vehicle may If the instrument cluster display for moment the SET (-) button is pushed. momentarily slow down while vehicle speed is indicated in mph: Release the accelerator pedal ascending, or speed up while speed will increase in 1 mph simultaneously. The warning light descending. increments. (green) illuminates. If the instrument cluster display for vehicle speed is indicated in km/h: speed will increase in 1 km/h increments. 165 To increase speed using If the instrument cluster display for To temporarily cancel the system, use accelerator pedal: vehicle speed is indicated in km/h: the one of these methods: speed will decrease in 1 km/h Press the accelerator pedal to Slightly press the brake pedal. increments. accelerate to the desired speed. Press the clutch pedal (if equipped Push the SET (-) button and release it Resume Speed with a manual transmission). immediately. This new set speed will be If any other method besides the Push OFF/CAN button. saved. OFF/CAN button was used to cancel If the RES (+) button is pushed when Note: Accelerate the vehicle to speed cruising speed (such as applying the the vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) up temporarily with the accelerator brake pedal or pressing in the clutch or higher, the system reverts to the pedal when the Speed Control is on. pedal) and the system is still activated, previously set speed. Increasing the speed will not interfere the most recent set speed will with, or change the set speed. Take automatically resume when the RES (+) Note: If any of the following conditions your foot off the accelerator to return to button is pushed. occur, the Speed Control system is the set speed. If vehicle speed is below 25 mph temporarily canceled: (40 km/h), increase the vehicle speed Decreasing Speed The parking brake is applied. up to 16 mph (25 km/h) or more and

STARTING AND OPERATING To decrease speed using the Speed then push the RES (+) button. Automatic Transmission: the Control buttons: gear selector is in the PARK or Temporarily Canceling NEUTRAL position. Push the SET (-) button and hold it, The System the vehicle will gradually slow down. Manual Transmission: the gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position. Release the button at the desired Warning! speed. Automatic Transmission: the Speed Control cannot be canceled Push the SET (-) button and release Leaving the Speed Control system on while driving in manual mode (gear it immediately to adjust the set speed. when not in use is dangerous. You could selector shifted from D to M position). Multiple button pushes will decrease accidentally set the system or cause it to Therefore, engine braking will not be the set speed according to the number go faster than you want. You could lose applied even if the transmission is control and have an accident. Always leave shifted down to a lower gear. If of times it is pushed. the system OFF when you are not using it. deceleration is required, lower the set Decreasing speed with a single speed or press the brake pedal. SET (-) button operation: When the Speed Control system is If the instrument cluster display for temporarily canceled, the speed cannot vehicle speed is indicated in mph: the be reset. speed will decrease in 1 mph increments. 166 RADAR SENSORS — Vehicles are shipped with the direction of the radar sensors adjusted for each IF EQUIPPED Caution! vehicle to a loaded vehicle condition so Rear Radar Sensors that the radar sensors detect The following systems use the rear If the rear bumper receives a severe approaching vehicles correctly. If the radar sensors: impact, the system may no longer operate direction of the radar sensors has normally. Stop the system immediately and changed, contact an authorized dealer. Blind Spot Monitoring System (BSM) contact an authorized dealer. The radar sensors are regulated by the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) relevant radio wave laws of the country The radar sensors function by detecting The detection ability of the radar in which the vehicle is driven. If the the radio waves reflected off of a vehicle sensors has limitations. In the following vehicle is driven abroad, authorization approaching from the rear, or an cases, the detection ability may be from the country in which the vehicle is obstruction, sent from the radar sensor. decreased, and the system may not driven may be required. operate normally: The radar sensors are installed inside Note: the rear bumper, one each on the left The rear bumper near the radar For repairs or replacement of the and right sides. sensors has been damaged. radar sensors, bumper repairs, paint Snow, ice or mud has adhered to the work, or replacement near the radar radar sensors on the rear bumper. sensors, consult an authorized dealer. Operating in weather conditions such Turn off the radar system when as rain, snow and fog. pulling a trailer or while an accessory, Note: Under the following conditions, such as a bicycle carrier, is installed to the radar sensors cannot detect objects the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, the or it may be difficult to detect them: radio waves emitted by the radar will be blocked causing the system to not Stationary objects on a road or a operate normally. road side such as small, two-wheeled 07080915112112 vehicles, bicycles, pedestrians, Radar Sensor Locations animals, and shopping carts. Always keep the surface of the rear Vehicle shapes which do not reflect bumper near the radar sensors clean so radar waves well such as empty trailers that the radar sensors operate normally. with a low vehicle height and sports Also, do not apply items such as cars. stickers.

167 REAR PARK ASSIST The system is equipped with an assist The sensor area is frozen (operation — IF EQUIPPED device to notify the driver of the will return to normal when the ice is approximate distance from the vehicle thawed). Rear Park Assist to the surrounding obstruction using a The sensor is covered by a hand or audible alert. excessive force has been applied to Warning! the bumper. The vehicle is on a steep incline. Do not rely completely on the parking Under extremely hot or cold sensor system and be sure to confirm the weather conditions. safety around your vehicle visually when driving. This system can assist the driver in The vehicle is driven on bumps, operating the vehicle in the forward and inclines, gravel, or grass covered backward directions while parking. The roads. detection ranges of the sensors are limited, therefore, driving the vehicle while Anything which generates

relying only on the system may cause an 05200100-121-001 ultrasound is near the vehicle, such as accident. Always confirm the safety Parking Sensor Locations another vehicle's horn, the engine STARTING AND OPERATING around your vehicle visually when driving. sound of a motorcycle, the air brakes Note: Parking and other potentially dangerous of a large-sized vehicle, or another maneuvers are, however, always the Do not install any accessories within vehicle's sensors. driver’s responsibility. When performing the detection ranges of the sensors. It The vehicle is driven in heavy rain or these operations, always make sure that may affect the system operation. in road conditions causing water there are no other people (especially children) or animals on the route you want Depending on the type of splash. to drive into. The parking sensors are an obstruction and the surrounding A antenna for a radio transmitter is aid for the driver, but the driver must never conditions, the detection range of a installed to the vehicle. allow their attention to lapse during sensor may narrow, or the sensors potentially dangerous maneuvers, even may not be able to detect The vehicle is moving towards a tall those executed at low speeds. obstructions. or square curbstone. The system may not operate An obstruction is too close to the The Rear Park Assist System uses four normally under the following sensor. ultrasonic sensors (two rear sensors conditions: and two rear corner sensors) to detect obstructions around the vehicle while Mud, ice, or snow adhered to the parking the vehicle in a garage or sensor area (operation will return to during parallel parking when the gear normal when removed). selector is in REVERSE. 168 Obstructions under the bumper Note: The following types of Sensor Detection Range may not be detected. Obstructions obstructions may not be detected: The sensors detect obstructions within that are lower than the bumper or thin Thin objects such as wire or rope. the following range: which may have been initially detected but are no longer detected as the Things which absorb sonic waves Lateral Detection Range: vehicle approaches more closely. easily such as rain or snow. 22 inches (55 cm) Always have the system inspected Angular shaped objects. Rear Detection Range: 59 inches by an authorized dealer if any force is (150 cm) Very tall objects, and those which applied to the bumpers, even in a are wide at the top. minor accident. If the sensors have System Operation been repositioned in any way, they Small, short objects. The system is operational when the cannot detect obstructions. ignition is cycled ON and the gear selector is shifted to REVERSE. When The system may have a malfunction Caution! if the audible signal does not operate. an audible signal sounds, the system is Contact an authorized dealer. enabled for use. Only have repairs on the bumper in the The beeper which indicates a area of the sensors carried out by an system malfunction may not be heard authorized dealer. Repairs on the bumper if the ambient temperature is extremely that are not carried out properly may cold, or mud, ice, or snow adheres to compromise the operation of the parking the sensor area. Remove any foreign sensors. material from the sensor area. Only have the bumpers repainted or any When installing a trailer hitch, retouches to the paint work in the area of contact an authorized dealer. the sensors carried out by an authorized dealer. Incorrect paint application could affect the operation of the parking sensors.

169 Parking Sensor Audible Alert The audible alert will sound while the system is operating according to the following chart: Rear Sensor

Distance Between Vehicle And Distance Detection Area Audible Alert (*) Obstruction Farthest distance Approx. 59 - 23 inches (150 cm - 60 cm) Slow intermittent sound Far distance Approx. 23 -17 inches (60 - 45 cm) Medium intermittent sound Middle distance Approx. 17 -13 inches (45 - 35 cm) Fast intermittent sound Close distance Within approx. 13 inches (35 cm) Continuous sound (*) The rate at which the intermittent audible alert increases as the vehicle approaches the obstruction. Rear Corner Sensor

STARTING AND OPERATING Distance Between Vehicle And Distance Detection Area Audible Alert (**) Obstruction Far distance Approx. 22 - 14 inches (55 - 38 cm) Medium intermittent sound Middle distance Approx. 14 - 9.8 inches (38 - 25 cm) Fast intermittent sound Close distance Within approx. 9.8 inches (25 cm) Continuous sound (**) The rate at which the intermittent audible alert increases as the vehicle approaches the obstruction. Note: If an obstruction is detected in a zone for six seconds or more, the audible alert stops, unless the obstruction is within the close distance zone. If the same obstruction is detected in another zone, the corresponding audible alert is heard.

170 When A Warning Alert Is Activated The system notifies the driver of an obstacle by activating the audible alert.

Beep How To Check The system may have a malfunction. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as The audible alert is not heard. possible. When the engine is cycled ON, or if the parking sensor Remove any foreign material from the sensor area. If the system continues to sound detects a problem while driving, an intermittent audible the audible alert, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. alert is heard one to four times(*). ( * ) The number of times the audible alert is heard changes depending on the malfunction location.

171 PARKVIEW REAR When parking in REVERSE, take care over obstacles that may be above BACKUP CAMERA Warning! or under the camera’s display range. Operation When the display is cold, the The camera is located on the trunk lid, images could be more blurred than Always use extreme caution and verify above the license plate. usual, making it difficult to check the the real conditions of the area behind the vehicle. Backing up while looking only at conditions of the area around the the screen is dangerous and can lead to vehicle. Always use extreme caution an accident or collision with an object. The and verify the real conditions of the rear-view monitor is simply a system to aid area behind the vehicle with you own reversing. The view on the display can eyes. show a situation that differs from the real one. If water, snow, or mud is deposited on the camera lens, clean it with a soft Do not use the rear-view monitor under cloth. If this does not clean it, use a the following conditions: mild detergent. Roads covered in ice or snow. If the camera is subjected to abrupt When snow chains are mounted or the

STARTING AND OPERATING 07040110-124-008 temporary space saver spare wheel is Rear Camera Location temperature changes (from hot to cold or vice versa), the rear-view monitor fitted. Switching The Display To Rear View may not work properly. The rear trunk is not completely closed. Camera Mode: When replacing tires, contact an The vehicle is on a sloping road. Place the gear selector in the REVERSE authorized dealer. Replacing the tires position, after the ignition is cycled ON, Using the rear-view monitor under the can cause the guide lines that appear conditions listed above is dangerous and to switch the display to rear-view on the display to be misaligned. camera mode. can cause damage to persons and/or the vehicle. Note: When the gear selector is moved from the REVERSE position and put in any other position, the screen returns to the previous display mode.

172 Display Caution! Note: The images on the display can show a situation that differs from the actual view. Do not apply excessive force to the camera. You could alter the position and angle of the camera. Do not disassemble, modify or remove it as this could compromise the seal. The camera’s cover is made of plastic. Do not apply degreasers, organic solvents, wax or glass polish to the camera’s cover. If some substance ends up on the cover, clean it off immediately with a soft cloth. Do not rub the cover too much, nor polish it with abrasive compounds or hard 07080913987987 brushes. The cover could be damaged Camera View and create image problems. 1—BlockedArea If the vehicle has been involved in a 2 — Rear Bumper frontal, lateral or rear collision, the rear parking camera’s alignment (location or 07080913988988 installation angle) may have been altered. The field of view varies depending on Camera Field Of View Contact an authorized dealer. the vehicle and the road conditions. The field of view is limited. Objects below The distance displayed by the camera If the display shows "no video signal", the bumper or around it’s sides may not view differs from the actual view, as the there may be a problem with the camera. be displayed. rear parking camera is equipped with a Contact an authorized dealer. special lens. The camera could capture any non-standard accessories installed on the vehicle. Do not install non-standard accessories that could interfere with the camera’s view, such as lights or reflectors.

173 Note: If it is difficult to see the display Looking At The Display under the following conditions, it does The vehicle width guide lines are Warning! not mean that there is a malfunction: displayed on the screen as a reference In dark areas. to show the width of the vehicle compared to the width of the parking Drivers must be careful when backing up When the temperature around the space to be entered while in REVERSE. even when using the ParkView Rear Back lens is particularly high or low. Up Camera. Always check carefully behind Vehicle Width Guide Lines: these your vehicle, and be sure to check for When the camera is wet from rain guide lines serve as a reference pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, or due to a high atmospheric humidity. showing the width of the vehicle. obstructions, or blind spots before backing When there is some foreign deposit up. You are responsible for the safety of Distance Guide Lines: these lines your surroundings and must continue to around the camera, such as mud. indicate the approximate distance from pay attention while backing up. Failure to When the camera lens reflects the rear of the vehicle (the rear edge of do so can result in serious injury or death. sunlight or a headlight beam. the bumper). The red and yellow lines indicates the points at about 19 inches The image on the display may be Rear View Camera (50 cm), for the red line and 39 inches delayed if the temperature around the Operation (1 m) for the yellow line, from the rear

STARTING AND OPERATING camera is low. bumper (central point of each line). The operating modes of the rear view camera when the vehicle is in REVERSE vary depending on traffic, Caution! road, and vehicle conditions. Also, the amount of turning and the duration of To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView the maneuver vary depending on the should only be used as a parking aid. The conditions. Therefore, it is important to ParkView camera is unable to view every check the surrounding conditions and obstacle or object in your drive path. adapt the steering as necessary. To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle Note: The images from the rear must be driven slowly when using parking camera shown on the monitor ParkView to be able to stop in time when are reversed (mirror image). an obstacle is seen. It is recommended 07080913-111-111 that the driver look frequently over his/her Vehicle Width Guide Lines 1. Place the gear selector in the shoulder when using ParkView. REVERSE position to switch the display to rear view camera mode. 2. Check the surrounding conditions and begin backing up.

174 5. Once the guide lines are parallel, 6. When the gear selector is moved straighten the steering wheel and from the REVERSE position and put in reverse slowly into the parking space. any other position, the screen returns to Continue to check the vehicle’s the previous display mode. surroundings and stop in the best position possible. Note: Since there may be some differences between the displayed image and the real conditions, always visually inspect the area behind the vehicle, and the surrounding areas, to make sure they are completely clear. In the image of the parking space (or garage) shown above, the rear of the vehicle and the distance guide lines may seem parallel on the monitor, but may not be when the parked vehicle is inspected. When you enter a parking space

07080913989989 with a dividing line only on one side, Entering Parking Spot the dividing line and the vehicle width guide lines may appear parallel on the A — Rear Camera View monitor, but may not be when the B — Check Surrounding Area parked vehicle is inspected.

3. Once the vehicle starts to enter the 07080913990990 parking space, proceed slowly in Entering Parking Spot REVERSE while keeping the vehicle A — Rear Camera View width guide lines away from the two sides of the parking space. B — Check Surrounding Area 4. Continue to adjust the steering wheel until the vehicle width guide lines are parallel with the two sides of the parking space. 175 Road Conditions And When The Road Behind The Displayed Image Vehicle Slopes Steeply: There are some differences between When the vehicle is on a steep uphill what is shown on the display, and the (downhill) slope, the object on the actual road conditions. screen seems to be further away than it The different perceptions of distance really is. could lead to an accident. The conditions that can lead to the different perceptions of distance, listed below, must be taken into consideration: 07080913993993 When The Vehicle Slopes Due To Downgrade Camera Angle The Weight Of Passengers And Load: 1 — Distance Between The Vehicle And Object Displayed On The Screen When the vehicle is rear heavy, the 2 — Actual Distance Between The object on the screen seems to be Vehicle And Object further away than it really is. STARTING AND OPERATING 07080913992992 3 — Appears Closer Than Actual Downhill Camera Angle Distance 1 — Distance Between The Vehicle And 4—ObjectOnScreen Object Displayed On The Screen 5 — Object At Actual Position 2 — Actual Distance Between The Vehicle And Object Three Dimensional Object Behind 3 — Appears Farther Than Actual The Vehicle: Distance Since the distance guide line display is 4 — Object At Actual Position based on a flat surface, the distance to 5 — Object On Screen a three dimensional object on the 07080913991991 screen differs from the actual distance. Loaded Vehicle Camera Angle 1 — Object 2 — Variance

176 Adjusting The Image Quality Warning! The image quality can be adjusted with the gear selector in the REVERSE position. Adjusting the rear-view camera image quality must always be done when the Four adjustments can be made: vehicle is stationary. Do not adjust the brightness, contrast, tint and color. Give rear-view camera image quality while attention to the vehicle’s surroundings vehicle driving. Adjusting the image quality while making adjustments: (brightness, contrast, color and tint) of the rear-view camera while driving the vehicle 1. Select the icon on the top left of the is dangerous since it could distract the screen to display the tabs. driver and cause a serious accident. 2. Select the desired tab. 3. Use the cursor to adjust the brightness, contrast, tint and color. If a reset is needed, press the reset button. 4. Select the icon on the top left of the screen to close the tabs.

07080913994994 Three-Dimensional Object Camera View A — Object In View B — Actual Distance To Object C — Appears Farther Than Actual

07080914-111-111 Image Quality Adjustments

177 REFUELING THE knocking sound, see your authorized Reformulated Gasoline dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with VEHICLE Many areas of the country require the an octane number lower than 87 can use of cleaner burning gasoline referred Refueling The Vehicle cause engine failure and may void or to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. not be covered by the New Vehicle Stop the engine before refueling. Reformulated gasoline contains Limited Warranty. Poor quality gasoline oxygenates and are specifically blended Fuel Requirements can cause problems such as hard to reduce vehicle emissions and Vehicles with catalytic converters or starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you improve air quality. oxygen sensors must use ONLY experience these symptoms, try UNLEADED FUEL, which will reduce another brand of gasoline before The use of reformulated gasoline is exhaust emissions and keep spark plug considering service for the vehicle. recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide fouling to a minimum. Gasoline blended with oxygenates such improved performance and durability of Fuel: Premium unleaded fuel. as alcohol or ether compounds are engine and fuel system components. Octane Rating generally referred to as oxygenated (Anti-knock index): 91 fuels. Gasoline/Oxygenate (R + M)/2 method or The common gasoline blend that can Blends above (96 RON or be used with your vehicle is ethanol Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded STARTING AND OPERATING above) (U.S. federal blended at no more than 15%. Gasoline gasoline with oxygenates such as law requires that containing alcohol, such as ethanol or ethanol. octane ratings be methanol, may be marketed under the posted on gasoline station pumps). name "Gasohol". Regular unleaded fuel with an octane Vehicle damage and problems resulting Caution! rating from 87 to 90 (91 to 95 RON) can from the use of the following may not be used, but this will reduce be covered by the New Vehicle Limited DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing performance slightly, such as reduced Warranty: methanol, or gasoline containing more than engine output, and engine knocking. Alcohol containing more than 15% 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability Fuel with a rating lower than 87 octane ethanol. (91 RON) will negatively affect the problems, damage critical fuel system emission control system performance Gasoline or alcohol containing components, cause emissions to exceed and could also cause engine knocking methanol. the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. and serious engine damage. Leaded fuel or leaded alcohol. Please observe pump labels as they While operating on gasoline with an should clearly communicate if a fuel octane number of 87, hearing a light contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15). knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy 178 Problems that result from using number without MMT. Gasoline blended active solvents or similar ingredients. gasoline containing more than 15% with MMT reduces spark plug life and These can harm fuel system gasket and ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing reduces emissions system performance diaphragm materials. methanol are not the responsibility of in some vehicles. The manufacturer Fuel System Cautions the manufacturer and may void or not recommends that gasoline without be covered under New Vehicle Limited MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT Warranty. content of gasoline may not be Caution! indicated on the gasoline pump; Do Not Use E-85 In therefore, you should ask your gasoline Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles retailer whether the gasoline contains Follow these guidelines to maintain your Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and vehicle’s performance: compatible with gasoline containing up California reformulated gasoline. The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline Materials Added To Fuel impair engine performance and damage with higher ethanol content may void the emissions control system. the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Besides using unleaded gasoline with If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently the proper octane rating, gasolines that An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. catalytic converter to overheat. If you have some or all of these symptoms: notice a pungent burning odor or some Using gasolines that have these Operate in a lean mode. light smoke, your engine may be out of additives will help improve fuel tune or malfunctioning and may require OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” economy, reduce emissions, and immediate service. Contact an authorized on. maintain vehicle performance. dealer for service assistance. Designated TOP TIER Poor engine performance. The use of fuel additives, which are now Detergent Gasoline being sold as octane enhancers, is not Poor cold start and cold drivability. contains a higher level recommended. Most of these products of detergents to further Increased risk for fuel system contain high concentrations of methanol. aide in minimizing Fuel system damage or vehicle component corrosion. engine and fuel system performance problems resulting from the MMT In Gasoline deposits. When use of such fuels or additives is not the available, the usage of TOP TIER responsibility of the manufacturer and may Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Detergent gasoline is recommended. void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese- Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of containing metallic additive that is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. blended into some gasoline to increase Indiscriminate use of fuel system Note: Intentional tampering with the octane. Gasoline blended with MMT cleaning agents should be avoided. emissions control system can result in provides no performance advantage Many of these materials intended for civil penalties being assessed against beyond gasoline of the same octane gum and varnish removal may contain you. 179 Carbon Monoxide Refueling Procedure Note: Warnings Fuel Filler Door Make sure to lock both the doors Note: Always use only a designated when leaving the vehicle. Warning! FCA fuel filler cap or an approved Lock the doors after closing the fuel equivalent, available at your authorized filler door. If the fuel filler door is closed dealer. The wrong cap can result in a Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is after locking the doors, the fuel filler deadly. Follow the precautions below to serious malfunction of the fuel and door cannot be locked. prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: emission control systems. Do not inhale exhaust gases. They When the fuel filler door end is pressed Fuel Filler Cap contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and with the doors unlocked, the fuel filler To remove the fuel filler cap, turn it odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the door rises. counterclockwise. Attach the removed engine in a closed area, such as a garage, cap to the inner side of the fuel filler and never sit in a parked vehicle with the door. engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to

STARTING AND OPERATING force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. 04040201-12A-002 Fuel Filler Door 04040202-12A-001 The fuel filler door operates in Fuel Filler Cap conjunction with the door locking/unlocking mechanism. To close the fuel filler cap, turn it To close, press the fuel filler door until a clockwise until a click is heard. click sound is heard.

180 Emergency Fuel Filler 2. Partially peel back the cover inside Door Release the trunk, then pull the emergency Warning! release lever. If the battery is discharged, the fuel filler door cannot be opened. In this case, Never have any smoking materials lit in the fuel filler door can be opened by or near the vehicle when the gas cap is taking care of the discharged battery removed or the tank is being filled. situation. Never add fuel when the engine is If the fuel filler door cannot be opened running. This is in violation of most state even if the discharged battery situation and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on. has been resolved, the electrical system may have a malfunction. A fire may result if gasoline is pumped In this case, the fuel filler door can be into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always opened using the following procedure place gas containers on the ground while as an emergency measure: 08100100-122-001 Fuel Door Emergency Release filling. 1. Open the trunk and pull the center Do not apply any object/plug to the end section of the plastic fastener and 3 — Emergency Release Lever of the filler which is not provided for the remove the fastener. vehicle. The use of non-compliant objects/plugs could cause a pressure increase inside the tank, resulting in dangerous situations. Do not use a mobile phone near the refueling pump: risk of fire.

08100100-121-002 Trunk Interior 1 — Plastic Fasteners 2 — Cover

181 VEHICLE LOADING Gross Axle Weight Rating Inflation Pressure Certification Label (GAWR) This is the cold tire inflation pressure for As required by National Highway Traffic The GAWR is the maximum permissible your vehicle for all loading conditions up Safety Administration regulations, your load on the front and rear axles. The to full GAWR. vehicle has a certification label affixed to load must be distributed in the cargo Curb Weight the driver's side door or pillar. area so that the GAWR of each axle is This label contains the month and year not exceeded. The curb weight of a vehicle is defined of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Each axle GAWR is determined by the as the total weight of the vehicle with all Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight components in the system with the fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and lowest load carrying capacity (axle, capacity conditions, and with no Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles occupants or cargo loaded into the A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is or suspension components sometimes vehicle. The front and rear curb weight included on this label and indicates the specified by purchasers for increased values are determined by weighing your Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. durability does not necessarily increase vehicle on a commercial scale before The bar code that appears on the the vehicle's GVWR. any occupants or cargo are added. bottom of the label is your VIN. Tire Size Loading STARTING AND OPERATING Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The tire size on the Vehicle Certification The actual total weight and the weight (GVWR) Label represents the actual tire size on of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by The GVWR is the total permissible your vehicle. Replacement tires must be weighing it when it is loaded and ready weight of your vehicle including driver, equal to the load capacity of this tire for operation. passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. size. The entire vehicle should first be The label also specifies maximum Rim Size capacities of front and rear axle weighed on a commercial scale to systems (GAWR). Total load must be This is the rim size that is appropriate insure that the GVWR has not been limited so GVWR and front and rear for the tire size listed. exceeded. The weight on the front and GAWR are not exceeded. rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that Payload the load is properly distributed over the The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.

182 front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle TOWING TRAILERS DRIVING TIPS may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded Trailer Towing Engine Break-In Recommendation but the total load is within the specified Your car is not designed for towing. GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted No special break-in is necessary, but a Recreational Towing from front to rear or rear to front as few precautions in the first 620 miles appropriate until the specified weight An example of "recreational towing" is (1000 km) may add to the performance, limitations are met. Store the heavier towing your vehicle behind a economy, and life of the vehicle: items down low and be sure that the motorhome. Do not race the engine. weight is distributed equally. Stow all The transmission is not designed for loose items securely before driving. towing this vehicle on all four wheels. Do not maintain one constant speed, Improper weight distributions can have either slow or fast, for a long period of an adverse effect on the way your time. Caution! vehicle steers and handles and the way Do not drive constantly at full-throttle the brakes operate. or high engine rpm for extended DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to periods of time. Caution! the drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires towing, make sure the drive Avoid unnecessary hard stops. wheels are OFF the ground. Avoid full-throttle starts. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than Towing this vehicle in violation of the the GVWR or the maximum front and rear above requirements can cause severe Saving Fuel And GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can transmission damage. Damage from Protection Of The break, or it can change the way your improper towing is not covered under the Environment vehicle handles. This could cause you to New Vehicle Limited Warranty. lose control. Also overloading can shorten How you operate your vehicle the life of your vehicle. determines how far it will travel on a tank of fuel. Use these suggestions to help save fuel

and reduce CO 2: Avoid long warm-ups. Once the engine runs smoothly, begin driving. Avoid fast starts. Drive at lower speeds. Anticipate when to apply the brakes (avoid sudden braking). 183 Follow the maintenance schedule For more traction in starting on and contact your authorized dealer. slippery surfaces such as ice or packed Warning! snow, use sand, rock salt, chains, Use the air conditioner only when carpeting, or other nonslip material necessary. under the rear wheels. An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or Slow down on rough roads. Note: Use snow chains only on the stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat rear wheels. fasteners may cause your floor mat to Keep the tires properly inflated. interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch Do not carry unnecessary weight. Floor Mat Safety pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To Information prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: Do not rest your foot on the brake ALWAYS securely attach your floor pedal while driving. Always use floor mats designed to fit mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT the footwell of your vehicle. Use only install your floor mat upside down or turn Keep the wheels in correct floor mats that leave the pedal area your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm alignment. unobstructed and that are firmly mat is secured using the floor mat Keep windows closed at high secured so that they cannot slip out of fasteners on a regular basis. speeds. position and interfere with the pedals or ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING impair safe operation of your vehicle in FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE

STARTING AND OPERATING Slow down when driving in other ways. before installing any other floor mat. crosswinds and headwinds. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. Hazardous Driving ONLY install floor mats designed to fit When driving on ice or in water, snow, your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that mud, sand, or similar hazards: cannot be properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be Be cautious and allow extra distance replaced, only use a FCA approved floor for braking. mat for the specific make, model, and year Avoid sudden braking and sudden of your vehicle. maneuvering. ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s side floor area. To check for Do not pump the brakes. Continue to 04090400-USA-001 interference, with the vehicle properly parked press down on the brake pedal. Floor Mat Retention Post Location with the engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if If you get stuck, select a lower gear present) to check for interference. If your floor and accelerate slowly. Do not spin the mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, rear wheels. or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk. 184 ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat Winter Driving on the passenger’s side floor area. Warning! Carry emergency gear, including tire ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall chains, window scraper, flares, a small or slide into the driver’s side floor area shovel, jumper leads, and a small bag when the vehicle is moving. Objects can Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. of sand or salt. become trapped under accelerator, brake, Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even Contact an authorized dealer to check or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of the following: vehicle control. failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin Have the proper ratio of antifreeze in NEVER place any objects under the floor your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds the radiator. objects could change the position of the continuously without stopping when you Inspect the battery and its leads. floor mat and may cause interference with are stuck and do not let anyone near a Cold reduces battery capacity. the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. If the vehicle carpet has been removed Use an engine oil appropriate for the and re-installed, always properly attach lowest ambient temperatures that the carpet to the floor and check the floor mat Caution! vehicle will be driven in. fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for Inspect the ignition system for interference with the accelerator, brake, or When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by damage and loose connections. clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do Use winter windshield washer fluid not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph It is recommended to only use mild soap that will not freeze. (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. and water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check your floor mat has Revving the engine or spinning the Note: been properly installed and is secured to wheels too fast may lead to transmission your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners Remove snow before driving. Snow overheating and failure. It can also damage left on the windshield is dangerous as by lightly pulling mat. the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no it could obstruct vision. transmission shifting occurring). Rocking The Vehicle Drive slowly. Braking performance can be adversely affected if snow or Note: Too much rocking may cause ice adheres to the brake components. engine overheating, transmission failure, If this situation occurs, drive the vehicle and tire damage. slowly, releasing the accelerator pedal If you must rock the vehicle to free it and lightly applying the brakes several from snow, sand or mud, depress the times until the brake performance accelerator slightly and slowly move the returns to normal. gear selector from 1 (D) to R. 185 Do not open or close the soft top when Install the chains on the rear tires only. the temperature is 41 °F (5 °C) or less. Do not use chains on the front tires. Caution! The material of the soft top could be damaged by freezing. Note: Do not apply excessive force to a Chains may affect handling. To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: window scraper when removing ice or Do not go faster than 30 mph Because of restricted traction device frozen snow on the mirror glass and (50 km/h) or the chain manufacturer's windshield. clearance between tires and other recommended limit, whichever is lower. suspension components, it is important Never use warm or hot water for that only traction devices in good condition removing snow or ice from windows Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes, and sharp turns. are used. Broken devices can cause andmirrorsasitcouldresultinthe serious damage. Stop the vehicle glass cracking. Avoid locked-wheel braking. immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the Snow Tires Do not use chains on roads that are damaged parts of the device before further If your vehicle is equipped with the tire free of snow or ice. The tires and use. pressure monitoring system (vehicle chains could be damaged. with run-flat tires), the system may not Install device as tightly as possible and Chains may scratch or chip then retighten after driving about ½ mile

STARTING AND OPERATING function correctly when using tires with aluminium wheels. (0.8 km). steel wire reinforcement in the sidewalls. Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). Use Snow Tires on all Four Wheels: Warning! Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns Do not exceed the maximum and large bumps, especially with a loaded permissible speed for your snow tires or vehicle. legal speed limits. Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Do not drive for a prolonged period on When snow tires are used, select the Snow) between front and rear axles can dry pavement. specified size and pressure. cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision. Observe the traction device Tire Chains manufacturer’s instructions on the method Check local regulations before using tire of installation, operating speed, and chains. conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device If your vehicle is equipped with the manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph TPMS system, the system may not (48 km/h). function correctly when using tire chains. Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

186 Driving In Flooded Area Overloading Note: Do not drive the vehicle on Caution! Note: Be careful not to overload your flooded roads as it could cause short vehicle. The gross axle weight rating circuit of electrical/electronic parts, or (GAWR) and the gross vehicle weight water enters the engine and causes it Always check the depth of the standing rating (GVWR) of the vehicle are on the to lock up (hydro-lock) and stall. If the water before driving through it. Never drive Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label on vehicle has been immersed in water through standing water that is deeper than the driver's door frame. Exceeding contact your authorized dealer. the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the these ratings can cause an accident or vehicle. vehicle damage. You can estimate the Although your vehicle is capable of weight of the load by weighing the driving through shallow standing water, Determine the condition of the road or items (or people) before putting them in consider the following Cautions and the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving the vehicle. Warnings before doing so. through the standing water. Driving On Uneven Road Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when Your vehicle's suspension and Warning! driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. underbody can be damaged if driven on rough/uneven roads or over speed Driving through standing water may bumps at excessive speeds. Driving through standing water limits cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not components. Always inspect your vehicle’s Use care and reduce speed when exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, traveling on rough/uneven roads or over through standing water. etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid speed bumps. Driving through standing water limits that is milky or foamy in appearance) after Use care not to damage the vehicle's your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which driving through standing water. Do not underbody, bumpers or muffler(s) when increases stopping distances. Therefore, continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid driving under the following conditions: after driving through standing water, drive appears contaminated, as this may result slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal in further damage. Such damage is not Ascending or descending a slope several times to dry the brakes. covered by the New Vehicle Limited with a sharp transition angle. Warranty. Failure to follow these warnings may Ascending or descending a driveway result in injuries that are serious or fatal to Getting water inside your vehicle’s or trailer ramp with a sharp transition you, your passengers, and others around engine can cause it to lock up and stall angle. you. out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

187 This vehicle is equipped with low profile tires allowing class-leading performance and handling. As a result, the sidewall of the tires are very thin and the tires and wheels can be damaged if driven through potholes or on rough/uneven roads at excessive speeds. Use care and reduce speed when traveling on rough/uneven roads or through potholes. STARTING AND OPERATING

188 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS . . . .190 REPLACING A BULB ...... 190 REPLACING FUSES ...... 200 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . .209 TIRE SERVICE KIT ...... 214 JUMPSTARTING...... 223 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . .225 TOWINGTHEVEHICLE...... 226 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) ...... 228 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . .229

189 HAZARD WARNING off to warn oncoming traffic of an REPLACING A BULB LIGHTS emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning General Instructions Control Lights. The hazard warning indicator The Hazard Warning Lights should lights in the instrument cluster will flash Warning! always be used when you stop on or simultaneously. near a roadway in an emergency. Note: Before proceeding with the replacement The Hazard Warning Light switch is The turn signals do not work while of the lamp wait until the exhaust pipes are located on the center instrument panel cool: DANGER OF BURNS! below the radio. Push the switch to turn the Hazard Warning Lights are theHazardWarningLightsonoroff. activated. Modifications or repair of the electrical system performed incorrectly and without Note: The Hazard Warning Lights warn Check local regulations about the taking into account the technical other drivers that your vehicle is a traffic use of Hazard Warning Lights while the characteristics can cause malfunctions hazard and that they must take extreme vehicle is being towed to verify that it is with the risk of fire. caution when near it. not in violation of the law. Halogen lamps contain gas under

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY If the brake pedal is pressed while pressure, in the event of breakage be driving on slippery roads, the careful of the projection of fragments of emergency stop signal system could glass. operate causing all of the directional Halogen lamps must be handled by turn signals to flash. touching only the metallic part. If the transparent bulb is in contact with the While the emergency stop signal fingers, reduces the intensity of the system is operating, all of the emitted light and you can also affect the directional turn signals automatically life of the lamp. In case of accidental flash rapidly to caution the driver of a contact, rub the bulb with a cloth vehicle following behind of a sudden dampened with alcohol and allow to dry. 05031100-L12A braking situation. Hazard Warning Light Switch Before replacing a bulb check the contacts for oxidation. When the switch is pushed, the Hazard Warning Lights are active and all Replace blown bulbs with others of directional turn signals will flash on and the same type and power.

190 After replacing a headlight bulb, When the weather is cold or damp always check its alignment. or after heavy rain or washing, the surface of headlights or rear lights may To replace the bulb, contact your steam up and/or form drops of authorized dealer. condensation on the inside. This is a When a light is not working, check natural phenomenon due to the that the corresponding fuse is intact difference in temperature and humidity before replacing the bulb. For the between the inside and the outside of location of fuses, refer to the section on the glass which does not indicate a “Replacing Fuses” in this chapter. fault and does not compromise the normal operation of lighting devices. The mist disappears quickly when the Caution! lights are turned on, starting from the center of the diffuser, extending Use the protective cover and carton for the progressively towards the edges. replacement bulb to dispose of the old bulb promptly and out of the reach of children.

Note: When removing the lens or light unit using a flathead screwdriver, make sure that the flathead screwdriver does not contact the interior terminal. If the flathead screwdriver contacts the terminal, a short circuit may occur.

191 Replacement Bulbs

Light Bulbs Type Power Front Position LED – Front Side-Maker Lights (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) W5W 5 W Front Positions/Side-Maker Lights (If Equipped With Halogen Headlights) WY5W 5 W High Beam (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) LED – High Beam/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (If Equipped With Halogen Headlights) HB3 60 W Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) LED – Low Beam (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) LED – Low Beam (If Equipped With Halogen Headlights) H11 55 W IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Front Direction Indicator Light WY21W 21 W Side Direction Indicator Light WY5W 5 W Fog Light H11 55 W Rear Position Lights LED – Stop Lights LED – Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED – Rear Direction Indicator Light WY21W 21 W Rear Side Marker W5W 5 W Reverse Light W21W 21 W License Plate Light W5W 5 W Overhead Light 10 W Trunk Lid Light 5W

192 Light Bulbs Rear Lights 3. Remove the fasteners in the seven locations and partially peel back the Front Lights The bulbs are arranged as follows : mud guard. The bulbs are arranged as follows :

04110102-L40-010 Rear Lights 08020499000002 04110102-L38-008 Mud Guard Head Lights 4 — Side Marker — If Equipped 5 — Position Light/Stop Light/Rear Di- 1 — Fasteners 1 — High Beam with Daytime Running 2 — Mud Guard Lights (DRL)/Position Light/Low Beam/ rection Indicator Light Side Marker 6 — Reverse Light — If Equipped 2 — Front Indicator Light 7 — Third Stop Light 4. Turn the cover counterclockwise and 3 — Fog Light remove it, disconnect the connector from the unit by pressing the tab on the Replacing Exterior connector with your finger and pulling Lights the connector. Headlights (low beam) 5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly (If Equipped with halogen bulb) counterclockwise and remove it. Proceed as follows: 6. Disconnect the bulb from the 1. If you are changing the right bulb, socket. start the engine, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right, and turn off 7. Install the new bulb in the reverse engine. If you are changing the left bulb, order of the removal procedure. turn the steering wheel to the left. 2. Make sure the ignition is placed in the OFF mode, and the headlight switch is off. 193 Headlights (High Beam) With Daytime Running Lights (If Equipped With LED Lamps) Proceed as follows: 1. If you are changing the right bulb, start the engine, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right, and turn off engine. If you are changing the left bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left.

2. Make sure the ignition is placed in 07031501206002 the OFF mode, and the headlight Mud Guard switch is off. Front Direction Indicator Lights 3. Remove the fasteners in the seven Proceed as follows: locations and partially peel back the IN CASE OF EMERGENCY mud guard. 1. If you are changing the right bulb, start the engine, turn the steering wheel 4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly all the way to the right, and turn off counterclockwise and remove it. engine. If you are changing the left bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. 5. Turn the cover counterclockwise and 08020499000010 remove it, disconnect the connector Head Lamp Assembly 2. Make sure the ignition is placed in from the unit by pressing the tab on the the OFF mode, and the headlight connector with your finger and pulling 1 — High Beam Lamp switch is off. the connector. 2 — Position Lamp 3 — Daytime Running Lamp 3. Remove the fasteners in the five 6. Turn the socket and bulb assembly locations and partially peel back the counterclockwise and remove it. mud guard. 7. Disconnect the bulb from the 4. Disconnect the connector from the socket. unit by pressing the tab on the connector with your finger and pulling 8. Install the new bulb in the reverse the connector rearward. order of the removal procedure. 5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly counterclockwise and remove it.

194 Fog Lights Side Direction Indicator Lights Proceed as follows: Proceed as follows: 1. If you are changing the right bulb, 1. Make sure the ignition is placed in start the engine, turn the steering wheel the OFF mode, and the headlight all the way to the right, and turn off switch is off. engine. If you are changing the left bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. 2. If you are changing the right bulb, start the engine, turn the steering wheel 2. Make sure the ignition is switched all the way to the right, and turn off off, and the headlight switch is off. engine. If you are changing the left bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. 07031501-207-001 3. Remove the fasteners in the five Front Direction Indicator Housing locations and partially peel back the 3. Remove the fasteners in the five 1 — Socket Assembly mud guard. locations and partially peel back the 2 — Bulb mud guard. 4. Disconnect the connector from the unit by pressing the tab on the 4. Disconnect the electrical connector 6. Disconnect the bulb from the connector with your finger and pulling from the bulb by pressing the tab on socket. the connector. the connector with your finger and pulling the connector. 5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly counterclockwise, extract the bulb and 5. Remove the lens assembly by remove it. pressing the tab on the unit with your finger and pulling the unit forward to 6. Disconnect the bulb from the compress in the internal catch, then pull socket. the cluster outwards. 7. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure. Brake lights / Tail lights

07031501208002 Go to your authorized dealer when the Direction Indicator Lamp Connector replacement of this lights is necessary. 7. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure.

195 6. Lift up the lens assembly, and then 2. Turn the socket counterclockwise, remove the cluster and install the new remove socket assembly then remove side direction indicator lens assembly in the bulb. the reverse order of the removal procedure.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 08020499000011 Side Direction Indicator 1 — Fasteners

07031501211001 Side Direction Indicator 3 — Internal Catch 4 — Lens Assembly 08070604-123-100 Front Side Marker

Front Side Marker 1 — Socket 2 — Bulb Assembly (If Equipped With Halogen Bulb) Proceed as follows: 3. Install the new bulb in the reverse 1. Remove the fasteners in the seven 07031501210001 order of the removal procedure. Side Direction Indicator locations and partially peel back the upper side of the mud guard. 2 — Lens Assembly

196 Rear Direction Indicator Lights Proceed as follows: 1. Remove the retainers and the trunk lid end trim.

07031501214002 07031501-215-001 Trunk Trim Taillight Housing Fasteners 2 — Connector 4 — Screw 5 — Nuts 2. Disconnect the connector from the unit by pressing the tab on the 4. Pull the taillight housing rearward to connector with your finger. remove it.

07031501-212-002 Trunk Trim 1 — Retainers

07031501213002 07031501-216-001 Rear Direction Indicator Socket Rear of Vehicle 3 — Connector 6 — Taillight Housing

3. Remove the screw and nuts.

197 5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly Reverse Light Rear Side Marker counterclockwise to remove from Proceed as follows: Proceed as follows: taillight housing, and remove bulb. 1. Make sure the ignition is placed in 1. Push the lens assembly rearward to the OFF mode, and the headlight compress the internal catch, then pull switch is off. the lens assembly outwards. 2. Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise to remove, and remove bulb.

07031501-203-002 Taillight Housing

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 7 — Socket and Bulb Assembly 08070605-123-100 Rear Side Marker 6. Install the new bulb in the reverse 1 — Rear Side Marker Lens Assembly order of the removal procedure. 07031501-219-001 Reverse Light 2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly 1 — Socket Assembly counterclockwise to remove, and 2 — Bulb remove bulb.

3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure.

198 License Plate Lights 3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly Proceed as follows: counterclockwise and remove, remove bulb. 1. Make sure the ignition is placed in the OFF mode, and the headlight switch is off. 2. Slide the unit as shown in the figure to remove it.

07031501-221-001 License Plate Light Housing 2 — Socket and Bulb Assembly

4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure. Insert 08070606-123-100 catch and push the housing back into Side Marker Housing place. 2 — Socket and Bulb Assembly

3. Install the new bulb and then reinstall the socket in the reverse order of the removal procedure.

07031501220001 Trunk Lid 1 — License Plate Light Assembly

199 Replacing Interior Light REPLACING FUSES Bulbs General Information Overhead Light Proceed as follows: Warning! 1. Using a suitable tool to prevent damage to the lens, remove the overhead light by carefully prying on the When replacing a blown fuse, always edge of the lens. use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of 07031502-202-001 higher amp rating. Never replace a blown Trunk Light fuse with metal wires or any other material. 1 — Trunk Light Lens Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 2. Disconnect the connector from the trunk light lens. Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. 07031502-201-001 Overhead Light Location If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. 1 — Overhead Light Lens If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), 2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out. power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system 3. Install the new bulb in the reverse blows, contact an authorized dealer. order of the removal procedure. 07031502-203-001 Trunk Light Trunk Light Housing Your vehicle's electrical system is protected by fuses. Proceed as follows: 2 — Connector If any lights, accessories, or controls do 1. Using a suitable tool to prevent not work, inspect the appropriate circuit damage to the lens, remove the trunk 3. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out. protector. If a fuse has blown, the inside light lens by carefully prying on the edge element will be melted. If the same fuse 4. Install the new bulb in the reverse of the lens. blows again, go to an authorized dealer order of the removal procedure. as soon as possible. 200 Fuse location 3. Press retaining clip and remove Fuses are grouped together in two fuse protection cover. boxes located in the interior on the left 4. Pull the fuse straight out with the side of the vehicle and under the hood. fuse puller provided on the fuse block Interior Fuses located in the engine compartment. If the electrical system does not work, first inspect the fuses on the vehicle's left side. Proceed as follows: 1. Make sure the ignition is placed in 07031601-ALL-001 Fuses the OFF mode, and other switches are turned off. 1 — Normal Fuse 2 — Blown Fuse 2. Open the fuse panel cover (located near the door). 07031601-122-001 Fuse Puller 6. Insert a new fuse of the same amperage rating, and make sure it fits 5. Inspect the fuse and replace it if it is tightly. If it does not fit tightly, contact blown. your authorized dealer. If you have no spare fuses, borrow one of the same rating from a circuit not essential to vehicle operation, such as the audio or outlet circuit. 7. Reinstall the cover and make sure that it is securely installed. 07031601-121-001 Fuse Panel Cover Note: Always replace a fuse with a genuine FCA fuse or equivalent of the same rating. Otherwise you may damage the electric system.

201 Underhood Fuses 2. Remove the front tab while slightly lifting the front of the cover. If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses 3. Remove the cover while lifting it and in the cabin are normal, inspect the fuse sliding it to the rear. block in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced. 4. If any fuse but the main fuse is blown, replace it with a new one of the Make sure the ignition is placed in the same amperage rating. OFF mode, and other switches are turned off and remove the fuse block cover. If the lock is forcefully opened, the fuse block cover may come in contact with the frame when it is removed and become scratched. When removing the cover, remove it slowly according to the following

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY procedure: 1. Disengage the rear lock by pressing down on the front tab with your fingers. 07031601-ALL-002AB Fuse 1 — Normal Fuse 2 — Blown Fuse

5. Reinstall the cover and make sure that it is securely installed.

07031601-123-001 Underhood Fuse Block 1 — Lock 2 — Cover

202 Fuse Block (Engine Compartment)

07031602-121-001

203 DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT F01 ENG IG3 5 A Engine Control Systems F02 ENG IG2 5 A Engine Control Systems F03 HORN2 7.5 A Horn F04 C/U IG1 15 A For Protection Of Various Circuits F05 ENG IG1 7.5 A Engine Control System F06 — — — F07 INTERIOR 15 A Overhead Light F08 — — — F09 AUDIO2 15 A Audio System

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY F10 METER1 10 A Instrument Cluster F11 SRS1 7.5 A Air Bag F12 — — — F13 RADIO 7.5 A Audio System F14 ENGINE3 20 A Engine Control System F15 ENGINE1 10 A Engine Control System F16 ENGINE2 15 A Engine Control System F17 AUDIO1 25 A Audio System F18 A/C MAG 7.5 A Air Conditioner F19 AT PUMP H/L HI 20 A Transmission Control System (If Equipped) F20 AT 15 A Transmission Control System (If Equipped) F21 D LOCK 25 A Power Door Locks F22 H/L RH 20 A Headlight (RH) F23 ENG + B2 7.5 A Engine Control System 204 DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT F24 TAIL 20 A Taillights/Number Plate Lights/Position Lights F25 — — — F26 ROOM 25 A Overhead Light F27 FOG 15 A Fog Lights F28 H/CLEAN 20 A Headlight Washer (If Equipped) F29 STOP 10 A Stop Lights/Rear Fog Light (If Equipped) F30 HORN 15 A Horn F31 H/L LH 20 A Headlight (LH) F32 ABS/DSC S 30 A ABS/DSC System F33 HAZARD 15 A Hazard Warning Flashers/Direction Indicators Lights F34 FUEL PUMP 15 A Fuel System F35 ENG + B3 5 A Engine Control System F36 WIPER 20 A Windshield Wipers F37 CABIN + B 50 A For Protection Of Various Circuits F38 — — — F39 — — — F40 ABS/DSC M 50 A ABS/DSC System F41 EVVT A/R PUMP 20 A Engine Control System F42 — — — F43 — — — F44 FAN2 40 A Cooling Fan F45 ENG.MAIN 40 A Engine Control System F46 EPS 60 A Power Steering System 205 DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT F47 DEFOG 30 A Rear Window Defogger F48 IG2 30 A For Protection Of Various Circuits F49 — — — F50 HEATER 40 A Air Conditioner F51 — — — F52 — — — IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

206 Fuse Block Interior

07031602-03F-002

207 DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT F01 RHT R 30 A — F02 RHT L 30 A — F03 — — — F04 — — — F05 F.OUTLET 15 A Accessory Sockets F06 — — — F07 AT IND 7.5 A AT Shift Indicator — If Equipped F08 MIRROR 7.5 A Power Control Mirror F09 R_DECK R 30 A —

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY F10 R_DECK L 30 A — F11 F.WASHER 15 A Windshield Washer F12 P.WINDOW 30 A Power Windows F13 — — — F14 SRS2/ESCL 15 A — F15 SEAT WARM 20 A Heated Seats — If Equipped F16 M.DEF 7.5 A —

208 JACKING AND TIRE Tools Location CHANGING Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire, jack, lug wrench and tow Warning! eyes. For details, contact an authorized dealer. Tools are stored in the trunk. Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. 08020101-124-001 Being under a jacked-up vehicle is Jack Location dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. 1 — Cover Tab Never put any part of your body under a 2 — Jack And Tools Cover vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. 2. Turn the wing bolt and jack screw 08020100-122-002 counterclockwise. The jack is designed to be used as a Jack Tools tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for 1 — Jack Lever service purposes. The vehicle should be 2 — Lug Wrench (If Equipped) jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid 3 — Tow Eyes (If Equipped) ice or slippery areas.

Preparations For Jacking To Remove The Jack Proceed as follows:

08020101-122-001 1. In the right side of the trunk, pull the Jack Components cover tab to remove cover. 3 — Wing Bolt 4 — Jack Screw

209 To Secure The Jack Conditions Of Non-Use 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Lights and engage the parking brake. Proceed as follows: Temperatures below -40°F (−40°C). 1. Insert the wing bolt into the jack with On sandy or muddy ground. 3. For vehicles with automatic the jack screw pointing back, and turn transmission, place the gear selector in the wing bolt clockwise to temporarily On uneven ground. PARK. For vehicles with manual tighten it. On steep roads. transmission, place gear selector in REVERSE and cycle the engine to OFF. 2. Turn the jack screw clockwise. In extreme weather conditions. 4. Stop the engine. The motor must be 3. Turn the wing bolt completely to In direct contact with the engine or kept off as long as the vehicle is lifted secure the jack. for repairs under the vehicle. off the ground. 4. Insert the cover tabs and install the On boats. 5. Remove the jack and tools. cover. Jacking Instructions 6. Block both the front and rear of the Note: Make sure the jack is well wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking Warning! lubricated before using it. position. For example, if changing the IN CASE OF EMERGENCY right front tire, block the left rear wheel. A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a Warning! collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places Do not attempt to change a tire on the side provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull repaired or replaced immediately. far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. Maintenance Always keep the jack clean. Proceed as follows: Make sure the moving parts are kept 1. Stop the vehicle in a position that 08020300-121-001 free from dirt or rust. does not cause any danger to traffic Blocking Right Front Tire And Left Make sure the screw thread is and lets you change the tire in safety, as Rear Tire adequately lubricated. far as possible from the edge of the driving lane. The ground must be flat and sufficiently compact.

210 Removing A Tire 4. Continue raising the jack head gradually by rotating the screw with your hand until the jack head is inserted Warning! into the lift point.

Carefully follow these tire changing Caution! warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: Always park on a firm, level surface as Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by far from the edge of the roadway as jacking on locations other than those possible before raising the vehicle. indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this 08020301-123-001 vehicle. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. Loosen Lug Nuts Counterclockwise Block the wheel diagonally opposite the 2. Place the jack under the lift point wheel to be raised. closest to the tire being changed with Apply the parking brake firmly and set the jack head squarely under the the transmission in PARK. jacking location. Do not let any passenger sit in the 3. Turn the jack screw in the direction vehicle when it is on a jack. shown and adjust the jack head so that Do not get under the vehicle when it is it is close to the jacking location. on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. 08020301-121-001 Only use the jack in the positions Front Jacking Location indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. 5. Insert the jack lever and attach the If working on or near a roadway, be lug wrench to tire jack. extremely careful of motor traffic.

Proceed as follows: 08020301-ALL-003 1. Loosen the lug nuts by turning them Raising The Jack counterclockwise one turn each, but do not remove any lug nuts until the tire 1 — Jack Head has been raised off the ground. 211 To Remove An Anti-theft Lug Nut Warning! Proceed as follows: 1. Obtain the special key for the Raising the vehicle higher than necessary anti-theft lug nut. can make the vehicle less stable. It could 2. Place the special key on top of the slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. anti-theft lug nut, and be sure to hold Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. the key square to it. If you hold the key at an angle, you may damage both key and nut. Do not use a power impact

08020301-ALL-006 7. Remove the lug nuts by turning wrench. Jack With Lug Wrench Attached them counterclockwise, then remove the wheel. 3. Place the lug wrench on top of the key and apply pressure. Turn the Locking Lug Nuts — If Equipped wrench counterclockwise. Warning! If your vehicle has optional anti-theft To Install The Anti-theft Lug Nut IN CASE OF EMERGENCY wheel lug nuts, one on each wheel will Proceed as follows: Being under a jacked-up vehicle is lock the tires and you must use a dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the special key to unlock them. This key will 1. Place the special key on top of the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. attach to the lug wrench. nut, and be sure to hold the key square Never get any part of your body under a Register them with the lock to it. If you hold the key at an angle, you vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get manufacturer by filling out the card may damage both key and nut. Do not under a raised vehicle, take it to a service provided in the glove compartment and center where it can be raised on a lift. use a power impact wrench. mailing it in the accompanying envelope. If you lose this key, contact 2. Place the lug wrench on top of the 6. Turn the jack handle clockwise and an authorized dealer or use the lock special key, apply pressure, and turn it raise the vehicle high enough so that manufacturer's order form, which is clockwise. the tire is just raised off the ground and with the registration card. can be removed. Before removing the Accessory wheel locks cannot be used lug nuts, make sure your vehicle is on steel wheels. This includes situations firmly in position and that it cannot slip when the spare tire is installed. If the or move. spare tire is installed, one of the original lug nuts (which should still be in the vehicle) must be installed in place of the wheel lock.

212 Mounting The Tire 3. Turn the lug wrench 5. Remove the tire blocks and store Proceed as follows: counterclockwise and lower the vehicle. the tools and jack. Use the lug wrench to tighten the nuts 1. Remove dirt and grime from the in the order shown. 6. Check the inflation pressure. Refer mounting surfaces of the wheel and to “Technical Specifications” for more hub, including the hub bolts, with a information. cloth. With TPMS Do not push the tire pressure monitoring system set switch after installing the spare tire. The switch is only to be pushed after installing the repaired flat tire or installing a replacement tire. Note: To prevent the jack and tool from rattling, store them properly. 08020303-122-001 Lug Nut Tightening Order Warning! 08020303-XX4-001 Clean Mounting Surface Warning! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a 2. Mount the tire and install the lug collision or hard stop could endanger the nuts with the beveled edge inward, then To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the tighten them by hand. the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully jack parts and the spare tire in the places until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire Caution! to follow this warning may result in serious repaired or replaced immediately. injury.

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the 4. After tightening the lug nuts, have valve stem facing outward. The vehicle them checked with a torque wrench by could be damaged if the spare tire is an authorized dealer or service station mounted incorrectly. to verify correct tightness.

213 TIRE SERVICE KIT Tire Service Kit Mexico Market: Components And Tire Service Storage Operation The Tire Service Kit is located inside the The Tire Service Kit includes the trunk. following items: U.S.A. And Canada Markets:

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 08020202-121-003 Tire Service Kit Location The Tire Service Kit included with your vehicle is for a temporary repair of a slightly damaged flat tire resulting from running over nails or similar sharp 08070606456456 objects on the road surface. Tire Service Kit Components — Perform the emergency flat tire repair Mexico Markets without removing the nail or similar sharp object which punctured the tire. 1— Tire Sealant Note: Your vehicle is not equipped with 2— Compressor a spare tire. In the event of a flat tire, 08070606457457 3— Valve Core Tool use the Tire Service Kit to repair the tire Tire Service Kit Components — 4— Injection Hose temporarily. When doing the repair, refer U.S.A. And Canada Markets 5— Spare Valve Core to the instructions included in the Tire 1— Sealant Bottle 6— Speed Restriction Sticker Service Kit. If an emergency repair was 2— Compressor 7— Instructions performed on a flat tire using the Tire 3— Speed Restriction Sticker Service Kit, contact an authorized 4— Repaired Tire Sticker dealer to repair or replace the tire as soon as possible. 5— Instructions 214 Tire Service Usage Sealing A Tire With Tire Take care not to allow the contents of Precautions Service Kit Tire Service Kit to come in contact with The tire sealant cannot be reused. If the hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or sealant has been used, or is expired, Warning! absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, purchase new tire sealant at an eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush authorized dealer. immediately with plenty of water if there is Note: The Tire Service Kit cannot be Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side any contact with eyes or skin. Change used in the following cases. Consult an of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far clothing as soon as possible, if there is any authorized dealer if any of these enough off the road to avoid the danger of contact with clothing. conditions exist: being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or The period of effective use for the Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances: rash, consult a physician immediately. tire sealant has expired (the period of Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of effectiveness is indicated on the bottle If the puncture in the tire tread is children. If swallowed, rinse mouth label). approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. immediately with plenty of water and drink If the tire has any sidewall damage. plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! The tear or puncture in the tire Consult a physician immediately. exceeds about 0.16 inches (4 mm). If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure. The damage has occurred to an U.S.A. And CANADA Markets: area of the tire other than the tread. If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. Proceed as follows: The vehicle has been driven with nearly no air remaining in the tire. If the wheel has any damage. 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning Lights. The tire has come off the wheel rim. If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel. 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the Damage to the wheel rim has Keep Tire Service Kit away from open wheel with the deflated tire) is in a occurred. flames or heat sources. position that is near to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit hoses to The tire has two or more punctures. A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger reach the valve stem and keep the Tire the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow Service Kit flat on the ground. This will the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. provide the best positioning of the kit Failure to follow these warnings can result when injecting the sealant into the in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, deflated tire and running the air pump. your passengers, and others around you. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding. 215 3. Place the gear selector in REVERSE 7. Pull out the air compressor hose for a manual transmission, and PARK and the air compressor plug from the for automatic transmission. air compressor. 4. Apply the parking brake with the brake pedal pressed and cycle the engine OFF. 5. Unload passengers and cargo, then remove the Tire Service Kit.

08020202-03A-666 Sealant Bottle With Injection Hose 1 — Injection Hose 08020202-36A-004 Air Compressor With Hose And

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Note: Plug Do not shake the bottle excessively. Otherwise, the sealant 2 — Air Compressor Hose could spray out of the injection hose. If the sealant contacts clothing or other 08020202-121-003 8. Install the air compressor hose, Tire Service Kit Location objects, you may not be able to which was pulled out of the air remove it. compressor, into the injection valve of 6. Gently shake the sealant bottle to The sealant hardens easily, and the bottle. mix the contents. Then extend the injecting it will be difficult under cold injection hose. weather conditions (32 °F (0 °C) or below). Warm the sealant inside the vehicle to facilitate injection.

216 11. Insert the air compressor plug into the accessory socket, located deep in the back of the footwell on the passenger side, and cycle the ignition to ACC. Note: When inserting the air compressor plug into or removing it from the accessory socket, make sure that the air compressor switch is off. When turning the air compressor on/off, 08020202-031-670 08020202-03A-004 use the air compressor switch. Before Install Air Compressor To Sealant Valve And Valve Cover checking the tire inflation pressure using Bottle 5 — Valve Cap the tire pressure gauge, turn the air 3 — Air Compressor Hose 6 — Valve compressor switch off. 4 — Injection Valve 12. The sealant is injected into the tire 10. Install the bottle to the air when the air compressor is switched on. After the sealant is injected Note: Make sure that the air compressor and push it in until the left completely, wait until the tire inflation compressor switch is off before and right tabs are engaged securely. pressure increases to the specified tire inserting the air compressor hose into inflation pressure. For the correct the injection valve of the bottle. If the air pressure, check the tire inflation compressor hose is not installed to the pressure label on the driver's door injection valve of the bottle securely, the frame. sealant may leak. Note: The inflation pressure may 9. Remove the valve cap from the valve increase to about 43.5 psi (3 Bar) of the flat tire, install the injection hose temporarily to inject the sealant through to the tire valve, and turn the sleeve to the valve. Normally, the inflation the right to tighten. pressure decreases gradually and it reaches the actual inflation pressure 08020202-031-669 after about 30 seconds. Sealant Bottle Into Air Compressor 7 — Air Compressor Tabs

217 16. Remove the air compressor hose from the injection valve of the bottle. Warning! Warning! Then, install the injection hose to the injection valve of the bottle to prevent Never use the air compressor above 3 Bar Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker leakage of any remaining sealant. (43.5 psi). Using the air compressor at an to the padded area on the steering wheel. inflation pressure above 3 Bar (43.5 psi) Adhering the speed restriction sticker to continuously is dangerous. If the air the padded area on the steering wheel is compressor overheats, hot air will be dangerous because the air bag may not exhausted and you could get burned. operate (deploy) normally resulting in serious injury. In addition, do not adhere the sticker to areas where warning lights or Caution! the speedometer cannot be viewed.

14. Adhere the repaired tire sticker to If the tire inflation pressure does not the wheel of the flat tire. increase, repair of the tire is not possible. If IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 08020202-031-668 the tire does not reach the specified tire Install Injection Hose To Sealant inflation pressure within 10 minutes, it may have received extensive damage. In this Bottle case, the repair using the tire service kit Note: The remaining sealant in the was not successful. hose may spray out when the hose is Do not operate the air compressor for a removed. Remove the hose carefully continuous 10 minutes or longer because because you may not be able to using it for long periods could cause a remove the sealant contacting clothing malfunction. or other objects. 17. Install the tire valve cap. 13. Adhere the speed restriction sticker 08020202-031-667 to an area where it can be viewed easily Repaired Tire Sticker 18. Place the Tire Service Kit back into by the driver. its storage location. 15. When the tire inflates to the specified tire inflation pressure, turn the 19. Start driving immediately to spread air compressor switch off, turn the the sealant in the tire. sleeve of the injection hose to the left, Note: Carefully drive the vehicle at a and pull it out of the tire valve. speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or less. If the vehicle is driven at a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehicle may vibrate. 218 Note: With TPMS System: if the tire Sealing A Tire With Tire Take care not to allow the contents of is not properly inflated, the warning Service Kit Tire Service Kit to come in contact with light will illuminate. hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit After driving the vehicle for about sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or Warning! absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, 10 minutes or 3 miles (5 km), connect eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush the air compressor to the tire using immediately with plenty of water if there is Step nine of the procedure, and check Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side any contact with eyes or skin. Change the tire inflation pressure using the tire of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far clothing as soon as possible, if there is any pressure gauge on the air compressor. enough off the road to avoid the danger of contact with clothing. If the tire inflation pressure is lower than being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains the specified tire inflation pressure, turn Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the latex. In case of an allergic reaction or the air compressor on and wait until it vehicle under the following circumstances: rash, consult a physician immediately. reaches the specified tire inflation Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of pressure. If the puncture in the tire tread is children. If swallowed, rinse mouth approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. immediately with plenty of water and drink The Tire Service Kit is completed If the tire has any sidewall damage. plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! successfully if the tire inflation pressure Consult a physician immediately. does not decrease. Carefully drive the If the tire has any damage from driving vehicle to the nearest authorized dealer with extremely low tire pressure. Mexico Market immediately and have the flat tire If the tire has any damage from driving replaced. Replacement with a new tire on a flat tire. Proceed as follows: is recommended. If the tire is to be If the wheel has any damage. 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn repaired or reused, consult an on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning Lights. authorized dealer. If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel. 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the Note: Keep Tire Service Kit away from open wheel with the deflated tire) is in a If an emergency flat tire repair has flames or heat sources. position that is near to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit hoses to been performed using the Tire Service A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward Kit, FCA recommends that the tire be in a collision or hard stop could endanger reach the valve stem and keep the Tire replaced with a new one as soon as the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow Service Kit flat on the ground. This will possible. If the tire is to be repaired or the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. provide the best positioning of the kit reused, contact an authorized dealer. Failure to follow these warnings can result when injecting the sealant into the in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, deflated tire and running the air pump. The wheel can be reused if the your passengers, and others around you. Move the vehicle as necessary to place sealant adhering to it is removed. the valve stem in this position before However, replace the valve with a new proceeding. one. 219 3. Place the gear selector in REVERSE for a manual transmission, or PARK for automatic transmission. 4. Apply the parking brake with the brake pedal pressed and cycle the engine OFF. 5. Unload passengers and cargo, then remove the Tire Service Kit. 6. Gently shake the tire sealant. If the bottle is shaken after the injection hose 08020202-03A-004 is screwed on, tire sealant could spray Valve And Valve Cover out from the injection hose. Tire sealant 5 — Valve Cap contacting clothing or other objects 6 — Tire Valve may be impossible to remove. Shake

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY the bottle before screwing on the injection hose. Note: If there is air remaining in the tire when the valve core is removed, the Note: valve core could fly out. Remove the Do not shake the bottle valve core carefully. excessively. Otherwise, the sealant could spray out of the injection hose, 9. Turn the valve core counter clockwise with the valve core tool and and if the sealant contacts clothing or 0802020203A003 other objects, you may not be able to Attaching Injection Hose To Sealant remove the valve core. remove it. Bottle The sealant hardens easily and injecting it will be difficult under cold 8. Remove the valve cap from the flat weather conditions 32 °F (0 °C) or tire. Push the back of a valve core tool below. Warm the sealant inside the to the core of the tire valve and bleed vehicle to facilitate injection. out all of the remaining air.

7. Remove the cap from the bottle and screw on the injection hose with the bottle's inner cap left on to break the inner cap. 08020202-03A-005 Turn Valve Core Counterclockwise 220 Note: Store the valve core in a place where it will not get dirty. Warning! 10. Insert the injection hose into the valve. Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker to the padded area on the steering wheel. Adhering the speed restriction sticker to the padded area on the steering wheel is dangerous because the air bag may not operate (deploy) normally resulting in serious injury. In addition, do not adhere

08020202-03A-007 the sticker to areas where warning lights or Turn Valve Core Clockwise To the speedometer cannot be viewed. Reinstall 13. Reinsert the valve core into the 16. Pull out the air compressor hose valve and turn it clockwise to install. and the air compressor plug from the 08020202-03A-005 air compressor. Injection Hose Into Valve Note: 11. Hold the bottom of the bottle The tire sealant cannot be reused. upright, squeeze the bottle with your If the tire sealant kit has been used, or hands, and inject the entire amount of is expired, purchase a new one at an tire sealant into the tire. authorized dealer. Do not throw away the empty tire sealant bottle after use. Return the empty tire sealant bottle to an authorized dealer when replacing the tire. The empty tire sealant bottle will need to be used to extract and dispose of the used sealant from the 08020202-36A-004 tire. Air Compressor With Hose And Plug 14. Install the injection hose to the tab of the bottle to prevent leakage of any 2 — Air Compressor Hose

08020202-03A-008 remaining sealant. Squeeze Sealant Into Tire 17. Install the air compressor hose to 15. Adhere the speed restriction sticker the tire valve. 12. Pull out the injection hose from the to an area where it can be viewed easily valve. by the driver. 221 Note: Caution! Carefully drive the vehicle at a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or less. If the vehicle is driven at a speed of If the tire inflation pressure does not 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehicle increase, repair of the tire is not possible. may vibrate. If the tire does not reach the specified tire inflation pressure within 10 minutes, it may With TPMS System: if the tire is have received extensive damage. In this not properly inflated, the warning case, the repair using the tire service kit light will illuminate. was not successful. 08020202-03A-00B After driving the vehicle for about Air Compressor Hose Into Valve Do not operate the air compressor for a 10 minutes or 3 miles (5 km), connect continuous 10 minutes or longer because the air compressor to the tire using 18. Insert the air compressor plug into using it for long periods could cause a step nine of the procedure, and check the accessory socket, located deep in malfunction. the tire inflation pressure using the tire the back of the footwell on the pressure gauge on the air compressor. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY passenger side, and cycle the ignition Note: If the tire has been over If the tire inflation pressure is lower to ACC. inflated, loosen the screw cap on the air than the specified tire inflation 19. Turn the air compressor switch on compressor and bleed some of the air pressure, turn the air compressor on and inflate the tire carefully to the out. and wait until it reaches the specified correct inflation pressure. For the 20. When the tire inflates to the tire inflation pressure; correct pressure, check the tire inflation specified tire inflation pressure, turn the The emergency flat tire repair is pressure label on the driver's door air compressor switch off, turn the completed successfully if the tire frame. sleeve of the air compressor hose to inflation pressure does not decrease. Note: When inserting the air the left, and pull it out of the tire valve. Carefully drive the vehicle to the compressor plug into or removing it 21. Install the tire valve cap. nearest authorized dealer and have the from the accessory socket, make sure flat tire replaced. Replacement with a that the air compressor switch is off. 22. Place the Tire Service Kit back into new tire is recommended. If the tire is When turning the air compressor on/off, its storage location. to be repaired or reused, contact an authorized dealer. use the air compressor switch. Before 23. Start driving immediately to spread checking the tire inflation pressure using the sealant in the tire. the tire pressure gauge, turn the air compressor switch off.

222 If an emergency flat tire repair has JUMP STARTING been performed using the Tire Service Kit, FCA recommends that the tire be Preparations For Jump replaced with a new one as soon as Starting possible. If the tire is to be repaired or If the battery is discharged, a jump reused, contact an authorized dealer. starting procedure can be performed The tire can be reused if the sealant using the battery and the cables of adhering to it is removed. However, another vehicle, or using a booster replace the valve with a new one. battery. Jump starting is dangerous if done Replacing The Bottle incorrectly, so follow the procedure in Note: The tire sealant has a period of this section carefully. If you feel unsure effective use. Check the period of about jump starting, it is strongly effective use indicated on the bottle recommended that you have a label and do not use it if it has expired. competent service technician do the Have the tire sealant replaced at an work. authorized dealer before the period of Note: When a booster battery is being effective use has expired. used, comply with the utilization and Inspect the Tire Service Kit at regular precaution instructions specified by the intervals as well as the operation of the manufacturer. tire compressor. 08030100121001 Jump Start Locations

Warning!

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

223 To jump start the vehicle, follow this 5. Connect the opposite end of the procedure: positive jumper cable to the positive Caution! terminal on the booster battery. 1. Remove the positive terminal cover. 6. Connect the negative end of the Do not use a portable battery booster pack negative jumper cable to the negative or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to terminal of the booster battery. the battery, starter motor, alternator or 7. Connect the opposite end of the electrical system may occur. negative jumper cable to a good engine ground of the vehicle with the Jump Starting discharged battery (exposed metal part Procedure of the engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system. Warning! 8. Start the engine of the booster 08030100-122-001 vehicle and run it a few minutes. Then Positive Terminal Cover IN CASE OF EMERGENCY start the engine of the other vehicle. Failure to follow this jump starting 2. Make sure the booster battery is procedure could result in personal injury or 9. Once the engine is started, remove property damage due to battery explosion. 12 Volts and that the negative terminal is grounded. the jumper cables in the reverse sequence. 3. Make sure the engine of the vehicle Caution! with the booster battery is OFF and all 10. Replace the positive terminal cover. unnecessary electrical loads in both Make sure cover is secure. vehicles. Failure to follow these procedures could Bump Starting result in damage to the charging system of Never jump start the engine by pushing, the booster vehicle or the discharged towing or coasting downhill. vehicle. Warning! Note: Do not allow vehicles to touch each other You cannot start a vehicle with an as this could establish a ground automatic transmission by pushing it. connection and personal injury could result. Do not push-start a vehicle that has a manual transmission. It can damage the emission control system. 4. Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the positive terminal on the discharged battery. 224 Starting A Flooded IF YOUR ENGINE Engine OVERHEATS Warning! If the engine fails to start, it may be If Your Engine Overheats flooded (excessive fuel in the engine). In any of the following situations, you You or others can be badly burned by hot Follow this procedure: can reduce the potential for overheating engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from 1. If the engine does not start within by taking the appropriate action. your radiator. If you see or hear steam 5 seconds on the first try, wait coming from under the hood, do not open On highways — slow down. the hood until the radiator has had time to 10 seconds and try again. cool. Never try to open a cooling system In city traffic — while stopped, place 2. Make sure the parking brake is pressure cap when the radiator or coolant the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do bottle is hot. applied. not increase engine idle speed. 3. Press the accelerator all the way and Note: There are steps that you can hold it there. Caution! take to slow down an impending 4. Press the clutch pedal (manual overheat condition: transmission) or the brake pedal If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, Driving with a hot cooling system could (automatic transmission), then push the turn it off. The A/C system adds heat damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. STOP/START button. If the engine to the engine cooling system and starts, release the accelerator Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turning the A/C off can help remove turned off until the pointer drops back into immediately because the engine will this heat. suddenly rev up. the normal range. If the pointer remains on You can also turn the temperature the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for service. 5. If the engine fails to start, crank it control to maximum heat, the mode without pressing the accelerator. control to floor and the blower control If the engine still does not start using to high. This allows the heater core to the above procedure, have your vehicle act as a supplement to the radiator inspected by an authorized dealer. and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

225 If Steam Is Coming From The TOWING THE Engine Compartment: VEHICLE Caution! Do not go near the front of the vehicle. Attaching The Tow Eyes Stop the engine. Wait until the steam — If Equipped dissipates, then open the hood and The tow eye must be used exclusively start the engine. for roadside assistance operations. Only use the tow eye with an appropriate device If Neither Coolant Nor Steam Is Warning! Escaping: in accordance with the highway code (a rigid bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for Open the hood and idle the engine until a short distance to the nearest service it cools. Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with location. tow eyes. Note: Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow Chains may break, causing serious injury vehicles off the road or where there are If the cooling fan does not operate or death. obstacles. while the engine is running, the engine temperature will increase. Stop the Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow In compliance with the above straps may break or become disengaged, conditions, towing with a tow eye must IN CASE OF EMERGENCY engine and contact an authorized dealer. causing serious injury or death. take place with two vehicles (one towing, the other towed) aligned as much as Failure to follow proper tow eye usage If the engine continues to overheat possible along the same center line. may cause components to break resulting Damage to your vehicle may occur if these or frequently overheats, have the in serious injury or death. cooling system inspected. The engine guidelines are not followed. could be seriously damaged unless When towing, only use a facility that can repairs are made. Contact an tow vehicles with low ground clearances authorized dealer. as extensive damage can result by using a standard tow truck platform.

226 Proceed as follows: 1. Remove the towing eyelet and the lug wrench from the luggage compartment. 2. Wrap a flathead screwdriver or similar tool with a soft cloth to prevent damage to a painted bumper, and open the cap located on the front or rear bumper.

08060203-122-001 08060201-122-001 Rear Bumper Cap Location Installing Rear Tow Eye 2— Rear Bumper Cap 4. Hook the towing rope to the tow eye. Note: Do not use excessive force as it may damage the cap or scratch the Caution! painted bumper surface. Remove the cap completely and store it so as not to lose it. Tow eyes are for emergency use only, to rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not 08060203121001 3. Securely install the tow eye in front use tow eyes for tow truck hookup or Front Bumper Cap Location or rear using the lug wrench or highway towing. You could damage your 1— Front Bumper Cap equivalent. vehicle.

When using the tow eyes, always pull the lead or chain in a straight direction with respect to the eyelet. Never apply a sideways force.

08060201-121-001 Installing Front Towing Eye 227 Note: Follow the precautions below to ENHANCED avoid damage to the towing eyelet and Caution! ACCIDENT towing hook, vehicle body, or RESPONSE SYSTEM transmission system when towing: (EARS) DO NOT use sling-type equipment when Do not tow a vehicle heavier than This vehicle is equipped with an yours. towing. When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear Enhanced Accident Response System. Do not suddenly accelerate your suspension components. Damage to your Please refer to “Constant Monitoring” in vehicle as it will apply a severe shock vehicle may result from improper towing. “Safety” for further information on the to the tow eye and towing hook or Enhanced Accident Response System rope. If towing service is not available in an (EARS) function. Do not attach any rope other than emergency, the vehicle may be towed to the tow eye and towing hook. with all four wheels on the ground using the towing hook at the front of the Emergency Towing vehicle. Only tow the vehicle on paved surfaces for short distances at low

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Towing Description speeds. Proper lifting and towing are necessary Follow these instructions when towing to prevent damage to the vehicle. the vehicle with all wheels on the Government and local laws must be ground: followed. A towed vehicle usually should have its 1. Shift to NEUTRAL for manual drive wheels (rear wheels) OFF of the transmission or automatic transmission. ground. If excessive damage or other 2. Cycle the ignition to ACC mode. conditions prevent this, use wheel dollies. 3. Release the parking brake. When towing with the rear wheels on Note: Remember that power assist for the ground, release the parking brake. the brakes and steering will not be available when the engine is not running.

228 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle. Please refer to “Event Data Recorder (EDR)” in “Safety” for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).

229 This page is intentionally left blank

230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

INTRODUCTION ...... 232 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...... 239 BATTERY RECHARGING ...... 243 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . .243 RAISING THE VEHICLE ...... 246 WHEELS AND TIRES ...... 246 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES...... 261 STORINGTHEVEHICLE...... 262 BODYWORK ...... 263 INTERIORS ...... 269

231 INTRODUCTION documents, should any New Vehicle equipment may perform maintenance. Limited Warranty coverage But we recommend that it always be Be extremely careful and prevent injury disagreement occur. Failure to do so done by an authorized dealer using to yourself and others or damage to can result in your New Vehicle Limited genuine FCA parts. Selecting your vehicle when using this Owner’s Warranty being voided either in whole “Maintenance Monitor” enables the Manual for inspection and maintenance. or in part. system to notify you of your vehicle's If you are unsure about any procedure it This evidence may consist of the approaching inspection/servicing describes, we strongly urge you to have following: period. a reliable and qualified service shop perform the work, preferably at an Original copies of repair orders or Owner Maintenance authorized dealer. other receipts that include the mileage Precautions Factory-trained FCA technicians and and date the vehicle was serviced. The owner or a qualified service genuine FCA parts are best for your Each receipt should be signed by a technician should make these vehicle vehicle. Without this expertise and the qualified automotive service technician. inspections at the indicated intervals to parts that have been designed and For self maintenance, a statement ensure safe and dependable operation. made especially for your vehicle, that you completed the maintenance Bring any problem to the attention of an inadequate, incomplete, and insufficient yourself, displaying mileage and the authorized dealer or qualified service servicing may result in problems. This date the work was performed. Also, technician as soon as possible. could lead to vehicle damage or an receipts for the replacement parts (fluid, When refueling perform inspection accident and injuries. filters, etc.) indicating the date and

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE of: For expert advice and quality service, mileage must accompany this contact an authorized dealer. statement. Brake and clutch fluid level Note: Under no circumstances should Note: If you elect to perform Engine coolant level oil change intervals exceed maintenance yourself or have your 10,000 miles (16,000 kilometers) or vehicle serviced at a location other than Engine oil level 1year. an authorized dealer, FCA requires that Washer fluid level To continue New Vehicle Limited all fluids, parts and materials must meet Warranty eligibility and to protect your FCA standards for durability and At least monthly perform inspection investment, it is your responsibility to performance as described in this of: properly maintain your vehicle Owner’s Manual. Tire inflation pressures according to factory recommended Claims against the warranty resulting At least twice a year (for example, schedules outlined in this Owner’s from lack of maintenance, as opposed every spring and fall) perform Manual. As part of this you must keep to defective materials or authorized FCA inspection of: your maintenance records, receipts, workmanship, will not be honored. repair orders and any other documents Any auto repair shop using parts Engine coolant as evidence this maintenance was equivalent to your vehicle's original Engine oil performed. You must present these 232 As explained in the “Introduction” Operation of windshield Visually inspect conditions of the: paragraph, several procedures can be washer/wiper system and engine, transmission, lines and hoses done only by a qualified service positioning/wear of windshield wiper (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and technician with special tools. blades rubber elements (hoses/belts/etc.) For details, read the separate Warranty Every 1,860 miles (3,000 km) check Check battery charge and battery Booklet provided with the vehicle. If you and top off the engine oil level if fluid level are unsure about any servicing or required maintenance procedure, have it done Visually inspect conditions of the by an authorized dealer. Heavy-Duty Use Of The accessory drive belts Vehicle There are strict environmental laws Check and, if necessary, change regarding the disposal of waste oil and If the vehicle is used under one of the engine oil and replace oil filter fluids. Please dispose of your waste following conditions: properly and with due regard to the Check and, if necessary, replace Dusty roads environment. cabin air filter We recommend that you entrust the oil Short, repeated trips less than 4.4 - Check and, if necessary, replace air and fluid changes of your vehicle to an 5 miles (7-8km)atsub-zero outside cleaner temperatures authorized dealer. Severe Duty All Models Periodic Checks Engine idling for long periods of time Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles or driving long distances at low speeds (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a Every 620 miles (1,000 km) or before or long periods of inactivity dusty and off road environment or is long trips check and, if necessary, top operated predominately at idle or only off: The following checks must be carried out more often than indicated in the very low engine RPM’s. This type of Engine coolant level Scheduled Servicing Plan: vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. Brake fluid level Check front disc brake pad condition Windshield washer fluid level and wear Tire inflation pressure and condition Check cleanliness of underhood area and all door and trunk locks, cleanliness Operation of lighting system and lubrication of linkage (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.)

233 Scheduled Servicing Plan

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary, check Tire ••••••••••••••• Service Kit expiration date (if equipped). Check operation of lighting

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage ••••••••••••••• compartment, passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.). Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (brakes/hydraulic clutch, ••••••••••••••• windshield washer, battery, engine coolant, etc.).

234 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Check engine control system operation (via ••••••••••••••• diagnostic tool). Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - ••••• • • fuel system - brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves, bushings, etc.). Visually inspect conditions of steering elements and ••••• • • check their operation. Check the front and rear suspension, tie rods, CV ••••• • • Joints, and replace if necessary. Check endfloat of wheel ••••• • • bearings.

235 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Check windshield/rear window wiper blade •• ••• • • • position/wear. Check operation of windshield washer system •• ••• • • • and adjust jets if necessary.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Check cleanliness of hood and trunk locks and •• ••• • • • cleanliness and lubrication of linkages. Check parking brake lever travel and adjust, if ••••••••••••••• necessary. Visually check the condition and wear of the ••••••••••••••• front and rear brakes. Visually inspect condition of evaporation control ••• • • system. 236 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Visual inspect the condition and tensioning of •• • the accessory drive belt. Replace the accessory • drive belt. **** Inspect and replace PCV • valve if necessary. Change engine oil and In accordance with Oil Change Indicator System OR Severe Duty Mileage, whichever occurs first. replace oil filter.* Replace spark plugs ••• • • (1.4L Turbo engine).**

****Replace belt every 40,000 miles (60,000 km) for use on dusty roads. *The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out when indicated by a warning light or message on the instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed one year. **The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly intervals do not apply. The following are essential to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine: Only use spark plugs of the same make and type which are specially certified for such engines (refer to “Engine” in “Technical Specifications” for further information). Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval given in the scheduled servicing plan for spark plug replacement. Contact an authorized dealer if you have any questions. 237 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Replace engine air filter.# ••• • • Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles •• (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Replace the timing belt • SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE (1.4L Turbo Engine).

#The engine air cleaner should be inspected at every oil change if used in dusty areas.

Warning!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

238 ENGINE COMPARTMENT Checking Levels

07030300-121-003 1 — Window Washer Reservoir 4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir 3 — Engine Oil Cap 6 — Battery

239 Engine Oil Engine Coolant

Warning! Warning!

You or others can be badly burned by Be very careful when working in the hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam engine compartment when the engine is from your radiator. If you see or hear hot: you may get burned. steam coming from under the hood, do Do not get too close to the radiator not open the hood until the radiator has cooling fan: the electric fan may start; had time to cool. Never open a cooling danger of injury. 07030403-121-001 system pressure cap when the radiator or Engine Compartment coolant bottle is hot. Loose clothing might be pulled by moving parts. 1 — Engine Oil Dipstick Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry 2 — Engine Oil Cap away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan starts Recommended Oil automatically and may start at any time, Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in 5. Pull the dipstick out again and whether the engine is running or not. “Technical Specifications” for further examine the level. The level is normal if When working near the radiator cooling information. it is between Low and Full. If it is near fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Inspecting engine oil level or below Low, open the engine oil the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is cap/filler 2 and add enough oil to bring temperature controlled and can start at Proceed as follows: the level to Full. any time the ignition is in the ON mode. 1. Be sure the vehicle is on a level Note: Do not overfill the engine oil. surface. This may cause engine damage. Inspecting Coolant Level 2. Warm up the engine to normal Note: Changing the coolant should be 6. Make sure the O-ring on the dipstick done by an authorized dealer. operating temperature. is positioned properly before reinserting the dipstick. Inspect the antifreeze protection and 3. Turn the engine OFF and wait at coolant level in the coolant reservoir at least five minutes for the oil to return to 7. Reinsert the dipstick fully. least once a year, at the beginning of the sump. the winter season, and before traveling Engine Oil Consumption 4. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, where temperatures may drop below and reinsert it fully. During the initial period of use the freezing. engine oil consumption conditions Inspect the condition and connections should stabilize after the first 3,000 – of all cooling system and heater hoses. 3,500 miles (5,000 – 6,000 km). Replace any that are worn or deteriorated. 240 If it is at or near L (Low), add coolant by mixing a minimum solution of 50% Warning! Mopar Long Life Coolant Concentrate for FIAT Spider. Use higher Do not open hot engine cooling system. concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are when the engine is overheated. Do not anticipated. Bring the level to F (Full). loosen or remove the cap to cool an Please contact an authorized dealer for overheated engine. Heat causes pressure assistance. to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove Securely tighten the coolant reservoir tank cap after adding coolant. the pressure cap while the system is hot or 07030601-121-002 under pressure. If the coolant reservoir is empty or new Brake Fluid Reservoir Do not use a pressure cap other than coolant is required frequently, contact the one specified for your vehicle. Personal an authorized dealer. injury or engine damage may result. Brake/Clutch Fluid Warning! Inspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid Level The coolant should be at full in the Use only manufacturer's recommended radiator and between the F (Full) and L The brakes and clutch draw fluid brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And (Low) marks on the coolant reservoir from the same reservoir. Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” when the engine is cool. for further information. Using the wrong Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir type of brake fluid can severely damage regularly. your brake system and/or impair its It should be kept between the MAX performance. The proper type of brake and MIN lines. fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic The level normally drops with master cylinder reservoir. accumulated use, a condition To avoid contamination from foreign associated with wear of brake and matter or moisture, use only new brake clutch linings. If it is excessively low, fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly have the brake/clutch system closed container. Keep the master cylinder inspected. Contact an authorized reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake dealer. fluid in a open container absorbs moisture 07030501-121-001 from the air resulting in a lower boiling Coolant Reservoir point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. 241 Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can Automatic Transmission Control Unit result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine Warning! parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. The transmission oil level should only be Brake fluid can also damage painted and checked at an authorized dealer. vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution avoid its contact with these surfaces. Battery Maintenance and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, Do not allow petroleum based fluid to To get the best service from a battery: contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery components could be damaged, causing Keep it securely mounted. when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in partial or complete brake failure. This could eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately result in a collision. Keep the top clean and dry. with large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Keep terminals and connections Emergency” for further information. Windshield And clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease. Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Headlight Washer Fluid Keep flame or sparks away from the Inspecting Washer Fluid Level Rinse off spilled electrolyte battery. Do not use a booster battery or immediately with a solution of water any other booster source with an output Inspect fluid level in the washer fluid and baking soda. greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable reservoir, open the cap and add fluid if clamps to touch each other. necessary. If the vehicle will not be used for an extended time, disconnect the battery Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE leads and charge the battery every six compounds. Wash hands after handling. weeks. Battery Replacement Contact an authorized dealer to purchase a replacement battery.

07030901-121-001 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir Use plain water if washer fluid is unavailable. But use only washer fluid in cold weather to prevent it from freezing.

242 BATTERY MAINTENANCE RECHARGING Caution! PROCEDURES Battery Charging The following pages contain Procedure instructions on the required It is essential when replacing the cables maintenance from the technical on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the personnel who designed the vehicle. Warning! negative cable is attached to the negative In addition to these specific post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) maintenance instructions specified for and negative (-) and are identified on the routine scheduled servicing, there are Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution battery case. Cable clamps should be tight other components which may require and can burn or even blind you. Do not on the terminal posts and free of periodic maintenance or replacement allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, corrosion. skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery over the vehicle’s life cycle. when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in If a “fast charger” is used while the Body Lubrication eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both with large amounts of water. Refer to vehicle battery cables before connecting Ensure that the locks and bodywork “Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of the charger to the battery. Do not use a junction points, including components Emergency” for further information. “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. such as the seat guides, door hinges Battery gas is flammable and explosive. (and rollers), trunk and hood are Keep flame or sparks away from the Charge battery as follows: periodically lubricated with lithium battery. Do not use a booster battery or based grease to ensure correct, silent any other booster source with an output Before recharging the battery, turn off operation and to protect them from rust greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable all accessories and turn the engine OFF and wear. clamps to touch each other. by cycling the ignition to OFF. Thoroughly clean the components, Battery posts, terminals, and related Disconnect the negative battery eliminating every trace of dirt and dust. accessories contain lead and lead cable. After lubricating, eliminate excess oil compounds. Wash hands after handling. Connect the charger cables to the and grease. Also pay particular battery terminals, observing the polarity attention to the hood closing devices, (+,–). to ensure correct operation. During operations on the hood, be sure Turn on the charger. to perform with the engine cold, also When finished, turn the charger off remember to check, clean and lubricate before disconnecting the battery. the locking, release and safety devices. Make sure the hood's secondary latch Reconnect the negative battery keeps the hood from opening when the terminal. primary latch is released. 243 Lubricate the external lock cylinders Note: Blade Replacement twice a year. Apply a small amount of Hot waxes applied by automatic car Proceed as follows: high-quality lubricant directly into the washers have been known to affect lock cylinder. If necessary, contact your 1. Raise the wiper arm. the wiper's ability to clean windows. authorized dealer. 2. Open the clip and slide the blade To prevent damage to the wiper Wiper Blades assembly in the direction of the arrow. blades, do not use gas, paraffin, paint Contamination of either the windshield thinner, or other solvents on or near or the blades with foreign matter can them. reduce wiper effectiveness. Common Be careful not to pinch hands or sources are insects, tree sap, and hot fingers as it may cause injury, or wax treatments used by some damage the wipers. When washing or commercial car washes. servicing the vehicle, make sure the If the blades are not wiping properly, wiper lever is in the OFF position. clean the window and blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent; then Replacing Windshield Wiper Blades rinse thoroughly with clean water. When the wipers no longer clean well, Repeat if necessary. the blades are probably worn or 07031101-36A-001 When the wiper lever is in the AUTO cracked. Replace them. Clip position and the ignition is cycled to the

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE When raising both windshield wiper ON mode, the wipers may move arms, raise the driver's side wiper arm automatically in the following cases: first. If the windshield above the rain When lowering the wiper arms, slowly sensor is touched. lower the wiper arm from the passenger's side first while supporting If the windshield above the rain it with your hand. Forcefully lowering sensor is wiped with a cloth. the wiper arms could damage the wiper If the windshield is struck with a hand arm and blade, and may scratch or or other object. crack the windshield. If the rain sensor is struck with a Note: To prevent damage to the wiper hand or other object from inside the arms and other components, do not try vehicle. to sweep the wiper arm by hand.

244 3. Tilt the blade assembly and remove Note: it from the arm. Do not bend or discard the stiffeners, they will be reused. If the metal stiffeners are switched, the blade's wiping efficiency could be reduced. Do not use the driver's side metal stiffeners on the passenger's side, or vice versa. Be sure to reinstall the metal stiffeners in the new blade rubber so 07031101-36A-003 that the curve is the same as it was in Blade Holder the old blade rubber. 07031101-36A-002 5. Remove the metal stiffeners from Blade Assembly and Arm 6. Carefully insert the new blade each blade rubber and install them in rubber. Then install the blade assembly the new blade. in the reverse order of removal.

Warning!

To prevent damage to the windshield let the wiper arm down easily, do not let it slap down on the windshield.

4. Pull down the blade rubber and slide it out of blade holder.

07031101-36A-004 07031101-36A-005 Metal Stiffeners Reassemble Blade

245 RAISING THE WHEELS AND TIRES Note: VEHICLE Tire Safety Information P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. If the vehicle needs to be raised, see an Tire safety information will cover authorized dealer which is equipped P-Metric tires have the letter “P” aspects of the following information: molded into the sidewall preceding the with arm hoists or workshop lifts. Tire Markings, Tire Identification The vehicle’s lifting points are marked size designation. Example: Numbers, Tire Terminology and P215/65R15 95H. on the side skirts with the symbols. Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tire Markings Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/ 65R15 96H. LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 0601085395US for the letters “LT” that are molded into Tire Markings the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. 1 — U.S. DOT 4 — Maximum Safety Standards Load Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Code (TIN) Temporary high pressure compact 2 — Size 5 — Maximum spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” Designation Pressure molded into the sidewall preceding the 3 — Service 6 — Treadwear, size designation. Example: Description Traction and T145/80D18 103M. Temperature High flotation tire sizing is based on Grades U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

246 Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code "R" means radial construction, or "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

247 EXAMPLE: Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or LL = Light load tire or C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 03 means the 3rd week

248 EXAMPLE: 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front B-Pillar door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting Cold Tire Inflation Pressure for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation Maximum Inflation Pressure pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure tire placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading Tire Placard capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

249 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Loading Placard Note: The proper cold tire inflation The vehicle maximum load on the tire pressure is listed on the driver’s side must not exceed the load carrying B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You side door. will not exceed the tire's load carrying Check the inflation pressure of each tire, capacity if you adhere to the loading including the spare tire (if equipped), at conditions, tire size, and cold tire least monthly and inflate to the inflation pressures specified on the Tire recommended pressure for your vehicle. and Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual. GUID-054900418-high.tif Tire And Loading Information Note: Under a maximum loaded Placard vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear This placard tells you important axles must not be exceeded. information about the: For further information on GAWRs, 1. Number of people that can be vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer carried in the vehicle. to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting 0806115150US And Operating” section of this manual. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Example Tire Placard Location 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. To determine the maximum loading (Door) 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the occupants and cargo should never front, rear, and spare tires. exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

0806115151US Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

250 Steps For Determining Correct 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, Metric Example For Load Limit Load Limit— the amount of available cargo and For example, if “XXX” amount equals (1) Locate the statement “The luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) passengers in your vehicle, the amount combined weight of occupants and of available cargo and luggage load cargo should never exceed XXX kg (5) Determine the combined weight capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's of luggage and cargo being loaded 295 kg) as shown in step 4. placard. on the vehicle. That weight may not Note: safely exceed the available cargo (2) Determine the combined weight If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, of the driver and passengers that and luggage load capacity load from your trailer will be transferred will be riding in your vehicle. calculated in Step 4. to your vehicle. The following table (3) Subtract the combined weight (6) If your vehicle will be towing a shows examples on how to calculate trailer, load from your trailer will be total load, cargo/luggage, and towing of the driver and passengers from capacities of your vehicle with varying XXX kg or XXX lbs. transferred to your vehicle. Consult seating configurations and number and (4) The resulting figure equals the this manual to determine how this size of occupants. This table is for available amount of cargo and reduces the available cargo and illustration purposes only and may not luggage load capacity of your be accurate for the seating and load luggage load capacity. For carry capacity of your vehicle. example, if “XXX” amount equals vehicle. 1400 lbs. and there will be five For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

251 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

GUID-054900419-high.tif

Warning!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

252 Tires — General Unequal tire pressures from one side of Tire Inflation Pressures Information the vehicle to the other can cause the The proper cold tire inflation pressure is vehicle to drift to the right or left. Tire Pressure listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear Always drive with each tire inflated to the edge of the driver's side door. Proper tire inflation pressure is essential recommended cold tire inflation pressure. to the safe and satisfactory operation of At least once a month: your vehicle. Four primary areas are Check and adjust tire pressure with a Both under-inflation and over-inflation affected by improper tire pressure: good quality pocket-type pressure affect the stability of the vehicle and can gauge. Do not make a visual judgement Safety and Vehicle Stability produce a feeling of sluggish response when determining proper inflation. Tires or over responsiveness in the steering. Economy may look properly inflated even when Tread Wear Note: they are under-inflated. Ride Comfort Unequal tire pressures from side to Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or side may cause erratic and visible damage. Safety unpredictable steering response. Unequal tire pressure from side to Caution! Warning! side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right. After inspecting or adjusting the tire Fuel Economy Improperly inflated tires are dangerous pressure, always reinstall the valve stem and can cause collisions. Underinflated tires will increase tire cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel from entering the valve stem, which could Underinflation increases tire flexing and consumption. damage the valve stem. can result in overheating and tire failure. Tread Wear Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to Improper cold tire inflation pressures Inflation pressures specified on the cushion shock. Objects on the road and can cause abnormal wear patterns and placard are always “cold tire inflation chuckholes can cause damage that result pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is in tire failure. reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. defined as the tire pressure after the Overinflated or underinflated tires can Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability vehicle has not been driven for at least affect vehicle handling and can fail three hours, or driven less than 1 mile suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle Proper tire inflation contributes to a (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of control. comfortable ride. Over-inflation three hours. The cold tire inflation Unequal tire pressures can cause produces a jarring and uncomfortable pressure must not exceed the steering problems. You could lose control ride. maximum inflation pressure molded into of your vehicle. the tire sidewall. 253 Check tire pressures more often if Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire subject to a wide range of outdoor repairs and additional information. Warning! temperatures, as tire pressures vary Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat with temperature changes. tires that have experienced a loss of Tire pressures change by approximately High speed driving with your vehicle under pressure should be replaced 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air maximum load is dangerous. The added immediately with another Run Flat tire temperature change. Keep this in mind strain on your tires could cause them to of identical size and service description when checking tire pressure inside a fail. You could have a serious collision. (Load Index and Speed Symbol). garage, especially in the Winter. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Example: If garage temperature = 68°F above 75 mph (120 km/h). (20°C) and the outside temperature = Run Flat tires allow you the capability to 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph pressure should be increased by 3 psi Radial Ply Tires (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is every 12°F (7°C) for this outside referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run temperature condition. Warning! Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT Combining radial ply tires with other types reduce this normal pressure build up or of tires on your vehicle will cause your mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE your tire pressure will be too low. vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial A Run Flat tire is not repairable. Tire Pressures For High Speed ply tires in sets of four. Never combine Note: TPM Sensor must be replaced Operation them with other types of tires. after driving the vehicle on a flat tire The manufacturer advocates driving at condition. safe speeds and within posted speed Tire Repair It is not recommended driving a vehicle limits. Where speed limits or conditions If your tire becomes damaged, it may loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer are such that the vehicle can be driven be repaired if it meets the following while a tire is in the run flat mode. at high speeds, maintaining correct tire criteria: See the tire pressure monitoring section inflation pressure is very important. for more information. Increased tire pressure and reduced The tire has not been driven on when vehicle loading may be required for flat. high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to The damage is only on the tread an authorized tire dealer or original section of your tire (sidewall damage is equipment vehicle dealer for not repairable). recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). 254 Tire Spinning Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice wear patterns to develop across the tire conditions, do not spin your vehicle's tread. These abnormal wear patterns wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for will reduce tread life, resulting in the longer than 30 seconds continuously need for earlier tire replacement. without stopping. Distance driven. Performance tires, tires with a speed Warning! 0806104865NA rating of V or higher, and Summer tires Tire Tread typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. 1—WornTire scheduled maintenance is highly Forces generated by excessive wheel 2—NewTire speeds may cause tire damage or failure. recommended. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster These indicators are molded into the than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than bottom of the tread grooves. They will Warning! 30 seconds continuously when you are appear as bands when the tread depth stuck, and do not let anyone near a becomesa1/16ofaninch(1.6mm). spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. Tires and the spare tire should be replaced When the tread is worn to the tread after six years, regardless of the remaining wear indicators, the tire should be tread. Failure to follow this warning can Tread Wear Indicators replaced. result in sudden tire failure. You could lose Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this control and have a collision resulting in Tread wear indicators are in the original serious injury or death. section for further information. equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be Life Of Tire Note: Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced. The service life of a tire is dependent replaced as well when installing new upon varying factors including, but not tires due to wear and tear in existing limited to: tires. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry Driving style. place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

255 Replacement Tires Tire Types The tires on your new vehicle provide a Warning! All Season Tires — If Equipped balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear All Season tires provide traction for all and correct cold tire inflation pressures. Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and or speed rating other than that specified Winter). Traction levels may vary The manufacturer strongly recommends for your vehicle. Some combinations of that you use tires equivalent to the between different all season tires. All unapproved tires and wheels may change season tires can be identified by the originals in size, quality and performance suspension dimensions and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the characteristics, resulting in changes to M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in steering, handling, and braking of your the tire sidewall. Use all season tires this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading vehicle. This can cause unpredictable only in sets of four; failure to do so may Information placard or the Vehicle handling and stress to steering and adversely affect the safety and handling Certification Label for the size designation suspension components. You could lose of your vehicle. of your tire. The Load Index and Speed control and have a collision resulting in Symbol for your tire will be found on the serious injury or death. Use only the tire Summer Or Three Season Tires original equipment tire sidewall. and wheel sizes with load ratings approved — If Equipped for your vehicle. See the Tire Sizing Chart example Summer tires provide traction in both found in the “Tire Safety Information” Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was wet and dry conditions, and are not section of this manual for more intended to be driven in snow or on ice. information relating to the Load Index originally equipped on your vehicle. Using SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE a tire with a smaller load index could result If your vehicle is equipped with Summer and Speed Symbol of a tire. in tire overloading and failure. You could tires, be aware these tires are not It is recommended to replace the two lose control and have a collision. designed for Winter or cold driving front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Failure to equip your vehicle with tires conditions. Install Winter tires on your Replacing just one tire can seriously having adequate speed capability can vehicle when ambient temperatures are affect your vehicle’s handling. If you result in sudden tire failure and loss of less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are ever replace a wheel, make sure that vehicle control. covered with ice or snow. For more the wheel’s specifications match those information, contact an authorized of the original wheels. dealer. It is recommended you contact an Caution! Summer tires do not contain the all authorized tire dealer or original season designation or mountain/ equipment dealer with any questions snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. you may have on tire specifications or Replacing original tires with tires of a Use Summer tires only in sets of four; capability. Failure to use equivalent different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. failure to do so may adversely affect the replacement tires may adversely affect safety and handling of your vehicle. the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. 256 capability on wet or dry surfaces may Compact Spare Tire — If be poorer than that of non-studded Warning! Equipped tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be The compact spare is for temporary Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice checked before using these tire types. emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a conditions. You could lose vehicle control, Spare Tires — If resulting in severe injury or death. Driving compact spare by looking at the spare too fast for conditions also creates the Equipped tire description on the Tire and Loading possibility of loss of vehicle control. Note: For vehicles equipped with Tire Information Placard located on the Service Kit instead of a spare tire, driver’s side door opening or on the please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Snow Tires sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire Case Of Emergency” for further descriptions begin with the letter “T” or Some areas of the country require the use information. “S” preceding the size designation. of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires Example: T145/80D18 103M. can be identified by a “mountain/ Caution! T,S=Temporary Spare Tire snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall. Since this tire has limited tread life, the If you need snow tires, original equipment tire should be select tires equivalent Because of the reduced ground clearance, repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on do not take your vehicle through an in size and type to the your vehicle at the first opportunity. original equipment automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt tires. Use snow tires Damage to the vehicle may result. to mount a conventional tire on the only in sets of four; compact spare wheel, since the wheel failure to do so may Spare Tire Matching Original is designed specifically for the compact adversely affect the safety and handling spare tire. Do not install more than one of your vehicle. Equipped Tire And Wheel — If compact spare tire and wheel on the Snow tires generally have lower speed Equipped vehicle at any given time. ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should Your vehicle may be equipped with a not be operated at sustained speeds spare tire and wheel equivalent in look over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds and function to the original equipment above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to tire and wheel found on the front or rear original equipment or an authorized tire axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may dealer for recommended safe operating be used in the tire rotation for your speeds, loading and cold tire inflation vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, pressures. refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern. While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction 257 Do not install a wheel cover or attempt Limited Use Spare — If to mount a conventional tire on the Warning! Equipped collapsible spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the The limited use spare tire is for Compact and collapsible spares are for collapsible spare tire. temporary emergency use only. This tire temporary emergency use only. With these is identified by a label located on the spares, do not drive more than 50 mph limited use spare wheel. This label (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have Warning! contains the driving limitations for this limited tread life. When the tread is worn to spare. This tire may look like the original the tread wear indicators, the temporary equipped tire on the front or rear axle of use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of sure to follow the warnings, which apply to this limited use spare tire affects vehicle your spare. Failure to do so could result in spares, do not drive more than 50 mph spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have handling. Since it is not the same as limited tread life. When the tread is worn to your original equipment tire, replace (or the tread wear indicators, the temporary repair) the original equipment tire and Collapsible Spare Tire — If use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be reinstall on the vehicle at the first sure to follow the warnings, which apply to opportunity. Equipped your spare. Failure to do so could result in The collapsible spare is for temporary spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. emergency use only. You can identify if Warning!

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE your vehicle is equipped with a Full Size Spare — If Equipped collapsible spare by looking at the Limited use spares are for emergency use spare tire description on the Tire and The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look only. Installation of this limited use spare Loading Information Placard located on tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, the driver’s side door opening or on the like the originally equipped tire on the do not drive more than the speed listed on sidewall of the tire. front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated Collapsible spare tire description not. This spare tire may have limited to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on example: 165/80-17 101P. tread life. When the tread is worn to the your Tire and Loading Information Placard tread wear indicators, the temporary located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the Since this tire has limited tread life, the use full size spare tire needs to be rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace original equipment tire should be replaced. Since it is not the same as (or repair) the original equipment tire at the repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your original equipment tire, replace (or first opportunity and reinstall it on your your vehicle at the first opportunity. repair) the original equipment tire and vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. Inflate collapsible tire only after the reinstall on the vehicle at the first wheel is properly installed to the opportunity. vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle. 258 Wheel And Wheel Trim When cleaning extremely dirty wheels Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Care including excessive brake dust, care Chrome, or Low Gloss Clear Coat must be taken in the selection of tire Wheels All wheels and wheel trim, especially and wheel cleaning chemicals and aluminum and chrome plated wheels, equipment to prevent damage to the should be cleaned regularly using mild Caution! wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their their luster and to prevent corrosion. equivalent is recommended or select a Wash wheels with the same soap If your vehicle is equipped with these non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for solution recommended for the body of specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel aluminum or chrome wheels. cleaners, abrasives, or polishing the vehicle and remember to always compounds. They will permanently wash when the surfaces are not hot to damage this finish and such damage is not the touch. Caution! covered by the New Vehicle Limited Your wheels are susceptible to Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING deterioration caused by salt, sodium MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all bristle brush, metal polishes or oven that is required to maintain this finish. chloride, etc., and other road chemicals cleaner. These products may damage the used to melt ice or control dust on dirt wheel's protective finish. Such damage is roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Snow Chains mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar The use of snow chains should be in not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is compliance with local regulations of They can damage the wheel’s recommended. each country. In certain countries, tires protective coating that helps keep them marked with code M+S (Mud and from corroding and tarnishing. Note: If you intend parking or storing Snow) are considered as winter your vehicle for an extended period equipment; therefore their use is Caution! after cleaning the wheels with wheel equivalent to that of the snow chains. cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the The snow chains may be applied only brakes to remove the water droplets to the front wheel tires. Check the Avoid products or automatic car washes from the brake components. This tension of the snow chains after the first that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline activity will remove the red rust on the few feet have been driven. additives or harsh brushes. Many brake rotors and prevent vehicle aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic vibration when braking. car washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. 259 Tire rotation means moving the wheels to a different position, with respect to Warning! Caution! the vehicle. During rotation, inspect tires for correct balance. Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Using snow chains with tires with Snow) between front and rear axles can non-original dimensions may damage the cause unpredictable handling. You could vehicle. lose control and have a collision. Using different size or type (M+S, snow, etc.) tires between front and rear axle may adversely affect vehicle driveability, with Caution! the risk of losing control of the vehicle and resulting accidents. To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: Tire Rotation Because of restricted traction device Recommendations 07031402-FRT-001 clearance between tires and other suspension Rotation Diagram components, it is important that only traction The front and rear tires are subject to devices in good condition are used. Broken different loads and stress due to The single wheel will therefore operate devices can cause serious damage. Stop the steering, maneuver and braking. For vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could on a different axle and, where possible, indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged this reason they are subject to uneven on the opposite side of the vehicle. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE parts of the device before further use. wear. To resolve this problem, tires Note: Install device as tightly as possible and then should be rotated at the appropriate retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). time. Rotate tires periodically. Irregular tire Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). The following rotation methods must wear is dangerous. To equalize tread NOT be used with one-way wear for maintaining good Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and performance in handling and braking, large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. unidirectional tires! This type of tires can only be switched from the front axle to rotate the tires every 6,200 miles Do not drive for a prolonged period on the rear axle and vice versa, keeping (10,000 km), or sooner if irregular wear dry pavement. them on the same side of the vehicle. develops. Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, Rotate one-way unidirectional tires To equalize tread wear, rotate the operating speed, and conditions for use. and radial tires that have an tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) at Always use the suggested operating speed of asymmetrical tread pattern only from the latest or sooner if irregular wear the device manufacturer’s if it is less than fronttorear,notfromsidetoside.Tire develops. FCA recommends to rotate 30 mph (48 km/h). performance will be reduced if rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) to help Do not use traction devices on a from side to side. increase tire life and distribute wear compact spare tire. more evenly. 260 Because your vehicle is not DEPARTMENT OF habits, service practices, and equipped with a spare tire, you cannot TRANSPORTATION differences in road characteristics do a tire rotation safely with the jack UNIFORM TIRE and climate. that may come with your vehicle if so QUALITY GRADES equipped. Contact an authorized Traction Grades dealer for tire rotation. The following tire grading The Traction grades, from highest categories were established by the Also, inspect them for uneven wear and to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. damage. Abnormal wear is usually National Highway Traffic Safety These grades represent the tire's caused by one or a combination of the Administration. The specific grade ability to stop on wet pavement, as following: rating assigned by the tire's measured under controlled Incorrect tire pressure manufacturer in each category is conditions on specified government shown on the sidewall of the tires Improper wheel alignment test surfaces of asphalt and on your vehicle. Out-of-balance wheel concrete. A tire marked C may All passenger vehicle tires must Severe braking have poor traction performance. conform to Federal safety After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to requirements in addition to these specification and inspect the wheel nuts Warning! for tightness. grades. Treadwear With Tire Pressure Monitor System The traction grade assigned to (TPMS) The Treadwear grade is a this tire is based on straight-ahead The TPM system must be initialized comparative rating, based on the braking traction tests, and does after adjusting the tire pressure, to wear rate of the tire when tested make the system operate normally. not include acceleration, Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring under controlled conditions on a cornering, hydroplaning, or peak System” in “Safety” for further specified government test course. traction characteristics. information. For example, a tire graded 150 would Rotate unidirectional tires and radial wear one and one-half times as well tires that have an asymmetrical tread on the government course as a tire pattern only from front to rear, not from side to side. Tire performance will be graded 100. The relative performance reduced if rotated from side to side. of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving 261 Temperature Grades STORING THE The Temperature grades are A (the Warning! VEHICLE highest), B, and C, representing the If the vehicle is left inactive for longer tire's resistance to the generation of than a month, the following precautions The temperature grade for this tire should be observed: heat and its ability to dissipate heat, is established for a tire that is when tested under controlled properly inflated and not Park the vehicle in covered, dry and if conditions on a specified indoor possible well-ventilated premises and overloaded. Excessive speed, slightly open the windows. laboratory test wheel. under-inflation, or excessive Sustained high temperature can Check that the parking brake is not loading, either separately or in activated. cause the material of the tire to combination, can cause heat degenerate and reduce tire life, and buildup and possible tire failure. Disconnect the negative battery terminal and check the battery charge. excessive temperature can lead to Repeat this check once every three sudden tire failure. The grade C months during storage. corresponds to a level of If the battery is not disconnected performance, which all passenger from the electrical system, check its vehicle tires must meet under the state of charge every thirty days.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Clean and protect the painted parts Standard No. 109. Grades B and A using protective wax. represent higher levels of Clean and protect the shiny metal performance on the laboratory test parts using special compounds wheel, than the minimum required available commercially. by law. Sprinkle talcum powder on the windshield and rear window wiper rubber blades and lift them off the glass.

262 Cover the vehicle with a fabric or BODYWORK Preserving The perforated plastic sheet, paying Paintwork particular care not to damage the Protection From Touch up abrasions and scratches painted surface by dragging any dust Atmospheric Agents immediately to prevent the formation of that may have accumulated on it. Do The vehicle is equipped with the best rust. not use compact plastic sheets which available technological solutions to do not allow humidity to evaporate from protect the bodywork against corrosion. Maintenance of paintwork consists of the surface of the vehicle. washing the vehicle: the frequency These include: depends on the conditions and Inflate the tires at a pressure of Painting products and systems environment in which the vehicle is +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) higher than which give the vehicle resistance to used. recommended on the tire placard and corrosion and abrasion. For example, it is advisable to wash the check it periodically. Use of galvanized (or pre-treated) vehicle more often in areas with high Do not drain the engine cooling steel sheets, with high resistance to levels of atmospheric pollution or salted system. corrosion. roads. Any time the vehicle is left inactive for To correctly wash the vehicle, follow Spraying of plastic parts, with a these instructions: two weeks or more, operate the air protective function in the more exposed conditioning system with engine idling points: underdoor, inner fender, edges, If high pressure jets or cleaners are for at least five minutes, setting external etc. used to wash the vehicle, keep a air and with fan set to maximum speed. distance of at least 1.3 ft (40 cm) from This operation will ensure appropriate Use of “open” boxed sections to the bodywork to avoid damage or lubrication for the system, thus prevent condensation and pockets of alteration. Build up of water could minimizing the possibility of damage to moisture which could favor the cause damage to the vehicle in the long the compressor when the system is formation of rust inside. term. operated again. Use of special films to protect Wash the vehicle using a low Note: After placing the ignition in the against abrasion in exposed areas (e.g. pressure jet of water if possible. OFF mode and having closed the driver rear fender, doors, etc.). side door, wait at least one minute Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy before disconnecting the electrical Corrosion Warranty solution over the bodywork, frequently supply from the battery. When Your vehicle is covered by Corrosion rinsing the sponge. reconnecting the electrical supply to the Warranty against perforation due to rust Rinse well with water and dry with a battery, make sure that the ignition in of any original element of the structure jet of air or a chamois leather. the OFF mode and the driver side door or bodywork. For the general terms of Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door is closed. this Corrosion Warranty, refer to the frames, hood, headlight frames, etc.) Warranty Booklet. with special care, as water may stagnate more easily in these areas. Do 263 not wash the vehicle after it has been Damage caused by bird Water marks left in the sun or with the hood hot: this dropping/insects/tree sap Problem: may alter the shine of the paintwork. Problem: Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water can Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned Bird droppings contain acids. If these contain harmful minerals such as salt in the same way as the rest of the are not removed they can eat away the and lime. If moisture containing these vehicle. clear and color base coat of the minerals settles on the vehicle and Note: vehicle's paintwork. evaporates, the minerals will When insects stick to the paint surface concentrate and harden to form white Avoid parking under trees; the sap and decompose, corrosive compounds rings. The rings can damage your dropped by trees makes the paint form. These can erode the clear and vehicle's finish. work go dull and increases the color base coat of the vehicle's Prevention: possibility of corrosion. paintwork if they are not removed. It is necessary to wash and wax your Bird droppings must be washed off Tree sap will harden and adhere vehicle to preserve its finish according immediately and thoroughly as the acid permanently to the paint finish. If you to the instructions in this section. These they contain is particularly aggressive. scratch the sap off while it is hard, some steps should be taken immediately after vehicle paint could come off with it. you find water marks on your vehicle's Etching caused by acid rain or Prevention: finish. industrial fallout It is necessary to have your vehicle Cause: Paint chipping washed and waxed to preserve its finish Problem: SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Industrial pollutants and vehicle according to the instructions in this Paint chipping occurs when gravel emissions drift into the air and mix with section. This should be done as soon thrown in the air by another vehicle's rain or dew to form acids. These acids as possible. can settle on a vehicle's finish. As the tires hits your vehicle. Bird droppings can be removed with a water evaporates, the acid becomes How to avoid paint chipping: soft sponge and water. If you are travelling concentrated and can damage the and these are not available, a moistened Keeping a safe distance between you finish. tissue may also take care of the problem. and the vehicle ahead reduces the The longer the acid remains on the The cleaned area should be waxed chances of having your paint chipped surface, the greater the chance is for according to the instructions in this by flying gravel. damage. section. Insects and tree sap are best Note: Prevention: removed with a soft sponge and water or It is necessary to wash and wax your a commercially available chemical cleaner. The paint chipping zone varies with vehicle to preserve its finish according Another method is to cover the affected the speed of the vehicle. For example, to the instructions in this section. These area with dampened newspaper for one when travelling at 55 mph (90 km/h), steps should be taken immediately after to two hours. After removing the the paint chipping zone is 164 ft you suspect that acid rain has settled newspaper, rinse off the loosened (50 m). on your vehicle's finish. debris with water. 264 In low temperatures, a vehicle's Note: FCA is not responsible for When washing and waxing the finish hardens. This increases the scratches caused by automatic car vehicle, be careful not to apply chance of paint chipping. washes or improper washing. excessive force to any single area of Scratches are more noticeable on the vehicle hood. Otherwise, you could Chipped paint can lead to rust vehicles with darker paint finishes. dent the vehicle. forming on your vehicle. Before this happens, repair the damage by using When the wiper lever is in the AUTO Do not use automatic car washing FCA touch-up paint according to the position and the ignition is placed in the machines and car washing devices instructions in this section. Failure to ON mode, the wipers may move using high water pressure. repair the affected area could lead to automatically in the following cases: Make sure that the fuel door is serious rusting and expensive repairs. If the windshield above the rain closed and lock the doors. Otherwise, Follow all label and container directions sensor is touched or wiped with a cloth. the fuel door may be forcefully opened when using a chemical cleaner or If the windshield is struck with a hand by water pressure causing damage to polish. Read all warnings and cautions. or other object from either outside or the vehicle or fuel door. Maintaining The Finish inside the vehicle. To minimize scratches on the vehicle's paint finish: Washing Note: Rinse off any dirt or other foreign To help protect the finish from rust and Keep hands and scrapers clear of deterioration, wash your vehicle matter using lukewarm or cold water the windshield when the wiper lever is before washing. thoroughly and frequently, at least once in the AUTO position and the ignition is a month, with lukewarm or cold water. cycled to ON mode as fingers could be Use plenty of lukewarm or cold water If the vehicle is washed improperly, the pinched or the wipers and wiper and a soft cloth when washing the paint surface could be scratched. Here blades damaged when the wipers vehicle. Do not use a nylon cloth. are some examples of how scratching activate automatically. If you are going could occur: Rub gently when washing or drying to clean the windshield, be sure the the vehicle. The vehicle is washed without first wipers are turned off completely (when rinsing off dirt and other foreign matter. it is most likely that the engine is left Take your vehicle only to a car wash running) this is particularly important that keeps its brushes well maintained. The vehicle is washed with a rough, when clearing ice and snow. dry, or dirty cloth. Do not use abrasive cleansers or Do not spray water in the engine wax that contain abrasives. The vehicle is washed at a car wash compartment. Otherwise, it could that uses brushes that are dirty or too result in engine-starting problems or stiff. damage to electrical parts. Cleansers or wax containing abrasives are used. 265 Always wash and dry the vehicle before Bright-Metal waxing it. In addition to the vehicle Maintenance Caution! body, wax the metal trim to maintain its Use tar remover to remove road tar and lustre: insects. Never do this with a knife or Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, Use wax which contains no similar tool. or strong detergents containing highly abrasives. Waxes containing abrasive alkaline or caustic agents on chrome To prevent corrosion on bright-metal plated or anodized aluminium parts. This will remove paint and could damage surfaces, apply wax or chrome may damage the protective coating; also, bright metal parts. preservative and rub it to a high lustre. cleaners and detergents may discolor or Use a good grade of natural wax for During cold weather or in coastal areas, deteriorate the paint. metallic, mica, and solid colors. cover bright-metal parts with a coating of wax or preservative heavier than When waxing, coat evenly with the Pay special attention to removing salt, usual. It would also help to coat them sponge supplied or a soft cloth. dirt, mud, and other foreign material with noncorrosive petroleum jelly or from the underside of the fenders, and Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth. some other protective compound. make sure the drain holes in the lower Note: A spot remover to remove oil, edges of the doors and rocker panels tar, and similar materials will usually also Caution! are clean. take off the wax. Rewax these areas Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, even if the rest of the vehicle does not industrial fallout, and similar deposits need it. Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE can damage the finish if not removed or strong detergents containing highly immediately. When prompt washing Repairing Damage To alkaline or caustic agents on chrome with plain water is ineffective, use a mild The Finish plated or anodized aluminium parts. This may result in damage to the protective soap made for use on vehicles. Deep scratches or chips on the finish coating and cause discoloration or paint Thoroughly rinse off all soap with should be repaired promptly. Exposed deterioration. lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow metal quickly rusts and can lead to soap to dry on the finish. major repairs. After washing the vehicle, dry it with a Note: If your vehicle is damaged and clean chamois to prevent water spots needs metal parts repaired or replaced, from forming. make sure the body shop applies corrosion prevention materials to all Waxing parts, both repaired and new. This will Your vehicle needs to be waxed when prevent them from rusting. water no longer beads on the finish.

266 Underbody Maintenance Rinse it thoroughly with clean water to remove all the soap. Road chemicals and salt used for ice Caution! and snow removal and solvents used Wipe it as dry as you can before the for dust control may collect on the water dries on it. underbody. If not removed, they will Do not use a wire brush or any abrasive Then allow it to dry completely before speed up rusting and deterioration of cleaner, polishing compound, or solvent on aluminium wheels. They may damage the lowering it. such underbody parts as fuel lines, coating. frame, floor pan, and exhaust system, even though these parts may be coated Caution! with anti-corrosive material. Note: Always use a sponge or soft Thoroughly flush the underbody and cloth to clean the wheels. Rinse the wheel housings with lukewarm or cold wheels thoroughly with lukewarm or Automatic and high-pressure car water at the end of each winter. Try also cold water. Also, be sure to clean the washes are harmful to a convertible top. to do this every month. wheels after driving on dusty or salted Avoid them. roads to help prevent corrosion. Pay special attention to these areas Do not spray water directly on the area because they easily hide mud and dirt. Convertible Top where the window glass and the It will do more harm than good to wet Maintenance convertible top meet. This would probably cause water to enter the interior. down the road grime without removing The convertible top is made of a special it. high-grade material, but if it's not taken Do not spray water directly on the seam The lower edges of doors, rocker good care of, hardening, staining, and area of the body and the convertible top panels, and frame members have drain as it could result in water penetrating the loss of lustre will result. Maintain it interior. holes that should not be clogged. under these guidelines. Water trapped there will cause rusting. Do not wipe the convertible top using Washing alcohol, chlorine bleach, or organic Aluminium Wheel Do not wait until the convertible top solvents such as thinner, benzene, or Maintenance gets really dirty before cleaning it. Dirt gasoline. Otherwise, they may cause A protective coating is provided over that's there too long will cause discoloration or stains. the aluminium wheels. Special care is deterioration. Too much treatment on the convertible needed to protect this coating. Before washing, remove dust and top can be as damaging as too little. Follow the manufacturer's directions. Do Note: Do not use any detergent other coarse particulate with a soft brush. than mild detergent. Before using any not over do it! detergent, verify the ingredients. Gently clean the convertible top with Otherwise, the product could discolor a synthetic neutral detergent, lots of or stain the aluminium wheels. water, and a soft brush.

267 Note: Proceed as follows: 3. Remove leaves and other matter accumulated in the drain filter. Some leather treatment products 1. Check the position of the drain filter can ruin the convertible top's gloss. with your hand from behind the bow. 4. Reinstall the drain filter in the reverse Be careful of the one you choose. order of the removal procedure. Test on an inconspicuous, small Note: Make sure that the drain filter is corner of the convertible top if you are securely attached to its designated not sure. position by pushing it until the tab locks. Water may enter the vehicle if the Do not get any car wax on the drain filter is not secured to its convertible top. designated position. For this operation If you do, remove it with a good go to an authorized dealer. leather cleaner or mild detergent Plastic Part (about 5% solution). Maintenance Let the convertible top dry 07040110123001 When cleaning the plastic lenses of the completely before lowering after Drain Filter Location lights, do not use gasoline, paraffin, applying treatment or dressing. 1 — Drain Filter rectified spirit, paint, thinner, highly 2 — Bow acidic detergents, or strongly alkaline Drain Filter Cleaning detergents. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE If leaves or other matter block the drain 2. Remove the drain filter while Otherwise, these chemical agents can filter, water may enter the vehicle. Clean pressing the tab. discolor or damage the surfaces the drain filter at least once a year. resulting in a significant loss in functionality. If plastic parts become inadvertently exposed to any of these chemical agents, flush with water immediately. If plastic parts such as the bumpers become inadvertently exposed to chemical agents or fluids such as gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid, it could cause discoloration, staining, or paint peeling. Wipe off any 07040110124001 such chemical agents or fluids using a 07040110122001 Drain Filter Tab soft cloth immediately. Drain Filter 268 INTERIORS Vinyl Caution! Seats And Fabric Parts Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl with a leather-and-vinyl cleaner. High water temperature and high water Warning! pressure car washers are available depending on the type of high pressure Fabric car washer device. If the car washer nozzle Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning is put too close to the vehicle or aimed at purposes. Many are potentially flammable, with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. one area for an extended period of time, it and if used in closed areas they may cause Clean it with a mild soap solution good could deform plastic parts or damage the respiratory harm. for upholstery and carpets. paint. Do not keep aerosol cans in the car: they Remove fresh spots immediately with a Do not use wax containing compounds might explode. Aerosol cans must not be fabric spot cleaner. exposed to a temperature exceeding (polish). Otherwise, it could result in paint To keep the fabric looking clean and damage. 122°F (50°C). When the vehicle is exposed to sunlight the internal temperature can fresh, take care of it. Otherwise its color In addition, do not use an electrical or air greatly exceed this value. will be affected, it can be stained easily, tool to apply wax. Otherwise, the frictional and its fire-resistance may be reduced. heat generated could result in deformation Note: Use only recommended cleaners of plastic parts or paint damage. Caution! and procedures. Others may affect appearance and fire-resistance.

Direct contact of air fresheners, insect Interior Panels repellents, suntan lotions, or hand When the interior panels need to be sanitizers, to the plastic, painted, or cleaned, use soft material such as a decorated surfaces of the interior may soft cloth soaked in clean water and cause permanent damage. Wipe away wrung out well and lightly wipe off dirt immediately. from the surface. Damage caused by these type of If a panel requires further cleaning, wipe products may not be covered by your New dirt off using a soft cloth soaked in mild Vehicle Limited Warranty. detergent (about 5% solution) and wipe Rubbing the interior side of the off any remaining detergent using a convertible top vigorously with a stiff brush cloth soaked in clean water and wrung or cloth may cause damage. out well.

269 Clean the webbing with a mild soap Instrument panel precautions solution recommended for upholstery or Caution! Prevent caustic solutions such as carpets. Follow instructions. Do not perfume and cosmetic oils from bleach or dye the belts, this may contacting the instrument panel. They Do not wipe leather parts using alcohol, weaken them. will damage and discolor the instrument chlorine bleach, or organic solvents such After cleaning the belts, thoroughly dry panel. If these solutions get on the as thinner, benzene, or gasoline. the belt webbing and make sure there instrument panel, wipe them off Otherwise, it may cause discoloration or is no remaining moisture before immediately. stains. retracting them. Note: Never use alcohol, gasoline and Plastic And Coated derivatives to clean the instrument Note: Parts panel lens. Scratches or nicks on the panels Clean interior plastic parts with a damp and metallic trim resulting from the use cloth (if possible made from microfiber), Caution! of a hard brush or cloth may not be and a solution of water and neutral, repairable. non-abrasive detergent. Do not use glazing agents. Glazing agents Be particularly careful when To clean oily or persistent stains, use contain ingredients which may cause cleaning high gloss panels and metallic specific products free from solvents and discoloration, wrinkling, cracks and trim as they can be easily scratched. designed to maintain the original peeling. appearance and color of the SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE components. Lap / Shoulder Belt Instrument Panel Top Remove any dust using a microfiber When cleaning, it is recommended that cloth, if necessary moistened with you use a clean towel dampened in a Warning! water. The use of paper tissues is not mild detergent to remove debris. recommended as these may leave residues. A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a Caution! collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. If the surface is rubbed harshly, it could Damaged parts must be replaced result in the surface being damaged immediately. Do not disassemble or modify leaving white scratch marks. the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).

270 Window Interiors Remove dust and sand first using a vacuum cleaner or other means, then If the windows become covered with an Caution! wipe dirt off using a soft cloth with a oily, greasy, or waxy film, clean them leather cleaner or a soft cloth soaked in with glass cleaner. Follow the directions mild soap. on the container. Sand and dust on the seat surface may Wipe off the remaining cleaner or soap damage the overcoat of the genuine Note: Do not scrape or scratch the using a cloth soaked in clean water and leather surfaces and accelerate wear. inside of the window glass. It could wrung out well. damage the thermal filaments. Greasy soiling on genuine leather may Remove moisture with a dry, soft cloth cause molding and stains. and allow the leather to further dry in a Caution! well-ventilated, shaded area. Rubbing hard with a stiff brush or cloth may cause damage. If the leather gets wet such as from Do not wipe the leather using alcohol, When washing the inside of the window rain, also remove moisture and dry it as soon as possible. chlorine bleach, or organic solvents such glass, use a soft cloth dampened in as thinner, benzene, or gasoline. lukewarm water, gently wiping the thermal Note: Otherwise, it may cause discoloration or filaments. Use of glass cleaning products stains. could damage the thermal filaments. Because genuine leather is a natural material, its surface is not uniform and If the seats get wet, promptly remove moisture with a dry cloth. Remaining Leather Parts — If it may have natural scars, scratches, and wrinkles. moisture on the surface may cause Equipped deterioration such as hardening and To maintain the quality for as long shrinkage. Caution! as possible, periodical maintenance, Exposure to direct sunlight for long about twice a year, is recommended. periods may cause deterioration and shrinkage. When parking the car under Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based direct sunlight for long periods, shade the and/or Ketone based cleaning products to interior using sunshades. clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result. Do not leave vinyl products on the seats for long periods as they may affect the leather quality and coloring. If the cabin temperature becomes hot, the vinyl may deteriorate and adhere to the genuine leather.

271 This page is intentionally left blank

272 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IDENTIFICATION DATA ...... 274 RECOMMENDED TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE ...... 275 ENGINE...... 277 TRANSMISSION ...... 278 BRAKES ...... 279 SUSPENSIONS ...... 280 STEERING ...... 281 DIMENSIONS...... 282 FLUID CAPACITIES ...... 284 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .....285 PERFORMANCE ...... 287

273 IDENTIFICATION DATA Identification Numbers Model Plate The model plate is located on the left side of door pillar.

10010104-122-001AB 10010106-121-001 Vehicle Identification Number Vehicle Emission Control Information Label Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label Tire Pressure Label (U.S.A. and Canada) The tire pressure label is located on the The motor vehicle safety standard label left side of door pillar. is located on the left side of door pillar.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 10010103121001 Model Plate Location Chassis Number/Vehicle Identification Number The Vehicle Identification Number is located below the left side (driver side) of the windshield.

10010107-121-002

10010109-121-001 Tire Pressure Label Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Engine Number Label The engine number label is located on Vehicle Emission Control the engine. Information Label (U.S.A. and Canada) The vehicle emission control information label is located under the hood. 274 RECOMMENDED Always check the tire inflation Checking Tire Pressure pressures on a regular basis according TIRE INFLATION Proceed as follows: PRESSURE to the recommended tire inflation pressure on the tire label and in 1. When you check the air pressure, On the tire label you will find the conjunction with the information in this make sure the tires are cold - meaning recommended tire inflation pressure in Owner's Manual. Driving your vehicle they are not hot from driving even a both psi and kPa for the tires installed with under-inflated tires is dangerous. mile. as original equipment on the vehicle. Under-inflation is the most common It is very important that the inflation cause of failures in any kind of tire and 2. Remove the cap from the valve on pressure of the tires on your vehicle is may result in severe cracking, tread one tire. maintained at the recommended separation or “blowout”, with 3. Firmly press a tire gauge onto the pressure. unexpected loss of vehicle control and valve. You should check the tire pressure increased risk of injury. Under-inflation regularly to insure that the proper increases sidewall flexing and rolling 4. Add air to achieve recommended air inflation pressure is maintained. resistance, resulting in heat buildup pressure. and internal damage to the tire. It 5. If you overfill the tire, release air by Note: results in unnecessary tire stress, pushing on the metal stem in the center irregular wear, loss of control and Tire pressures listed on the vehicle of the valve. Then recheck the pressure accidents. A tire can lose up to half of placard or tire information label indicate with your tire gauge. the recommended cold tire inflation its air pressure and not appear to be pressure, measured when the tires are flat. It is impossible to determine 6. Replace the valve cap. cold, after the vehicle has been parked whether or not tires are properly inflated just by looking at them. 7. Visually inspect the tires to make for at least three hours. As you drive, sure there are no nails or other objects the temperature in the tire warms up, embedded that could poke a hole in the increasing the tire pressure. tire and cause an air leak. 8. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges, cracks or other irregularities.

275 Glossary Of Terms B-pillar Tire Placard The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door. A label indicating the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes, recommended Original Equipment (OE) inflation pressure, and the maximum Describes components originally weight the vehicle can carry. equipped on the vehicle. Tire Identification Number (TIN) Vehicle Load Limit A number on the sidewall of each tire The maximum value of the combination providing information about the tire weight of occupants and cargo. brand and manufacturing plant, tire size, and date of manufacture. Bead Area of the Tire Area of the tire next to the rim. Inflation Pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire. Sidewall Area of the Tire Area between the bead area and the kPa tread. Kilopascal, the metric unit for air pressure. Tread Area of the Tire TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Area on the perimeter of the tire that psi contacts the road when it's mounted Pounds per square inch, the English on the vehicle. unit for air pressure.

276 ENGINE Engine

1.4 Turbo Multi Air Cycle Four Number and position of cylinders 4 in line Piston bore and stroke (mm) 72.0 x 80.4 Total displacement (cm³) 1368 9.8:1 Maximum power (kW) 119 Maximum power (HP) 160 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 5500 Maximum torque (Nm) 250 Maximum torque (lb.-ft.) 184 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 2500 Spark plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. 91 Octane Recommended (87 Octane Acceptable) Maximum 15% Fuel Ethanol Content Note: When cleaning the iridium plugs, do not use a wire brush. The fine particulate coating on the iridium alloy and platinum tips could be damaged.

Warning!

Modifications or repairs to the fuel supply system that are not carried out correctly or do not take the system’s technical specifications into account, can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

277 TRANSMISSION

Engine Traction Type Description 6-speed manual (*) / 6-speed 1.4 Turbo Multi Air RWD Manual/Automatic Automatic Transmission(**) (*) If equipped with manual transmission (**) If equipped with automatic transmission TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

278 BRAKES

Engine Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake Ventilated (floating type 11 in Solid (floating type 11 in 1.4 Turbo Multi Air Mechanical (lever type) (279.4 mm) diameter) (279.4 mm) in diameter) Note: Water, ice, and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake disks reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied.

279 SUSPENSIONS

Engine Front Rear 1.4 Turbo Multi Air Double wishbone with stabilizer bars Multilink with stabilizer bars TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

280 STEERING

Engine Turning circle curb to curb, ft (m) Type Double pinion electric power assist system 1.4 Turbo Multi Air 30.8 (9.4) (DP - EPAS) - rack and pinion

281 DIMENSIONS Dimensions Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unloaded. Trunk Volume: 4.9 cu. ft. (140 Liters) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

10000555-122-333 Vehicle Dimension Chart

ABCDEF 159.6 (4054 mm) 90.9 (2309 mm) 48.5 (1232 mm) 58.9 (1496 mm) 68.5 (1740 mm) 59.1 (1503 mm)

282 Weights Curb Weight: 2477 lbs (1124 kg) (if equipped with manual transmission) / 2516 lbs (1141 kg) (if equipped with automatic transmission).

283 FLUID CAPACITIES

Item Capacities Fuel tank 11.9 (gallons) / 45 (liters) Engine oil (without oil filter replacement) 3.3 (quarts) / 3.2 (liters) Engine oil (with oil filter replacement) 4.0 (quarts) / 3.8 (liters) Coolant (with manual transmission) 7.6 (quarts) / 7.2 (liters) Coolant (with automatic transmission) 7.5 (quarts) / 7.1 (liters) Manual transmission oil 2.2 (quarts) / 2.1 (liters) Automatic transmission fluid 7.8 (quarts) / 7.5 (liters) Rear differential oil 0.63 (quarts) / 0.6 (liters) Limited slip differential oil 0.63 (quarts) / 0.6 (liters)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Brake fluid (& clutch fluid) 0.57 (quarts) / 0.55 (liters)

284 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Fluids And Lubricants Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration.

Lubricant Specification Replacement interval We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the Engine oil requirements of FCA Material Standard According to Scheduled Servicing Plan MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. Mopar Long Life Coolant Concentrate for Coolant According to Scheduled Servicing Plan FIAT Spider Mopar Manual Transmission Long Life Gear Manual transmission oil Oil for FIAT Spider Mopar Automatic Transmission Long Life Automatic transmission fluid Fluid for FIAT Spider Mopar Long Life Hypoid Gear Oil for FIAT Rear differential oil Spider Mopar Long Life Limited Slip Additive for Limited slip differential oil FIAT Spider We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3. If Brake/clutch fluid DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. If lubricants compliant with the required specifications are not available, products that comply with the minimum required characteristics can be used for topping up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

285 Caution!

Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

286 PERFORMANCE Performance Top speed after the initial period of usage of the vehicle.

Version MPH (km/h) 1.4 Turbo Multi Air 160HP N/A

287 This page is intentionally left blank

288 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . .290 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .....290 WARRANTYINFORMATION.....292 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . .292 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . .293

289 SUGGESTIONS FOR IF YOU NEED Any communication to the OBTAINING SERVICE ASSISTANCE manufacturer's customer center should include the following information: FOR YOUR VEHICLE The manufacturer and its authorized Prepare For The dealer are vitally interested in your Owner's name and address Appointment satisfaction. We want you to be happy Owner's telephone number (home with our products and services. If you are having warranty work done, and office) Warranty service must be done by an be sure to bring the right papers with Authorized dealer name you, as well as your warranty folder. authorized dealer. We strongly All work to be performed may not be recommend that you take the vehicle to Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) an authorized dealer. They know your covered by the warranty. Discuss Vehicle delivery date and mileage additional charges with the service vehicle the best, and are most manager. Keep a maintenance log of concerned that you get prompt and FIAT Customer Center your vehicle's service history, as this high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the facilities, P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI can often provide a clue to the current 48321–8004 problem. factory-trained technicians, special CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE tools, and the latest information to Phone: 1-888-242-6342 Prepare A List ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and FIAT Canada Customer in a timely manner. Make a written list of your vehicle's Center problems or the specific work you want This is why you should always talk to an done. If you've had an accident or work authorized dealer service manager first. P.O. Box 1621 done that is not on your maintenance Most matters can be resolved with this Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 log, let the service advisor know. process. Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French Be Reasonable With If for some reason you are still not Requests satisfied, talk to the general manager or In Mexico Contact owner of the authorized dealer. They If you list a number of items and you want to know if you need assistance. Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, must have your vehicle by the end of 1240 the day, discuss the situation with the If an authorized dealer is unable to Sante Fe C.P. 05109 resolve the concern, you may contact service advisor and list the items in Mexico, D. F. order of priority. At many authorized the manufacturer's customer center. dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle In Mexico City: 5081-7568 at a minimal daily charge. If you need a Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. 290 Puerto Rico And U.S. Service Contract We appreciate that you have made a Virgin Islands major investment when you purchased You may have purchased a service the vehicle. An authorized dealer has Customer Service International contract for a vehicle to help protect also made a major investment in Services LLC you from the high cost of unexpected facilities, tools, and training to assure repairs after the manufacturer's New P.O. Box 191857 that you are absolutely delighted with Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The San Juan 00919-1857 the ownership experience. You will be manufacturer stands behind only the pleased with their sincere efforts to Tel.: (888) 242-6342 manufacturer's service contracts. If you resolve any warranty issues or related Fax: (787) 782-3345 purchased a manufacturer's service concerns. Customer Assistance contract, you will receive Plan For The Hearing Or Provisions and an Owner Identification Speech Impaired Card in the mail within three weeks of Warning! (TDD/TTY) the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service To assist customers who have hearing contract, call the manufacturer's Engine exhaust (internal combustion difficulties, the manufacturer has Service Contract National Customer engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or installed special TDD Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian (Telecommunication Devices for the emit, chemicals known to the State of residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / California to cause cancer and birth Deaf) equipment at its customer center. (800) 387-9983 French). defects, or other reproductive harm. In Any hearing or speech impaired The manufacturer will not stand behind addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles customer, who has access to a TDD or any service contract that is not the and certain products of component wear a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in manufacturer's service contract. It is contain, or emit, chemicals known to the the United States, can communicate not responsible for any service contract State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. with the manufacturer by dialing other than the manufacturer's service 1-800-380-CHRY. contract. If you purchased a service Canadian residents with hearing contract that is not a manufacturer's difficulties that require assistance can service contract, and you require use the special needs relay service service after the manufacturer's New offered by Bell Canada. For TTY Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for please refer to the contract documents, Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to and contact the person listed in those connect with a Bell Relay Service documents. operator.

291 WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY To contact NHTSA, you may call the INFORMATION DEFECTS Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at See the Warranty Information Booklet, In The 50 United States 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: for the terms and provisions of FCA US And Washington, D.C. 1-800-424-9153); or go to LLC and FCA Canada Inc. warranties http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to: applicable to this vehicle and market. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New or cause injury or death, you should Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, immediately inform the National Washington, D.C. 20590. You can Highway Traffic Safety also obtain other information about Administration (NHTSA) in addition motor vehicle safety from to notifying FCA US LLC. http://www.safercar.gov . If NHTSA receives similar In Canada complaints, it may open an If you believe that your vehicle has CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE investigation, and if it finds that a a safety defect, you should contact safety defect exists in a group of the Customer Service Department vehicles, it may order a recall and immediately. Canadian customers remedy campaign. However, who wish to report a safety defect NHTSA cannot become involved in to the Canadian government should individual problems between you, contact Transport Canada, Motor your authorized dealer or FCA US Vehicle Defect Investigations and LLC. Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ .

292 PUBLICATION Owner's Manuals ORDER FORMS These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service To order the following manuals, you and engineering specialists to acquaint may use either the website or the you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. phone numbers listed below. Visa, Included are starting, operating, Mastercard, American Express, and emergency and maintenance Discover orders are accepted. procedures as well as specifications, Service Manuals capabilities and safety tips. These comprehensive Service Manuals Call toll free at: provide the information that students and professional technicians need in 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A Or complete working knowledge of the Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: vehicle, system, and/or components is www.techauthority.com written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

293 This page is intentionally left blank

294 INDEX Back-Up Camera ...... 172 Precautions ...... 61 About Your Brakes ...... 155 Battery ...... 242 Raising ...... 60 Active Adaptive Shift (AAS) ...... 161 Charging ...... 243 Cooling System ...... 50 Adaptive Front Lighting System Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . .16 Coolant Level ...... 240 (AFS) ...... 42 Blind Spot Monitoring...... 118 Corrosion Protection ...... 263 Additives, Fuel ...... 179 Bodywork ...... 263 Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . .164 AirBag...... 135,140 Brake System...... 155 Cupholders ...... 72 Advance Front Air Bag ...... 135 Brakes ...... 279 Customer Assistance ...... 290 Air Bag Warning Light ...... 151 Bulb Replacement...... 190 Enhanced Accident Daytime Running Lights ...... 40 Response ...... 152,228 Camera, Rear...... 172 Diagnostic System, Onboard .....112 Event Data Recorder (EDR) .150,229 Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 180 Dimensions ...... 282 Maintaining Your Air Bag Care And Maintenance ...... 263 Disable Vehicle Towing ...... 226,228 System ...... 150 Certification Label ...... 182 Doors...... 26 Maintenance ...... 150 Changing A Flat Tire...... 209,246 Driving Air Bag Light ...... 151 Chart, Tire Sizing...... 247 Tips...... 183 Air Conditioning ...... 50 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Dynamic Stability Control Air Pressure Indicator Light) ...... 113 System (DSC) ...... 117 Tires ...... 253 Child Restraint ...... 131 Alarm Clean Air Gasoline ...... 178 Electric Brake Control System Security Alarm ...... 23 Traction Control System ...... 116 Cleaning Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . .116 Wheels ...... 259 Electric Power Steering ...... 74 Automatic Climate Controls ...... 52 Climate Control ...... 44 Electrical Power Outlets ...... 71 Automatic Dimming Mirror...... 36 Automatic ...... 52 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 164 Automatic Transmission ...... 158 Manual ...... 48 Auxiliary (Power Outlet)...... 71 Emergency Compact Spare Tire...... 257 In Case Of ...... 246 Auxiliary Driving Systems...... 118 Contract, Service ...... 291 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Convertible Top ...... 58 Release ...... 181 B-Pillar Location ...... 250 Lowering ...... 58 Emergency, In Case Of Flashers Gasoline, Reformulated ...... 178 Jump Starting ...... 223,224 Hazard Warning ...... 190 Gear Ranges ...... 159 Overheating ...... 225 Flooded Engine Starting ...... 225 Glass Cleaning ...... 271 INDEX Towing...... 226,228 Fluid Capacities ...... 284 GVWR...... 182 Emission Control System ...... 74 Fluid Level Checks Emission Control System Automatic Transmission ...... 242 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 190 Maintenance...... 113 Brake ...... 241 Head Restraints ...... 34 Engine ...... 277 Clutch ...... 241 Headlight Checking Oil Level ...... 239 Cooling System ...... 240 Adjustment ...... 42 Compartment ...... 239 Fluids And Lubricants...... 285 Headlights...... 38 Compartment Identification . . . .239 Fob, Key...... 14 Automatic ...... 40 Coolant (Antifreeze) ...... 240 Fog Lights...... 41 High Beam ...... 40 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 180 Fuel Switch ...... 38 Fails To Start ...... 225 Additives ...... 179 Time Delay ...... 41 Flooded, Starting ...... 225 Clean Air ...... 178 Heated Mirrors ...... 38 Jump Starting ...... 223,224 Consumption ...... 88 Heated Seats...... 33 Oil Reset ...... 84,85 Economy Monitor ...... 88 Heavy-Duty Use ...... 233 Overheating ...... 225 Ethanol ...... 178 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . .66 Starting ...... 224 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...... 180 Hood Engine Oil (Level Check) ...... 240 Materials Added ...... 179 Closing ...... 63 Enhanced Accident Response Methanol ...... 178 Opening ...... 62 Feature ...... 152,228 Fuel Filler Cap ...... 180 Hood Release ...... 62 Environment Protection Systems . . .74 Fuses How To Use This Manual ...... 3 Essential Information ...... 3 Engine Compartment ...... 203 Ethanol ...... 178 Interior ...... 201,207 Identification Data ...... 274 Exhaust Gas Cautions ...... 180 Underhood ...... 202 Ignition ...... 20 Exterior Lights ...... 38,193 Switch ...... 20 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . .66 Instrument Cluster Flash-To-Pass ...... 40 Gasoline, Clean Air ...... 178 Display ...... 78 Engine Oil Reset ...... 84,85 Leaving Home Light System ...... 42 Manual Climate Controls...... 48 Instrument Panel...... 11 Life Of Tires ...... 255 Heating ...... 50 Interior ...... 269 Lights Manual Transmission ...... 157 Interior Appearance Care ...... 269 AirBag...... 151 Methanol...... 178 Interior Lights ...... 70,200 Battery Saver ...... 70 Mirrors...... 35 Internal Equipment ...... 69 Bulb Replacement ...... 193 Automatic Dimming ...... 36 Storage ...... 69 Daytime Running ...... 40 Electric Powered ...... 37 Fog...... 41 Exterior Folding ...... 37 Jack Location...... 209 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 190 Heated ...... 38 Jack Operation ...... 246 Headlights ...... 193 Outside ...... 35 Jacking And Tire Changing ...... 209 High Beam ...... 40 Rearview ...... 36 Jacking And Tire Changing Illuminated Entry ...... 70 Vanity ...... 70 Instructions ...... 210 Interior ...... 70 Jacking Instructions ...... 210 Leaving Home Light System ....42 Occupant Restraints ...... 125 Jump Starting...... 223,224 Rear Tail Lamps ...... 193 Oil Reset...... 84,85 Turn Signals ...... 41,42 Onboard Diagnostic System .....112 Key Fob Loading Vehicle ...... 182 Operating Precautions ...... 112 Programming Additional Key Fobs ...... 23 Tires ...... 250 Operator Manual Owner's Manual ...... 293 Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Locks Keyless Entry) ...... 16 Power Door ...... 30 Outside Rearview Mirrors ...... 35 Key Fob Programming (Remote Lubrication, Body ...... 243 Overheating, Engine...... 225 Keyless Entry) ...... 23 Keyless Enter-N-Go...... 21 Maintenance Monitor ...... 84 Paint Care ...... 263 Passive Entry ...... 21 Maintenance Procedures ...... 243 Park Assist ...... 168 Keys ...... 14 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Parking Brake...... 156 Engine) ...... 113 Passive Entry ...... 21 Lane Change Assist...... 42 Manual Performance ...... 287 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 126 Service ...... 293 Periodic Checks ...... 233 Personal Settings ...... 108 Personalization Features ...... 108 Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 130 Adjustment ...... 32 Placard, Tire And Loading Remote Keyless Entry Heated ...... 33 Information...... 250 Programming Additional Key Height Adjustment ...... 32 INDEX Power Fobs ...... 23 Reclining ...... 32 Brakes ...... 155 Replacement Fuses ...... 200 Security Alarm ...... 23 Door Locks ...... 30 Replacement Tires...... 256 Service Assistance ...... 290 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Reporting Safety Defects ...... 292 Service Contract ...... 291 Outlet) ...... 71 Restraints, Child ...... 131 Service Manuals ...... 293 Outside Mirrors ...... 37 Restraints, Head...... 34 Shift Lever Override ...... 161 Windows ...... 56 Shifting Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . .128 Safety Defects, Reporting ...... 292 Automatic Transmission ...... 159 Preparation For Jacking ...... 209 Safety Information, Tire ...... 246 Shoulder Belts ...... 126 Pretensioners Schedule, Maintenance ...... 232 Snow Tires ...... 257 Seat Belts ...... 130 Scheduled Servicing ...... 233 Spare Tires ...... 257,258 Seat Belts ...... 126 Starting...... 154,224 Radar Sensors ...... 167 Child Restraints ...... 131 Button ...... 20 Radial Ply Tires ...... 254 Energy Management Feature . . .131 Engine Fails To Start ...... 225 Radio Frequency Front Seat ...... 126,129 General Information ...... 19,23 Starting And Operating ...... 224 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . .129 Radio transmitter and mobile Starting Procedures ...... 224 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 126 phones ...... 5 Steering ...... 281 Operating Instructions ...... 129 Rear Exterior ...... 10 Tilt Column ...... 35 Pregnant Women ...... 128 Rear ParkSense System ...... 168 Wheel, Tilt ...... 35 Pretensioners ...... 130 Rearview Mirror ...... 36 Storage Rear Seat ...... 126 Recommended Tire Inflation Console ...... 69 Pressure ...... 275 Reminder ...... 130 Storage, Vehicle ...... 262 Recreational Towing...... 183 Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 130 Storing Your Vehicle ...... 262 Reformulated Gasoline ...... 178 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 130 Sun Visor ...... 70 Refueling Procedure...... 180 Seats ...... 32 Supplemental Restraint System – Refueling The Vehicle ...... 178 AirBag...... 135,140 Suspensions ...... 280 Quality Grading ...... 261 Passive Entry Programming .....21 Symbols...... 3 Radial ...... 254 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...... 261 Replacement ...... 256 Universal Garage Door Opener Tire And Loading Information Rotation ...... 260 (HomeLink) ...... 66 Placard ...... 250 Safety ...... 246,253 Universal Transmitter ...... 66 Tire Markings ...... 246 Sizes ...... 247 Tire Repair Kit...... 214 Vehicle Loading ...... 182,250 Snow Tires ...... 257 Tire Safety Information ...... 246 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.....4 Spare Tires ...... 257,258 Tire Service Kit ...... 214 Vent Operation ...... 45 Spinning ...... 255 Tires...... 253,257,261 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 255 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...... 255 Warranty Information ...... 292 Towing Washers, Windshield ...... 43,44,242 Air Pressure ...... 253 Disabled Vehicle ...... 226,228 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...... 259 Chains ...... 259 Towing Eyes...... 226 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...... 259 Changing ...... 210,246 Traction Control ...... 116 Wheels And Tires ...... 246 Compact Spare ...... 257 Trailer Towing ...... 183 Wind Blocker ...... 74 Flat Changing ...... 209,210 Transmission ...... 278 Windows ...... 56 General Information ...... 253,257 Tread Wear Indicators...... 255 Power...... 56 High Speed ...... 254 Trip Computer ...... 79 Windshield Washers ...... 43 Inflation Pressure ...... 253 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid)...... 63 Windshield Wiper Blades ...... 244 Jacking ...... 246 Turn Signals...... 41 Life Of Tires ...... 255 Windshield Wipers...... 43,244 Load Capacity ...... 250 Uconnect Settings Wipers Blade Replacement ...... 244 Pressure Monitoring System Customer Programmable Wipers, Rain Sensitive ...... 43 (TPMS) ...... 124 Features ...... 21 Wrecker Towing ...... 226,228

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than EQUIPMENT normal may require special precautions. Special design considerations are incorporated into this All installations should be checked for possible interfer- vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio ence between the communications equipment and the frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone vehicle’s electronic systems. equipment must be installed properly by trained person- nel. The following must be observed during installation. WARNING: The positive power connection should be made directly Operating, servicing and maintaining a to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body passenger vehicle or off-road highway sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals This connection should not be fused. including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used the State of California to cause cancer and in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may birth defects or other reproductive harm. affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on To minimize exposure, avoid breathing vehicles so equipped. exhaust, do not idle the engine except as The antenna cable should be as short as practical and necessary, service your vehicle in a routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use well-ventilated area and wear gloves or only fully shielded coaxial cable. wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. 19BAFIA-126-AA ©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group First Edition Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC. Printed in U.S.A.